Yamaha ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner's Manual

Yamaha ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner's Manual
Owner’s Manual
* For information on assembling the ELC-02, refer to the instructions at the end of
this manual.
** The explanations in this Owner’s Manual apply to the ELC-02. Only the Main unit
is included in the ELCU-M02. Since the ELCU-M02 does not include the Bench,
Stand, Speaker, or Pedal unit, explanations for those items can be ignored when
using the ELCU-M02.
v2.1
EN
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
For AC Adaptor
WARNING
CAUTION
• This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic
instruments. Do not use for any other purpose.
• When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If
some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power
switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the
outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet, keep in
mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if the
power switch is turned off. When you are not using the instrument
for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall
AC outlet.
• Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments.
For ELC-02/ELCU-M02
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/AC adaptor
Water warning
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the
cord, or place heavy objects on it.
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The
required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Use the specified adaptor (page 208) only. Using the wrong adaptor
can result in damage to the instrument or overheating.
• Use only the supplied power cord/plug for the Electone.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or
wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles
or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings.
If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.
Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service
personnel.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust
which may have accumulated on it.
Fire warning
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning
item may fall over and cause a fire.
Do not open
• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the
instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal
components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,
discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
If you notice any abnormality
• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the
power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then
have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.
- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
- It emits unusual smells or smoke.
- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.
- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.
DMI-5
2
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
1/2
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/AC adaptor
Connections
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a
multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or
possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,
turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on
or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,
always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can
damage it.
• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum
levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the
instrument to set the desired listening level.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not
to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
Assembly
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly
process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence
might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.
Location
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/oneinch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation,
and possibly result in the instrument overheating.
• When transporting or moving the instrument, always use two or
more people. Attempting to lift the instrument by yourself may
damage your back, result in other injury, or cause damage to the
instrument itself.
Handling caution
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps
on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or
others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational
failure.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the
instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches
or connectors.
• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of
time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause
permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or
ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
Using the bench (If included)
• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool
or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or
injury.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to
prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip
over them.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are
using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs,
immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from
the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is
still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not
using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power
cord from the wall AC outlet.
• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to
prevent the possibility of accident or injury.
• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use,
tighten them periodically using the specified tool in order to prevent
the possibility of accident or injury.
• Keep special watch over any small children so that they don’t fall off
the rear of the bench. Since the bench does not have a backrest,
unsupervised use may result in accident or injury.
• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it,
use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage
to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
DMI-5
2/2
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
3
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the
product, damage to data, or damage to other property,
follow the notices below.
 Handling and Maintenance
copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use
others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include,
without limitation, all computer software, style files,
MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound
recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and
contents outside of personal use is not permitted under
relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal
consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE
ILLEGAL COPIES.
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio,
stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric
devices. Otherwise, the instrument and/or other devices
may generate noise. When you use the instrument along
with an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch,
we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON”
on that device in order to avoid noise caused by
communication.
 About functions/data bundled with the
instrument
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or
vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct
sunlight, near a heater, or in a vehicle during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to
the internal components or unstable operation.
(Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41°
– 104°F.)
• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been
provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the
instrument, since this might discolor the panel or
keyboard.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not
use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or
chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
 Saving data
• Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect
operation. Save important data to a USB flash drive.
• To protect against data loss through media damage, we
recommend that you save important data you’ve created
onto two USB storage devices.
Information
 About copyrights
• Copying of the commercially available musical data
including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio
data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
• This product incorporates and bundles computer
programs and contents in which Yamaha owns
• This device is capable of using various types/formats of
music data by optimizing them to the proper format for
use with the device in advance. As a result, this device
may not play the data back precisely as their producers
or composers originally intended.
 About this manual
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this
manual are for instructional purposes only, and may
appear somewhat different from those on your
instrument.
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft®
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• Apple, iTunes, Mac, Macintosh, iPhone, iPad, iPod
touch and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in
the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
• Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha
Corporation.
• The company names and product names in this manual
are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
• The panel illustrations and LCD screens shown in this
owner’s manual are taken from the ELC-02/ELCU-M02,
Version 2.1.
• The pan flute and sitar, shown in the displays of the
Electone, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of
Musical Instruments.
The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on
or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this
serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a
permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
(bottom_en_01)
4
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
The name plate is located
on the bottom of the unit.
Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of a fine electronic organ, the Electone STAGEA ELC-02/ELCU-M02.
The Yamaha Electone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital
electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical versatility.
In order to make the most of your Electone and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to read the manual
thoroughly while trying out the various features described.
Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference.
About model names
In this manual, the ELS-02 and ELS-02C are referred to as “ELS-02 series” while the previous models are referred to as
“ELS-01 series.”
About the Manuals
This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.
Included Documents
Owner’s Manual (this book)
Provides overall explanations of the functions of this instrument.
Online Materials (Downloadable from the web)
MIDI Reference
Contains MIDI related information such as MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart.
For Electone users iPhone/iPad Connection Manual
Explains how to connect this instrument to the iPhone/iPad.
To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads. Select your country, enter “ELC-02” to the Model Name box,
then click [SEARCH].
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Items Included with the ELC-02
• Main unit
• Stand (page 197)
*2
• Speaker (page 198) *2
• Pedal unit (page 199) *2
*1 May not be included depending on your particular area.
Please check with your Yamaha dealer.
*2 Bench, Stand, Speaker and Pedal unit are not included in
ELCU-M02.
• Bench (page 202) *2
• Accessories
- Owner’s Manual (this book)
- Owner’s Manual (for the Speaker)
- Music rest
- Music rest brackets (×2)
- AC adaptor *1
- Power cord *1 (for the Electone)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
5
Main Features
A wide variety of Voices including Super Articulation Voices
pages 34 and 37
• The Electone features a wide variety of special Super Articulation Voices, which realistically recreate characteristic
instrument sounds, such as the sound of finger slides on guitar and the breath noises of saxophone or other wind
instruments, as well as many of the performance techniques such as legato, vibrato and glissando necessary for wind
instruments.
• The Electone features a piano Voice created with samples of the Yamaha CFX flagship concert grand piano, as well
as high-quality Voices of strings, orchestra percussion, and ethnic instruments of the world — lending amazing
dynamic realism to your Electone performance.
• The Electone adds to a virtually limitless variety of Organ Flute Voices. The authentic touch response keyboard lets
you play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument.
Sophisticated “Registration Menu” which can be called up
any time during your performance
page 19
The five Registration Menu buttons on the front panel feature preset Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up
the Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in the Registration Menu are divided into basic
music categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit your
own performance needs.
Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment
page 54
The exceptionally of wide selection of various rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your
performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) — such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break — that
you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional. Each rhythm
has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic backing as well as
embellishments.
Convenient Edit Functions
pages 48, 79, 93,
and 136
• The Voice Link function lets you collect your favorite Voices to a single display and call them up any time during
your performance.
• The Registration Memory function lets you memorize your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re
needed. Up to 80 Registrations (5 Banks of 16 Registrations each) can be stored.
• The Voice Edit function lets you create up to 80 original Voices as User Voices. From a wide variety of more than
300 Effect Types divided into 16 categories, two Effect Types can be assigned to each Voice Section, giving you even
more tools to enhance, transform and customize the Voices.
• The Keyboard Percussion feature allows for flexible and detailed editing, letting you assign your desired percussion
sound to each note of the keyboard to create your own original drum kit.
Audio Recording
page 130
You can record your performances as audio data (.WAV) to a USB flash drive. Since the data is saved in stereo WAV
format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to and played on portable music
players by using a computer, allowing you to share your recordings with your friends, and make your own CDs to
enjoy as well.
6
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Large, 7.0-inch TFT-LCD with Intuitive Touch Panel Operation
page 14
This large LCD display not only lets you clearly see a wide selection of settings and parameters at almost any angle, it
also serves as a touch control panel — letting you intuitively make selections and adjust settings simply by touching
the screen! Once you touch a setting, you can even adjust it in finer detail if necessary with the Data Control dial.
This Electone is compatible with the following formats.
GM (General MIDI) is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. GM System Level 2 is a
standard specification that enhances the original GM and improves Song data compatibility.
It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and
integrated effect processing.
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha
specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and
effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality
and open-ended expandability for the future. This instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an
XF file containing lyric data is played.
GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major
enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well
as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.
The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified
format.
“AEM” is the trademark of Yamaha’s leading-edge tone generation technology. For information on
AEM, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.
• The bitmap fonts used in this Electone have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
7
Contents
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................... 2
5. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
54
About the Manuals...................................................................... 5
Items Included with the ELC-02.................................................. 5
Main Features ............................................................................. 6
Panel Layout
10
Front Panel................................................................................ 10
LCD Display/Display Select...................................................... 12
Overview ................................................................................... 12
1. Quick Introductory Guide
13
Getting Started.......................................................................... 13
Turning the Power On......................................................... 13
Using the LCD Display ............................................................. 14
Changing the display page................................................ 14
Using the display buttons................................................... 14
Adjusting parameter values by using the display sliders .. 15
LCD Display Settings................................................................ 16
Selecting the display language.......................................... 16
Muting the touch panel sound............................................ 16
Adjusting the display brightness ........................................ 16
Voice Guide .............................................................................. 17
Adjusting the Voice Guide settings .................................... 17
Voice Display ............................................................................ 17
Registration Menu..................................................................... 19
Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu .......... 19
Registration Menu list ......................................................... 20
Confirming the Electone Version .............................................. 23
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone) ....................................... 23
2. Voices
24
Voices for Each Keyboard ........................................................ 24
Selecting Voices with the Voice Buttons................................... 25
Registering a Voice to Voice Link....................................... 25
Changing the Voice volume ............................................... 26
Selecting Voices from the User Buttons ................................... 28
Voice List .................................................................................. 29
Tone Generator......................................................................... 37
AWM Tone Generator......................................................... 37
3. Organ Flutes
38
4. Voice Controls and Effects
40
Settings Selected from the Voice Condition Display ................ 41
Selecting from the Panel........................................................... 44
Reverb ................................................................................ 44
Sustain................................................................................ 46
Rotary Speaker................................................................... 47
Using Voice Link ....................................................................... 48
Registering a Voice with the settings on the Voice Condition
display to Voice Link .......................................................... 48
Selecting a Voice registered to Voice Link......................... 48
Editing the Voice registered to Voice Link ......................... 49
Releasing the current Voice settings from Voice Link ........ 49
Registering a Voice to Voice Link with a different
Voice name......................................................................... 50
Deleting a Voice from Voice Link ....................................... 50
Effect List .................................................................................. 52
8
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Selecting Rhythms with the Rhythm Buttons.............................54
Selecting a rhythm ..............................................................54
Operating the rhythm from the panel..................................55
Changing the rhythm volume..............................................57
Adjusting the tempo............................................................57
Changing the rhythm reverb ...............................................58
Selecting Rhythms from the User Buttons.................................58
Rhythm List................................................................................59
Accompaniment ........................................................................63
Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) ..........64
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) .......................................................65
Keyboard Percussion ................................................................66
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion ..............................66
Preset Keyboard Percussion List........................................68
Creating a User Keyboard Percussion Kit ..........................79
Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings .......................81
Detailed settings for each percussion instrument ..............81
Kit Assign list.......................................................................83
6. Registration Memory
93
Storing Registrations .................................................................93
Storing Registrations to Another Bank ......................................94
Selecting Registrations..............................................................94
Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive......................95
Initializing Registration Memory ................................................96
Registration Shift .......................................................................97
Setting the Registration Shift mode
in the Regist Shift display....................................................97
Confirming the Registration Shift setting
in the Voice Display ............................................................99
Unifying Values/Settings of a Specific Parameter ...................100
Copying Registrations .............................................................102
7. Music Data Recorder (MDR)
104
Calling Up the MDR Display....................................................104
Using the MDR Display ...........................................................104
Song icons ........................................................................106
Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal..108
Using USB flash drives .....................................................108
Formatting a USB Flash Drive .................................................109
Selecting a Song .....................................................................110
Searching for a Song ........................................................110
Recording................................................................................112
Recording your performance............................................112
Re-recording (Retry) .........................................................112
Recording specified parts only.........................................113
Punch-in recording ...........................................................114
Changing the Song Name.......................................................114
Saving Registrations and Other Data to a Unit .......................116
Creating two or more Registration Units in a Song...........116
Overwriting Registration data to a Unit .............................116
Changing the order of the Registration Units ...................117
Recalling Recorded Registrations...........................................118
Playing Back a Song ...............................................................119
Playing back the selected part(s) .....................................120
Fast forward, Rewind and Pause ......................................120
Changing the tempo .........................................................121
Repeat playback...............................................................121
Displaying the Score............................................................... 122
Changing the score contents and settings ...................... 123
Other Functions (Tools) .......................................................... 124
Song copy ........................................................................ 124
Song delete ...................................................................... 126
Converting to XG .............................................................. 127
Converting to EL format.................................................... 128
Converting from EL format ............................................... 129
Checking the remaining memory ..................................... 129
8. Audio
130
Recording Your Performance as Audio .................................. 130
Playing Back Audio Files ........................................................ 132
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause .................................... 133
Changing the Volume, Tempo and Pitch ......................... 134
Repeat playback .............................................................. 134
Other Functions (Tools) .......................................................... 135
Creating a New Folder/Deleting the File/
Changing the File Name................................................... 135
Audio file copy.................................................................. 135
9. Voice Edit
136
Voice Structure ....................................................................... 136
AWM Voice structure........................................................ 136
Editing a Voice........................................................................ 136
Selecting a Voice for editing ............................................ 136
Editing an AWM Voice...................................................... 137
Saving the Edited Voice.......................................................... 140
Quitting Voice Edit .................................................................. 141
Recalling an Edited Voice....................................................... 141
10. Rhythm Program
142
Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation...................... 142
Rhythm Pattern Program......................................................... 142
Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program .............................. 142
Basic settings for the rhythm pattern ............................... 144
Entering percussion sounds to a rhythm pattern
— Step Write .................................................................... 147
Editing entered percussion notes .................................... 148
Entering percussion sounds to a rhythm pattern
— Real Time Write............................................................ 151
Creating backing patterns (Rhythmic Chord function) .... 152
Changing the Voices for Accompaniment parts .............. 154
Adjusting volume and panning ........................................ 155
Effect settings................................................................... 155
Detailed settings for each percussion instrument............ 156
Saving rhythm patterns .................................................... 157
Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program............................... 158
Recalling User rhythm patterns ........................................ 159
Selecting rhythms from a USB flash drive ........................ 159
Percussion Kit list ............................................................. 160
Rhythm Sequence Program.................................................... 168
Selecting a sequence....................................................... 168
Programming a sequence................................................ 169
Auditioning a sequence ................................................... 169
Editing an existing Rhythm Sequence ............................. 170
Programming a Registration Sequence ........................... 170
Editing an existing Registration Sequence ...................... 171
Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program.......................... 172
Playing Rhythm Sequences ............................................. 172
Playing all sequences in order ......................................... 172
Copying a Rhythm Sequence .......................................... 173
Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data
to a USB Flash Drive............................................................... 173
11. Foot Controllers
174
Footswitches............................................................................174
Controlling the Rhythm......................................................175
Controlling Glide ...............................................................175
Controlling Rotary Speaker ...............................................176
Calling up another page of the music score.....................176
Controlling the Super Articulation Voices .........................176
Foot Pedal (sold separately) ...................................................176
Controlling Sustain ............................................................176
Controlling Melody On Chord ...........................................177
Controlling Lead Slide with Foot Pedal (sold separately) .177
Controlling the Solo function .............................................177
Expression Pedals...................................................................178
Controlling Pitch Bend ......................................................178
Controlling the Rhythm Tempo .........................................179
12. Transpose and Pitch Controls
180
13. Connections
181
Accessory Jacks and Controls................................................181
Connection Examples – External Devices...............................183
Using headphones............................................................183
Playing the sounds of the Electone through
an external audio system ..................................................183
Using a mixer for live performance...................................183
Selecting Outputs for Each Part........................................184
Recording the sounds of the Electone to
an external recorder..........................................................184
Outputting the sound of an external device through
the speakers of this Electone............................................185
Connecting a microphone ................................................185
Controlling external MIDI devices from the Electone........185
Controlling the Electone from an external device .............186
Connecting a Pedal Unit ...................................................186
Connecting a Foot Pedal ..................................................186
Connection with Computer......................................................187
MIDI Control ............................................................................188
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad.................................................189
Wireless LAN settings .......................................................189
Wireless LAN Detailed Settings ........................................194
Initialize the wireless LAN settings....................................196
Glossary of Terms .............................................................196
14. Appendix
197
Stand Assembly ......................................................................197
Installing the Speaker..............................................................198
Installing the Pedal unit ...........................................................199
Installing and Connecting the Main Unit .................................201
Installing the Music Rest .........................................................202
Using the Bench (if included)..................................................202
Troubleshooting.......................................................................204
Specifications ..........................................................................207
Index .......................................................................................209
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
9
Panel Layout
Front Panel
[VOICE SECTION 2]
button (page 24)
LEAD VOICE 1/2
(page 24)
UPPER KEYBOARD
VOICE 1/2 (page 24)
SUSTAIN buttons
(page 46)
REVERB buttons
(page 44)
REGISTRATION MENU
(page 19)
RHYTHM/
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION
(page 54)
LOWER KEYBOARD
VOICE 1/2 (page 25)
PEDAL VOICE 1/2
(page 25)
13
[M.] (Memory) button
(page 93)
10
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
14
15
16
1
2
3
MASTER VOLUME dial
(page 13)
LCD display/DISPLAY SELECT
(page 12)
[P] Power switch
(page 13)
[USB TO DEVICE] terminals
(page 108)
4
5
6
7
Registration memory
(page 93)
8
9
10
11
12
D.
[D.] (Disable) button
(page 94)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
11
LCD Display/Display Select
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LCD display (touch panel).................... page 14
DATA CONTROL dial........................... page 15
[VOICE DISPLAY] button ...................... page 17
[A.B.C./M.O.C.] button ................. pages 64, 65
[MDR] button..................................page 104
[FOOT SWITCH] button ................pages 97, 174
[UTILITY] button ........... pages 16, 178, 180, 188
[AUDIO] button................................page 130
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
)
!
@
#
$
2
9
)
!
@
#
$
[VOICE EDIT] button ......................... page 136
[PATTERN] button ............................ page 142
[SEQUENCE] button .......................... page 168
[U. ORGAN FLUTES] button...................page 38
[L. ORGAN FLUTES] button ...................page 38
[ROTARY SP SPEED] button ..................page 47
Overview
Music rest (page 202)
Front Panel (page 10)
Upper keyboard
USB TO DEVICE terminals (page 182)
Lower keyboard
Main unit
I/O connectors
(page 181)
Speaker (page 198)
Right footswitch (page 97)
Left footswitch (page 174)
Expression pedal (page 13)
Second expression pedal (page 178)
Pedalboard (page 199)
Keyboard stand
(page 197)
NOTE
• For information on the Stand, Pedal unit, Speakers and Bench, refer to the pages 197 to 203.
• Stand, Pedal unit, Speakers and Bench are not included in ELCU-M02.
12
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
1 Quick Introductory Guide
Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life, we
recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest possible
manner how to start playing your Electone.
2
Getting Started
3
Turning the Power On
1
Connect the plugs of the AC adaptor in
the order shown in the illustration.
4
Cable clip
Ensure that the speaker and the Pedal
Unit are correctly connected (page 201).
Plug the power cord of the speakers
into an appropriate electrical outlet.
Press the [P] Power switch
located on the right of the
keyboard to turn the power on.
To turn off the Electone, press the
[P] Power switch again.
DC IN jack
(page 181)
AC outlet
CAUTION
2
DC plug
Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is
still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.
When you are not using the instrument for a long time,
make sure you unplug the power cable from the wall
AC outlet.
3
1 Power cord
AC
adaptor
AC plug
Cable clip
Wrap the DC output cable of the adaptor around the
cable clip (as shown below) to prevent accidental
unplugging of the cable during operation.
5
Press the Power switch of the
Speaker to turn the power on.
The POWER indicator lights up green
when the power is ON.
6
WARNING
Use the specified adaptor (page 208) only. The use of
other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to
both the adaptor and the instrument.
Set the MASTER VOLUME control.
The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall
control that affects the volume of the entire
Electone.
Increasing
the volume
WARNING
Use only the supplied power cord/plug for the Electone.
CAUTION
Decreasing
the volume
Remove the AC plug from the AC outlet when the
instrument is not to be used for extended periods of
time, or during electrical storms.
NOTE
Follow this procedure in reverse order when disconnecting
the AC adaptor.
7
Press the Expression pedal down with
your foot.
CAUTION
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the Electone.
The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the
Electone. Yamaha products are manufactured specifically
for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be
sold. If you intend to use the instrument in another
location, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage,
please consult with a qualified technician.
Maximum
volume
Minimum
volume
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
13
Using the LCD Display
Using the LCD Display
This instrument features a special touch panel that allows
you to change the parameters by simply touching the
‘virtual’ buttons or sliders on the display. (Please note that
two or more parameters cannot be operated
simultaneously.)
You can also use the Data Control dial (page 12) to make
fine changes to the parameter value shown in the display.
NOTE
When cleaning the display, use a soft, dry cloth.
Using the display buttons
There are three types of display buttons: those that select
a function, those that switch a function on/off, and those
that open a list or menu of parameters. To select the
desired function, simply press the button in the display
directly.
To switch a function on/off or open a parameter list, see
the instructions below.
To switch the function on or off:
On
NOTICE
Do not use any sharp or hard tools to operate the touch
panel. Doing so may damage the display.
Changing the display page
There are some oval-shaped numbered buttons at the top
right of the display. Pressing these buttons changes the
“page” of the display. The button of the selected page is
highlighted in orange.
Page 1
Off, or muted (button is grayed out)
Page 2
Press this button
to select Page 1
14
You can independently mute each Voice section in the
Voice Display, each accompaniment part in Rhythm
Menu display, and each Element in the Voice Edit display.
Press this button
to select Page 2
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Press this button
to select Page 3
Using the LCD Display
To open the parameter list:
Touching the display slider directly:
Quick Introductory Guide
To change a display slider value, press the desired point in
the slider. The slider moves to the point that is pressed.
You can also change the parameter value by sliding your
finger up or down while holding down on the display
slider.
1
Slider will move to the point you touch
When you press a button, a parameter list will appear in
which you can select the desired parameter. When you
select items in the display, the list closes automatically.
You can also close the list by pressing the [CLOSE] button
at the top right of the list.
Slider will follow your finger
Using the Data Control dial:
To change the parameter value:
To make coarse changes to the value, use the []/[]
buttons. For fine adjustment, use the Data Control dial.
Touch on/above the slider in the display to enable the
parameter and set a rough value, then turn the Data
Control dial.
Touch here to enable the parameter
DATA CONTROL
DATA CONTROL
Adjusting parameter values by
using the display sliders
You can adjust some parameters such as Volume, Reverb,
Pan and so on, by using the ‘virtual’ sliders in the display.
There are two ways to move the slider in the display:
touching it directly, and using the Data Control dial. We
suggest that you touch the display slider when making
coarse adjustments and use the Data Control dial for fine
adjustment.
Blue mark
To control Pan, you can move the horizontal slider in the
same way as vertical sliders.
DATA CONTROL
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
15
LCD Display Settings
LCD Display Settings
Here you can change the display settings: displayed
language (English or Japanese), touch panel sound, and
display brightness.
Selecting the display language
The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English
and Japanese. The default setting is English.
1
Muting the touch panel sound
By default, the Electone is set with the touch panel sound
turned on, giving you audio feedback when you press a
button or control. If you want to mute the touch panel
sound, follow the procedure below.
1
2
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up
GLOBAL Page of the Utility display.
Press the [OFF] button of the TOUCH
PANEL SOUND to mute the sound.
TOUCH PANEL SOUND
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the
GLOBAL Page of the Utility display.
To turn the sound on again, select [ON] in step 2.
NOTE
The settings in the Utility display are automatically saved
when another display is called up.
2
Press the desired button,
(Japanese) or [English].
LANGUAGE
Adjusting the display brightness
You can adjust the display brightness to a comfortable,
easy-to-read level.
1
2
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the
GLOBAL Page of the Utility display.
Move the LCD BRIGHTNESS slider by
touching it directly or using the Data
Control dial.
Higher settings make the display brighter and lower
settings make it darker.
LCD BRIGHTNESS
16
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Voice Guide
Voice Display
The Voice Guide function gives you audible information
on the current display or operation being executed. To
use this function, you need to download the Voice Guide
(audio) file from the Yamaha website, and save it to USB
flash drive, which you then connect to this instrument.
For information on using Voice Guide, refer to the Voice
Guide Tutorial Manual (simple text file).
For information on downloading Voice Guide (audio)
files and the Voice Guide Tutorial Manual, access the
website of your product via the URL below, then go to the
“Features” page:
https://www.yamaha.com/
You can visually confirm the currently assigned Voices to
each keyboard, currently selected rhythm, Registration
Shift, and so on, in the Voice Display.
How to call up the Voice Display:
Quick Introductory Guide
Voice Guide
1
The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is
turned on. To call up the Voice Display from any other
display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button.
NOTE
Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Precautions
when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” and “Using USB
flash drives” on page 108.
Adjusting the Voice Guide settings
You can adjust the volume and the speed of the Voice
Guide.
1
2
3
Connect the USB flash drive in which
the Voice Guide file is saved to the [USB
TO DEVICE] terminal.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up
GLOBAL Page of the Utility display.
Move the VOLUME and SPEED sliders
of [VOICE GUIDE] to adjust the volume
and the speed.
The Voice Display consists of three different pages that
can be switched by pressing the [1], [2], or [3] button at
the top right of the display.
VOICE GUIDE
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
17
Voice Display
Voice Display [Page 1]
Reference pages
• Registration Memory and Bank (page 93)
• Storing Registrations to Another Bank (page 94)
Switching the display pages
8 Registration Shift
Shows the current position of the Registration Shift.
1
Reference page
• Registration Shift (page 97)
8
7
2
3
4
5
Voice Display [Page 2]
6
1 Voice Sections
Shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice
section. You can also mute a specific Voice section by
pressing its button (the button is grayed-out).
Reference page
• Selecting a Voice (page 25)
2 RHYTHM
Shows the currently selected rhythm.
Reference page
• Selecting a rhythm (page 54)
3 A.B.C. MODE
You can confirm the parameter values (for example,
Reverb, Volume, Pan) for each Registration Memory
simultaneously. Moreover, you can unify the values of a
specific parameter used in various Registration Memories
at one time. See page 100 for the details.
Voice Display [Page 3]
Shows the Auto Bass Chord mode.
Reference page
• Auto Bass Chord (page 64)
4 TEMPO
Shows the current rhythm tempo.
Reference page
• Adjusting the tempo (page 57)
5 BAR/BEAT
Shows the bar/beat when the rhythm is playing.
6 Registration Unit
Shows the currently selected Registration Unit.
Reference pages
• About Banks and Units (page 96)
• Creating two or more Registration Units in a Song (page 116)
7 Registration Bank Selection
For selecting the desired Registration Bank. You can
select the Banks from A (at top) to an empty Bank next to
the last Bank containing data. When Banks A and B
contain Registration data, for example, you can select
Banks A, B, and C (which is empty). The on/off
indication of Bank (A – E) shows whether the selected
Bank contains data or not.
18
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
The Registrations stored to the Registration number can
be copied to another Registration number for each
individual section. Also Banks can be copied or deleted.
For details, see page 103.
Reference page
• Registration Memory (page 93)
Registration Menu
Change the display pages here.
Quick Introductory Guide
Registration Menu
1
A “Registration” consists of panel settings including the
selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices,
Pedal Voices, rhythm and so on. Each Registration Menu
button (1 – 5) includes each different music styles of the
Registrations. Use each button properly in accordance
with the music styles you want to perform.
NOTE
Additional basic Registrations are preset on the Registration
Memory locations from 1 to 16. See page 93 for details.
The color of the selected Registration name changes
to orange, indicating that it has been selected, and
the Auto Bass Chord mode is shown at the bottom
of the display.
Selecting Registrations from the
Registration Menu
Reference page
• Auto Bass Chord (page 64)
1
Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU
buttons.
3
Play your favorite Song with the
selected Registration.
Each button has different Registrations for different
music genres. For example, if you want to play Jazz,
press the [4] button. For details on the Registration
Menu, see page 20.
2
1
01 Kids / 02 Simple
2
01, 02 Pops & Rock
3
01, 02 Dance & Ballad
4
01, 02 Jazz & Latin
5
01, 02 Symphony & World
Select the desired Registration by
pressing the appropriate button on the
display.
Each of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons
features two tabs on the display: [01] and [02] which
calls up two pages alternatively. [01] and [02] feature
the same Registration Menu as that of the ELS-01
series and ELS-02 series respectively. On each of
[01] page and [02] page, press any of the number
buttons [1] – [5] then select the desired Registration.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
19
Registration Menu
Registration Menu list
REGISTRATION MENU 01
Page
1
2
3
4
REGISTRATION MENU 1
01 KIDS
REGISTRATION MENU 2
01 POPS & ROCK
REGISTRATION MENU 3
01 DANCE & BALLAD
REGISTRATION MENU 5
01 SYMPHONY & WORLD
Simple 8Beat 1
Dynamic 8Beat
Organ Ballad
Blow On Sax
Fanfare
Simple 8Beat 2
NY Ballad
Dramatic Ballad
Sax Ensemble
String Orchestra
Light Step
British Pop
Love Ballad
Moonlight
Romantic Violin
Sunny Pop
8Beat Modern
Smooth Lead
Big Band
Baroque
Kids March 1
Rock Band
Pop Ballad
Clarinet Swing
Flute & Harp *1
Kids March 2
Detroit Pop
Guitar Ballad
Jazz Combo
Serenade
Kids March 3
Techno Pop
Acoustic Ballad
Medium Jazz
Fast March
Synth Rock
Sheriff Reggae
Healing Guitar
Organ Session
Wild West
SymphonicMarch 1
Rock & Roll
Chillout
Guitar Combo
Vienna Waltz
SymphonicMarch 2
Power Rock
Sweetheart 1
Tender Ballad
Polka
Bluegrass
60s Guitar Rock
Sweetheart 2
Jazz Waltz
Chanson Club
Sea Carnival
Unplugged
Slow & Easy
Five-Four
Theatre Organ
Basic Waltz
Motor City
Euro Trance
Big Band Samba
Flamenco
Brass Ensemble
Lovely Shuffle
6/8 Trance
Mambo Brass
Pop Flamenco
Pure Waltz
Gospel Shuffle
Cool Hip Hop
Mambo Tenor
Mexican Dance
Rococo Ensemble
Joyful Gospel
Latin House
Montuno
Mariachi
Pop Cha Cha
Frankly Soul
Dance Beat
Bossa Nova
Celtic Dance
Comical Rumba
Soul
Euro Dance Pop
Pop Bossa
Folk Step
Comical Samba
Gospel
UK Pop
Sweet Rumba
Italiano
Toy Orchestra
6/8 Soul
Jive
Beguine
Musette
Charleston
Hit Pop
Disco Queen
Cha Cha Cha
Country
Winter Swing
New Country
Disco Soul
Mellow Groove
Hawaiian
Snow Waltz 1
Eternal Pop
Pop Disco
Modern R&B
Chinese Nocturne
Snow Waltz 2
Ground Beat
Hot Disco
Dixieland Jazz
Japanese Sound
Alpine Polka *A
Bounce Pop *A
Ibiza *A
Jungle Drum *A
OrchestraMarch*A
Alpine Polka *B
Bounce Pop *B
Ibiza *B
Jungle Drum *B
OrchestraMarch*B
Alpine Polka *C
Bounce Pop *C
Ibiza *C
Jungle Drum *C
OrchestraMarch*C
Alpine Polka *D
Bounce Pop *D
Ibiza *D
Jungle Drum *D
OrchestraMarch*D
Dream Ballad *A
Blues Jam *A
Power House *A
Jazz Club *A
Pasodoble *A
Dream Ballad *B
Blues Jam *B
Power House *B
Jazz Club *B
Pasodoble *B
Dream Ballad *C
Blues Jam *C
Power House *C
Jazz Club *C
Pasodoble *C
Dream Ballad *D
Blues Jam *D
Power House *D
Jazz Club *D
Pasodoble *D
Pops Orchestra*A
EvergreenWaltz*A
Dance Latino *A
Afro Session *A
Tango *A
Pops Orchestra*B
EvergreenWaltz*B
Dance Latino *B
Afro Session *B
Tango *B
Pops Orchestra*C
EvergreenWaltz*C
Dance Latino *C
Afro Session *C
Tango *C
Pops Orchestra*D
EvergreenWaltz*D
Dance Latino *D
Afro Session *D
Tango *D
Kids On Stage *A
16Beat Pop *A
Twilight Disco*A
ChaCha Grandee*A
Show Time *A
Kids On Stage *B
16Beat Pop *B
Twilight Disco*B
ChaCha Grandee*B
Show Time *B
Kids On Stage *C
16Beat Pop *C
Twilight Disco*C
ChaCha Grandee*C
Show Time *C
Kids On Stage *D
16Beat Pop *D
Twilight Disco*D
ChaCha Grandee*D
Show Time *D
Galaxy March *A
Top Gear Rock *A
Love Song *A
3/4 Fast Jazz *A
Majestic Sound*A
Galaxy March *B
Top Gear Rock *B
Love Song *B
3/4 Fast Jazz *B
Majestic Sound*B
Galaxy March *C
Top Gear Rock *C
Love Song *C
3/4 Fast Jazz *C
Majestic Sound*C
Galaxy March *D
Top Gear Rock *D
Love Song *D
3/4 Fast Jazz *D
Majestic Sound*D
SE *A
Southern Pop *A
Movie Ballad *A
Twilight Sax *A
OrchestraSwing*A
SE *B
Southern Pop *B
Movie Ballad *B
Twilight Sax *B
OrchestraSwing*B
SE *C
Southern Pop *C
Movie Ballad *C
Twilight Sax *C
OrchestraSwing*C
SE *D
Southern Pop *D
Movie Ballad *D
Twilight Sax *D
OrchestraSwing*D
*1 When the foot pedal (sold separately) is connected, flute & harp is sounded.
When the foot pedal (sold separately) is not connected, string & harp is sounded.
20
REGISTRATION MENU 4
01 JAZZ & LATIN
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Menu
REGISTRATION MENU 02
1
2
REGISTRATION MENU 1
02 SIMPLE
REGISTRATION MENU 2
02 POPS & ROCK
REGISTRATION MENU 3
02 DANCE & BALLAD
REGISTRATION MENU 4
02 JAZZ & LATIN
REGISTRATION MENU 5
02 SYMPHONY & WORLD
SimpleReg Strs 1
70s Easy Pop
R&B Pop Ballad
Big Band Tutti
Orch Full Unit
SimpleReg Strs 2
BoysGuitarBallad
R&B Soul Ballad
Alto Sax Combo
String Classic
SimpleReg Orch 1
Soul Pop
R&B Cool Ballad
Jazz Combo Fast
Sweet Pizzicato
SimpleReg Orch 2
70s Top Duo
Cool AC
Jazz Combo 66
Baroque Symphony
SimpleReg Orch 3
Daydream Shuffle
Sweet Chart Hits
The Big Band *A
Nostalgic Green
SimpleReg Pops 1
Oldies Pop
SweetSlowBallad
The Big Band *B
New Year March
SimpleReg Pops 2
EuroPopFolklore
YourPiano Ballad
GuitarJazzCombo
Wind Orchestra
SimpleReg Latin
Discotheque Rock
Sweet EP Ballad
The Swing Jazz
BrassBand Parade
SimpleReg Jazz 1
Slow Hand Ballad
J-Pop EasyBallad
New Orleans Jazz
Choral No.9
SimpleReg Jazz 2
Sweet AC Ballad
Sweet Sax Ballad
Ragtime Band
Angel Voices
SimpleReg Jazz 3
70s PrimeTimeTV
Sweet R&B Ballad
Funky Cat Groove
Beat Classic
SimpleReg Organ
Crossover Funk
Lovers R&B
Afro Cuban Jazz
Can Can Pop
BrassBandMarch*A
Joyful Gospel #2
Sentimental Bld
GuitarJazzWaltz
Elegant Waltz
BrassBandMarch*B
Gospel Groove
Tears Ballad
Sax Jazz Waltz
Chorus Waltz
Orchestra March
Worship Shuffle
Glory Ballad
Swing Steps
Love Waltz
6/8MarchingBand
Worship 16beat
Unplugged Ballad
Swing Chorus
Fantasy World
6/8MarchingKids
Soulful Wonder
SentimentalMovie
Relax Swing
Movie Pirates
Light Waltz
Lovely & Soulful
BeautyCinemaBld
Urban Lounge
Chorus Symphony
OrchestraWaltz*A
Danceable Funk
CinemaSymphoBld
Broadway Tap
OrchestraWaltz*B
Bright Pop Rock
Enka Ballad
OrchestraWaltz*C
AmericanHardRock
6/8 Enka Shuffle
TV Drama Track*A
OrchestraWaltz*D
Power Rock 80s
Christmas Ballad
TV Drama Track*B
Quick Introductory Guide
Page
1
Hollywood Sound
Super Showtune
USA RockStandard
Movie Symphonic
Movie Soundtrack
3
4
8Beat Synth Pop
Seaside Rock
Disco Hits 70s
Brazilian Bossa
Yoo-Hoo Polka
8Beat Pop
70s Folk Rock
70s Disco Night
Lounge BossaNova
Pop Polka
Funny Polka
Pop Shuffle
Alternative Rock
Euro Pop Disco
8Beat Bossa Nova
R&B Shuffle
Alternative6/8Rk
Synth Disco
Pop Bossa Nova
Casual Polka
Rock
Highway Rock
Ballroom Disco
Tiny Bossa Nova
Country Town
Rock Shuffle
Funky Rock&Roll
SynDancePop 80s
Cafe Samba
Tango Band
Rock Pop Ballad
Synth Pop Rock
Dirty Dance Beat
BitterSweetLatin
Turkish Pops
Funk
Power Synth Rock
Fortune Disco
Latin Rock
Oriental Dance
RockGuitarBallad
Girls Pop 48 *A
DanceBeatLatin*A
Celtic Beat
Pop Rock&Roll
Girls Pop 48 *B
DanceBeatLatin*B
Celtic Waltz
Back To The 60s
Shiny Girls Pop
Pop Accordion
Trad Irish Pipe
Dancing Boogie
Share The Peace
Sweet Bomba
Irish Ballad
Dance Pop
6/8 Shuffle Rock
DanceAndRhythm*A
Orquesta Salsa
ChinaSweetBallad
Disco Pop
ShuffleBoysRock
DanceAndRhythm*B
New Flamenco
ChinaRomanticBld
R&B E.Piano Bld
Shuffle Pop Rock
DanceAndRhythm*C
Jummin' Reggae
China Dance Beat
R&B Piano Ballad
Shfl Rock Ballad
DanceAndRhythm*D
RumbaAndTheCity
China Kung Fu
8Beat Ballad
Pop Rock Band
Girls Techno
French Caribbean
China Trad Song
8BeatOrchBallad
ShufflePopPiano
Candy Pop Techno
Caribbean Sea
China Trad Dance
3/4 Pop Ballad
Contemp. Country
Dancing Platform
6/8 Pop Ballad
Smooth Country
Dance Beat EX.
Xmas Shuffle
Club Beat
Snowy Christmas
Electronica Beat
Kool Garage
Electronic Dance
5
BigBand King *A
Pretty Rock
BigBand King *B
Ultra Rock
Eurobeat Party
BigBand King *C
Rock Graffiti
Ibiza Trance
BigBand Swing
Casual Rock
Casual Trance
Jazz Session
Rookie Rock
Trance Party
Fusion Samba
Happy Rock
WonderTranceShfl
Pop Samba
J-Pop Idol Rock
Simple Bossanova
J-Pop Band Rock
Mambo
Spirit Pop
Rumba
Sweet Love Pop
New Age Chillout
Summer Pop
Shaky Dance
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
21
Registration Menu
Page
6
7
REGISTRATION MENU 1
02 SIMPLE
REGISTRATION MENU 2
02 POPS & ROCK
Cls Organ Chapel
J-Pop Piano Band
Cls Organ Hall
J-Pop Boys
RockOrganBallad
J-PopShuffleBeat
R&B Rock Organ
J-Pop BandBallad
Organ Combo
Breezy Ballad
6/8 Organ Ballad
HeroRangerTheme
Soul Jazz Organ
Sunset Pop
Pop Organ 60s
Funky Punch *A
Toy Organ
Funky Punch *B
Theatre Organ NY
GlxyBattleship*A
Nostalgic Organ
GlxyBattleship*B
J-Pop Anime *A
J-Pop Anime *B
70s Honey
70s Hero
DBZ *A
DBZ *B
DBZ *C
DBZ *D
22
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
REGISTRATION MENU 3
02 DANCE & BALLAD
REGISTRATION MENU 4
02 JAZZ & LATIN
REGISTRATION MENU 5
02 SYMPHONY & WORLD
Confirming the Electone Version
Factory Set (Initializing
the Electone)
You can confirm the version of your Electone by the
following procedure.
All current settings including Registration Memory, User
Voices, User Rhythms, and LCD display settings can be
deleted at once by the following procedure. Note that the
operation here does not affect the settings of the wireless
LAN settings, which can be initialized on page 196.
1
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.
Quick Introductory Guide
Confirming the Electone
Version
1
Reference pages
2
On the GLOBAL Page, press the
[Version] button in the display.
• Saving Registrations (page 116)
• Initialize the wireless LAN settings (page 196)
1
2
The Version dialog appears in the display. Pressing
[OK] closes the dialog.
3
Turn off the power.
While holding down the ENDING [1]
button, turn the power back on.
Release the ENDING [1] button after
Voice Display appears.
About the latest Firmware Version
Yamaha may from time to time update firmware of the
product without notice for improvement. We recommend
that you check our web site for the latest releases and
upgrade your firmware of the Electone.
http://download.yamaha.com/
Note that the explanations in this Owner’s Manual apply
to the version of firmware when this Owner’s Manual was
produced.
If you don’t want to reset the LCD display settings, you
can initialize only the Registration settings. See page 96
for more information.
Reference page
• Initializing Registration Memory (page 96)
NOTICE
Executing the Factory Set will erase all your existing data.
Always save your important data to the USB flash drive.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
23
2 Voices
This Electone features more than 900 high-quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the Upper
Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard
for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections.
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Voices for the Lower Keyboard
Voices for Pedalboard
Voices for Each Keyboard
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together: Upper Keyboard
Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from
the panel.
Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2
Lead Voice 1/2
[VOICE SECTION 2] button
Lead Voice 1 and 2 sound only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more keys are played together.
This makes the Lead Voices ideal for “lead” or solo instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone.
Reference page
• Tone Generator (page 37)
24
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Selecting Voices with the Voice Buttons
Voices for the Lower Keyboard
For example, if you have pressed the [PIANO]
button, the following display (Voice Menu) will
appear.
Lower Keyboard Voice 1/2
Voices for the Pedalboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the
Pedalboard for playing together: Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal
Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the
panel. By default, Pedal Voices 1 and 2 sound only the
highest note if two or more pedals are played.
2
Voices
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the
Lower Keyboard for playing together: Lower Keyboard
Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each
section can be selected from the panel.
2
Select the desired Voice name from the
Voice menu.
The Voice menu contains many Piano Voices, more
than can fit on one display page. To change the
display pages, press the appropriate number buttons
in the display.
Pedal Voice 1/2
Reference page
• POLY (page 42)
The color of the selected Voice name changes to
orange, indicating that it has been selected.
Selecting Voices with the
Voice Buttons
Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure
throughout all Voice sections, instructions for only the
Upper Keyboard Voice 1 are given here.
1
After confirming that [VOICE SECTION 2]
button is not lit, press one of the Voice
buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1/2
section.
Registering a Voice to Voice Link
By using the [LINK] button at the left top in the display,
you can register the current Voice with all its settings on
the Voice Condition display. This function lets you collect
your favorite Voices, which can then be called up quickly
or conveniently during your performance. The registered
Voice can be selected from the “Voice Link” category on
the display called up via the User buttons of all the Voice
Sections. For detailed instructions, see page 48.
Voice buttons
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
25
Selecting Voices with the Voice Buttons
Changing the Voice volume
There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the
VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume
slider in the display. The VOLUME buttons let you make
coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives
you fine control.
Calling up the Voice Menu display
and Voice Condition display
alternatively
Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu
display for the selected button. Pressing it a second
time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive
presses alternate between the two displays.
Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel
(coarse)
Press one of the VOLUME buttons of the desired Voice
section on the panel to set the level for each Voice.
The buttons have five volume settings, from a minimum
of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume.
Voice Menu display
Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine)
Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again (or
pressing the Voice name of the selected Voice in the
display) calls up the Voice Condition display.
Voice Condition display
VOLUME slider
To set the volume, touch the VOLUME slider in the
display or use the Data Control dial. The control range is
from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).
24
18
12
24
23
When the Voice Condition display is shown, pressing
the [VOICE MENU] button on the display also calls
up the Voice Menu.
From the Voice Condition display, you can control
Voice-related parameters such as Pan, Effect, Volume,
and so on. For more information on the Voice
Condition display, see page 41.
12
NOTICE
6
0
1
0
NOTE
Depending on the volume value (set by the slider), two adjacent
VOLUME lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an
intermediate position.
26
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you
have made.
If you wish to keep the panel settings you have made,
save them to a USB flash drive before turning the
Electone off (page 116).
Selecting Voices with the Voice Buttons
About the To Lower function
3
Connect a Foot Pedal (sold
separately) to the [FOOT PEDAL]
jack located on the rear of the
Electone.
In this condition (Solo on), only the Lead Voice
2 is playable on the Upper Keyboard. (All other
Voices are muted.)
4
2
Voices
Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1,
and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be played on the
Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER /SOLO]
or [TO LOWER ] button in each section is on.
When To Lower function is on, the Lead Voice and
Pedal Voice cannot be played on the Upper Keyboard
and Pedalboard, respectively.
The To Lower function is not available in the Lead
Voice 2 section.
To temporarily turn Solo off as you
play, press down on the foot pedal.
In this condition, all Voices set to the Upper
Keyboard except for Lead Voice 2 are playable
on the Upper Keyboard. (Only Lead Voice 2 is
muted.)
Each time you press the foot pedal (Solo off)
you can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2, and
each time you release it (Solo on) you can play
only Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard.
Notes on using Solo
• The foot pedal can be used to control other
functions. When other functions are assigned to
the foot pedal, pressing foot pedal turns these
functions on at the same time.
About the Solo function
The Lead Voice 2 section features an exclusive Solo
function. Solo lets you instantly switch to a solo Lead
Voice in the middle of your performance, muting all
other Upper Keyboard Voices.
NOTE
In order to use the Solo function, a Foot pedal (sold
separately) is needed.
1
Select the Voice that you wish to play
solo in the Lead Voice 2 section.
• When you release the foot pedal, Solo is not
applied to the key being pressed, but is applied
from the next pressed key. When you press the foot
pedal, Solo remains active for the key being
pressed, and is cancelled from the next pressed key.
• Lead Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if
two or more keys are played. However, in the Solo
mode, Lead Voice 2 sounds for the last key played.
Reference pages
• Foot Pedal (Sold Separately) (page 176)
• Voice Condition Display (page 41)
When the lamp of the [TO LOWER /SOLO]
button is turned off, all the Voices for Upper
Keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and 2, and
Lead Voice 1 and 2) can be played.
2
Press the [TO LOWER /SOLO]
button in the Lead Voice 2 section.
This sets Solo to standby status.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
27
Selecting Voices from the User Buttons
For example, to call up Marimba 1, select the
Percussion category.
Selecting Voices from the
User Buttons
Reference page
• Voice List (page 29)
Percussion
This Electone has a wide variety of Voices from which
you can choose — far greater than what is immediately
apparent from the Voice buttons on the panel. Each Voice
section has one or two User buttons (numbered 1 or 2)
which can be found at the right side of each Voice
section. You can use the User buttons to select Voices that
cannot be selected normally from the Voice buttons —
such as Contrabass for the Upper Keyboard Voice.
1
Press one of the User buttons in any of
the Voice sections.
User buttons
2
The name of the selected category (Percussion) is
displayed on the upper left.
The Voice name shown under the category name is
that of the currently assigned Voice and is irrelevant
to the Voice menu below.
To directly select the desired category, hold down one
of the User buttons and simultaneously press the
desired Voice button.
Select the desired instrument category
with the category buttons in the display.
1. While holding down the User button…
You can also choose the “USER” category to select a
User Voice you have created.
Reference page
• Voice Edit (page 136)
If you select “Voice Link” as Category, you can select
a Voice with the settings made on the Voice
Condition display (page 41).
Reference pages
• Using Voice Link (page 48)
• Selecting a Voice registered to Voice Link (page 48)
Instrument categories
2. Press the Voice button.
3
Select a Voice (Marimba 1, for example)
from the displayed Voice Menu.
Pressing the number buttons in the display calls up
the other Voices in the category.
The Voice name of the selected Voice (Marimba 1)
appears above the category name, indicating that the
Voice has been selected.
28
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Voice List
Voice List
STRINGS/VIOLIN
1
Power Brass 1
6
Muted Trumpet 2
Power Brass 2
Muted Trumpet 3
Strings 2
Violin 3
Power Brass 3
Muted Trumpet 4
Strings 3
Violin 4
Soft Brass 1
Cornet
Strings 4
Violin 5
Soft Brass 2
Muted Cornet
Strings 5
Violin 6
Soft Brass 3
Flugel Horn 1
Strings 6
Violin 7
S-BrsSect.Legato
Strings 7
Violin 8
S-BrsSect.Fall
Strings 8
S-Violin 1
S-BrsSect.Up
Trombone 2
Strings 9
S-Violin 2
Brass Fall
Trombone 3
Strings 10
Pizzicato Violin
Trombone Sec 1
Trombone 4
Viola
Trombone Sec 2
Trombone 5
Strings 12
Cello 1
Trombone Sec 3
S-Trombone
Strings 13
Cello 2
Trombone Sec 4
Muted Trombone 1
6
2
3
Strings 14
Trombone Sec 5
Slow Strings 1
Trombone Sec 6
Chamber Strs 1
CONTRABASS
Trombone 1
Muted Trombone 2
8
Horn 1
Trombone Sec 7
Horn 2
Brass1&Trp6
Horn 3
Brass2&Trp6
Horn 4
Chamber Strs 3
Contrabass 3
Horn 1&4
Horn 5
Chamber Strs 4
Contrabass 4
Trumpet & Cornet
Horn 6
Chamber Strs 5
Contrabass 5
Octave Brass 1
Horn 7
Violin Section
Contrabass 6
Octave Brass 2
Horn 8
Viola Section
Contrabass 7
Octave Brass 3
Horn 9
Cello Section
Pizzicato Bass 1
Octave Brass 4
S-Horn Section
S-Strings 1
Pizzicato Bass 2
Octave Brass 5
Muted Horn 1
Acoustic Bass 1
Octave Brass 6
S-Strings 3
Acoustic Bass 2
Octave Brass 7
Pizzicato Strs 1
Acoustic Bass 3
Octave Brass 8
Tuba 2
Pizzicato Strs 2
Acoustic Bass 4
Octave Brass 9
Euphonium
Pizzicato Strs 3
Acoustic Bass 5
Trumpet 1
Brass Bass 1
Pizzicato Strs 4
Bass & Cymbal
Trumpet 2
Brass Bass 2
Pizzicato Strs 5
S-AcousticBass 1
Trumpet 3
Brass Bass 3
Tremolo Strings1
S-AcousticBass 2
Trumpet 4
S-Strings 2
2
Contrabass 1
4
Flugel Horn 2
7
Contrabass 2
1
Chamber Strs 2
5
Tremolo Strings2
Trumpet 5
Tremolo Strings3
Trumpet 6
SpiccatoStrings1
SpiccatoStrings2
SpiccatoStrings3
4
1
Violin 2
Slow Strings 2
3
Violin 1
Strings 1
Strings 11
2
5
Strings1&7
Strings2&Viola
Strings3&4
Strings7&Violin5
Violin5&Cello
Octave Strings 1
Octave Strings 2
Octave Strings 3
BRASS/TRUMPET
1
Trumpet 7
Muted Horn 2
9
Tuba 1
WOODWIND/FLUTE
1
Flute 1
Brass Section 1
Trumpet 8
Flute 2
Brass Section 2
Trumpet 9
Flute 3
Brass Section 3
Trumpet 10
Flute 4
Brass Section 4
Trumpet 11
Flute 5
Brass Section 5
Trumpet 12
S-Flute
Brass Section 6
S-Trumpet 1
S-Flute Flutter
Brass Section 7
S-Trumpet 2
Brass Section 8
S-Trumpet Fall
Brass Section 9
S-Trumpet Shake
Recorder 2
Muted Trumpet 1
Ocarina
6
2
Voices
This list shows all available Voices on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list
indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Voice Menu.
Piccolo
2
Recorder 1
Voices whose names begin with the prefix “S-” are referred to as “Super Articulation Voices.” For information about what sound is produced when you play
these Voices, see “Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List” on page 34. For details about Super Articulation Voices, see page 37.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
29
Voice List
2
Whistle
3
Clarinet 1
Woodwind&Glocken
Resonance Pad 5
Resonance Pad 7
Clarinet 3
PopVocals Ooh 2
Resonance Pad 8
PopVocals Ooh 3
Resonance Pad 9
Strings&Winds
PopVocals Aah
Resonance Pad 10
Clarinet 6
Strings&Brass 1
PopVocals Baa
S-Clarinet 1
Strings&Brass 2
PopVocals Bee
S-Clarinet 2
Strings&Brass 3
PopVocals Daa
Bell Pad 2
Bass Clarinet
Strings&Horn 1
PopVocals Doo
Bell Pad 3
Oboe 1
Strings&Horn 2
PopVocals Mmh
Bell Pad 4
Oboe 2
Strings&Choir
PopVocals Wah
Bell Pad 5
Oboe 3
Trumpets&Winds
PopVocals Yoo
Bell Pad 6
S-ShoBeDoBa/Hmm
Bell Pad 7
Orchestra Bass
S-ShoBeDoBa/Wah
Bell Pad 8
Brass&Sax 1
S-ShoBeDoBa/Doo
Bell Pad 9
English Horn 1
Brass&Sax 2
S-ShoBaDoBa/Daa
Bell Pad 10
English Horn 2
Brass&Sax 3
S-DoBaBe/Shoo
Bell Pad 11
Bassoon 1
Brass&Sax 4
S-DoBeDoBe/Wah
Bassoon 2
Brass&Sax 5
S-DoBeBaDa/DoWe
Bassoon 3
Brass&Sax Oct
S-BaDaYah/Doo
Space Pad 2
Alto Sax 1
Brass&Sax Unis
S-YaBaDaBa/Doo
Space Pad 3
Alto Sax 2
Brass&Winds 1
S-Scat/Doo
Space Pad 4
Alto Sax 3
Brass&Winds 2
S-Scat/DoWe
Space Pad 5
Orchestra Hit 1
S-Scat/SFX 1
Space Pad 6
S-Alto Sax
Orchestra Hit 2
S-Scat/SFX 2
Space Pad 7
S-Alto Sax Growl
Orchestra Hit 3
S-WhtShouldWeDo
Space Pad 8
Tenor Sax 1
Orchestra Hit 4
S-WhoAreYou/Wee
Space Pad 9
Oboe 6
Alto Sax 4
TUTTI
1
Horns&Winds
2
3
5
6
Tenor Sax 2
S-DoWeYouBe/Wah
Tenor Sax 3
S-HaaVibrato/SFX
Tenor Sax 4
S-Tenor Sax 1
CHOIR
1
S-Tenor Sax 2
S-Tenor Sax 3
S-TenorSax Growl
Soprano Sax 1
Soprano Sax 2
Choir 2
Galaxy Pad 4
Choir 3
S-DooVibrato/SFX
Galaxy Pad 5
Choir 4
S-DooBoys/SFX
Bright Pad 1
Choir 5
S-DooGirls/SFX
Bright Pad 2
Bright Pad 3
Bright Pad 4
Choir 8
S-WahVibrato/SFX
Baritone Sax 1
Choir 9
S-YooVibrato/SFX
Baritone Sax 2
Choir 10
Sax Ens 1
Choir 11
Woodwind Ens 1
Vocal
S-ChoirSoft Aah
Woodwind Ens 2
Woodwind Ens 3
Woodwind Ens 4
Woodwind Ens 5
Bright Pad 5
6
Noisy Pad 1
Noisy Pad 2
Noisy Pad 3
PAD
1
Noisy Pad 4
Noisy Pad 5
Smooth Pad 1
Noisy Pad 6
Smooth Pad 2
S-ChoirBoys Aah
3
Galaxy Pad 1
Galaxy Pad 3
S-SprnoSax Growl
Sax Ens 6
Space Pad 10
5
S-OhGirlsVib/SFX
Choir 7
Sax Ens 5
Space Pad 1
Galaxy Pad 2
S-BaaVibrato/SFX
2
Bell Pad 12
4
S-OohBoysVib/SFX
Choir 6
Sax Ens 4
Bell Pad 1
S-OohVibrato/SFX
S-Soprano Sax
Sax Ens 3
Resonance Pad 11
3
Choir 1
S-DaaVibrato/SFX
Sax Ens 2
8
2
Resonance Pad 6
Oboe 5
7
PopVocals Haa 1
PopVocals Ooh 1
Oboe 4
6
4
Clarinet 2
Clarinet 5
5
Flutes&Oboes
PopVocals Haa 2
Clarinet 4
4
8
7
Ambi Pad 1
S-ChoirSoft Ooh
Smooth Pad 3
S-ChoirBoys Ooh
Smooth Pad 4
Ambi Pad 2
Gospel Choir 1
Smooth Pad 5
Ambi Pad 3
Gospel Choir 2
Smooth Pad 6
Ambi Pad 4
Gospel Choir 3
Smooth Pad 7
Ambi Pad 5
S-GsplChr Hmm
Smooth Pad 8
Ambi Pad 6
S-GsplChr Hm/Ah
Smooth Pad 9
Warm Pad 1
Resonance Pad 1
Warm Pad 2
Woodwind Ens 6
S-GsplChr Wow
Woodwind Ens 7
S-GsplChr W/Hey
Resonance Pad 2
Warm Pad 3
Clarinet&Flutes
S-GsplChr Hey
Resonance Pad 3
Warm Pad 4
Resonance Pad 4
Warm Pad 5
Clarinet&Oboe
2
Voices whose names begin with the prefix “S-” are referred to as “Super Articulation Voices.” For information about what sound is produced when you play
these Voices, see “Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List” on page 34. For details about Super Articulation Voices, see page 37.
30
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Voice List
Warm Pad 6
Synth Brass 11
13
8
Dark Pad 1
Soft Lead 5
Synth Brass 12
14
Dark Pad 2
Soft Lead 6
Synth Brass 13
Synth Decay 2
Dark Pad 3
Soft Lead 7
Fat Synth Brass1
Synth Decay 3
Dark Pad 4
Early Lead 1
Fat Synth Brass2
Synth Decay 4
Dark Pad 5
Early Lead 2
Fat Synth Brass3
Synth Pluck 1
Dark Pad 6
PWM Lead 1
Fat Synth Brass4
Synth Pluck 2
Dark Pad 7
PWM Lead 2
DetunedSawBrass1
Synth Pluck 3
Dark Pad 8
Chorus Saw Lead1
DetunedSawBrass2
Synth Pluck 4
Dark Pad 9
Chorus Saw Lead2
DetunedSawBrass3
Synth Pluck 5
Vox Pad 1
Chorus Saw Lead3
Soft Syn Brass 1
Vintage Lead 1
Soft Syn Brass 2
Vox Pad 3
Vintage Lead 2
PWM Brass Slow
Synth Seq 2
Vox Pad 4
Vintage Lead 3
PWM Brass Fast
Synth Seq 3
Vox Pad 5
Vintage Lead 4
Vox Pad 6
Vintage Lead 5
Sweep Pad 1
Sweep Pad 2
9
Vox Pad 2
10
4
Soft Lead 4
Synth Seq 1
Trance Seq 2
Synth Strs 2
Trance Seq 3
Vintage Lead 7
Synth Strs 3
Trance Seq 4
Dance Chords 1
Synth Strs 4
Percussive Seq 1
Sweep Phase
Dance Chords 2
Synth Strs 5
Percussive Seq 2
Sweep Flanger 1
Dance Chords 3
Synth Strs 6
Percussive Seq 3
Sweep Flanger 2
Dance Chords 4
Synth Strs 7
Percussive Seq 4
Metallic Pad 1
Dance Chords 5
Synth Strs 8
Percussive Seq 5
Metallic Pad 2
Club Lead 1
Synth Strs 9
Percussive Seq 6
Metallic Pad 3
Club Lead 2
Synth Strs 10
5
6
10
Club Lead 3
Synth Strs 11
Pop Lead 1
Synth Strs 12
Pop Lead 2
Synth Strs 13
Pop Lead 3
ORGAN
1
Pipe Organ 1
LightSynStrings1
Pipe Organ 2
Pop Lead 4
LightSynStrings2
Pipe Organ 3
Pop Lead 5
LightSynStrings3
Pipe Organ 4
Synth Lead 1
Pop Lead 6
LightSynStrings4
Pipe Organ 5
Synth Lead 2
Pop Lead 7
MovinSynStrings1
Pipe Organ 6
Synth Cla 1
MovinSynStrings2
Pipe Organ 7
Synth Lead 4
Synth Cla 2
FatSynStrings 1
Pipe Organ 8
Synth Lead 5
Synth Cla 3
FatSynStrings 2
Pipe Organ 9
Synth Lead 6
Synth Cla 4
FatSynStrings 3
Pipe Organ 10
Synth Lead 7
Synth Cla 5
FatSynStrings 4
Synth Lead 8
Synth Cla 6
Oct Synth Strs 1
Theatre Organ 2
Synth Lead 9
Synth Cla 7
Oct Synth Strs 2
Theatre Organ 3
Fat Saw Lead 1
Synth Cla 8
Oct Synth Strs 3
Theatre Organ 4
Fat Saw Lead 2
Synth Cla 9
Synth Bell 1
Theatre Organ 5
Fat Saw Lead 3
Synth Cla 10
Synth Bell 2
Theatre Organ 6
Fat Saw Lead 4
Synth Sax
Synth Bell 3
Theatre Organ 7
Fat Saw Lead 5
Synth Trumpet
Synth Bell 4
Theatre Organ 8
Fat Saw Lead 6
Synth Violin
Synth Bell 5
Theatre Organ 9
Synth Brass 1
Synth Bell 6
Theatre Organ 10
Filter Lead 2
Synth Brass 2
Synth Bell 7
Thtr Tibia Full
Filter Lead 3
Synth Brass 3
Sky Bell 1
Thtr Tibia 8&4
Filter Lead 4
Synth Brass 4
Sky Bell 2
Thtr Tibia 16&4
Filter Lead 5
Synth Brass 5
Vox Bell 1
Thtr Tp & Kinura
Filter Lead 6
Synth Brass 6
Vox Bell 2
Thtr Vox & Tibia
Filter Lead 7
Synth Brass 7
Pop Synth Bell 1
Thtr Trumpet16&8
Soft Lead 1
Synth Brass 8
Pop Synth Bell 2
Soft Lead 2
Synth Brass 9
Pop Synth Bell 3
Harmonica 2
Soft Lead 3
Synth Brass 10
Pop Synth Bell 4
Harmonica 3
SYNTH
Synth Lead 3
Filter Lead 1
7
8
11
12
13
2
Synth Pluck 6
15
Vintage Lead 6
SFX Pad 3
3
Synth Decay 1
Trance Seq 1
SFX Pad 2
2
9
Pop Synth Bell 5
Funky Analog
SFX Pad 1
1
8
Synth Strs 1
Sweep Pad 3
11
3
Voices
7
2
3
Theatre Organ 1
Harmonica 1
Voices whose names begin with the prefix “S-” are referred to as “Super Articulation Voices.” For information about what sound is produced when you play
these Voices, see “Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List” on page 34. For details about Super Articulation Voices, see page 37.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
31
Voice List
3
4
Harmonica 4
8
Combo Organ 4
S-Harmonica
9
Rock Organ 1
E.Guitar Amp 2
Stack E.Piano 1
E.Guitar Amp 3
Rock Organ 3
Stack E.Piano 2
E.Guitar Amp 4
Bandoneon 1
Rock Organ Slow1
S-E.Grand CP80 1
E.Guitar Amp 5
Bandoneon 2
Rock Organ Slow2
S-E.Grand CP80 2
E.Guitar Amp 6
Accordion 1
Rock Organ Slow3
Clavi 1
E.Guitar Amp 7
Accordion 2
Rock Organ Slow4
Clavi 2
Muted Guitar 1
Accordion 3
Rock Organ Slow5
Clavi 3
Muted Guitar 2
Accordion 4
Rock Organ Slow6
Clavi 4
Muted Guitar 3
Accordion 5
Rock Organ Slow7
S-Clavi
Muted Guitar 4
Accordion 6
Rock Organ Slow8
S-Muted Clavi
S-Clean Solid 1
Accordion 7
Rock Organ Fast1
Accordion 8
Rock Organ Fast2
10
Organ Bass 1
Accordion 10
Organ Bass 2
AccordionMuset.1
AccordionMuset.2
S-Clean Solid 2
S-Clean Solid 3
GUITAR
6
S-Clean Guitar 1
Nylon Guitar 1
S-Clean Guitar 2
Organ Bass 3
Nylon Guitar 2
S-Clean Guitar 3
Organ Bass 4
Nylon Guitar 3
S-Clean Guitar 4
Accordion Full
Nylon Guitar 4
S-Clean Guitar 5
Jazz Organ 1
Nylon Guitar 5
S-Clean Guitar 6
S-Nylon Guitar 1
S-Clean Finger 1
Piano 1
S-Nylon Guitar 2
S-Clean Finger 2
Jazz Organ 4
Piano 2
Flamenco Guitar
S-Clean Finger 3
Jazz Organ 5
Piano 3
S-FlamencoGuitar
S-Clean Finger 4
Jazz Organ 6
S-Piano 1
Steel Guitar 1
S-CleanVintage 1
Jazz Organ 7
S-Piano 2
Steel Guitar 2
S-CleanVintage 2
Jazz Organ 8
Honkytonk Piano
Steel Guitar 3
Jazz Organ 9
Octave Piano 1
Steel Guitar 4
Jazz Organ Slow1
Octave Piano 2
SteelGuitarSlide
Distortion Gtr 2
Jazz Organ Slow2
Octave Piano 3
SteelGuitar Mute
Distortion Gtr 3
Jazz Organ Slow3
1
PIANO
1
2
S-CleanVintage 3
7
Distortion Gtr 1
Harpsichord 1
S-Steel Guitar 1
Distortion Gtr 4
Jazz Organ Fast1
Harpsichord 2
S-Steel Guitar 2
Distortion Gtr 5
Jazz Organ Fast2
Harpsichord 3
12Str Guitar 1
Distortion Gtr 6
Vintage Organ
S-Harpsichord
12Str Guitar 2
Distortion Gtr 7
Vin Organ Slow 1
Clavichord
Jazz Guitar 1
Distortion Gtr 8
Vin Organ Slow 2
8
E.Guitar Amp 1
Reed Organ
Jazz Organ 3
7
5
S-Stage E.Piano5
Rock Organ 2
Jazz Organ 2
6
5
S-Stage E.Piano4
S-BluesHarp
Accordion 9
5
4
2
3
3
Distortion Gtr 9
DX E.Piano 1
Jazz Guitar 2
Vin Organ Fast 1
DX E.Piano 2
Jazz Guitar 3
Vin Organ Fast 2
DX E.Piano 3
Jazz Guitar 4
S-Dist Solid 2
8
S-Dist Solid 1
Vin Organ Fast 3
DX E.Piano 4
JazzGuitar Slide
S-Dist Solid 3
Tonewheel Organ1
DX E.Piano 5
Jazz Guitar Oct
S-Dist Solid 4
Tonewheel Organ2
DX E.Piano 6
S-Jazz Guitar 1
S-Dist Solid 5
Tonewheel Organ3
DX EP Sweet 1
S-Jazz Guitar 2
S-Dist Solid 6
Tonewheel Organ4
DX EP Sweet 2
S-Jazz Guitar 3
S-Dist Vintage 1
Tonewheel Organ5
DX E.Piano&Pad 1
Elec Guitar 1
S-Dist Vintage 2
Pop Organ 1
DX E.Piano&Pad 2
Elec Guitar 2
S-Dist Crunch 1
Pop Organ 2
Galaxy EP
Elec Guitar 3
S-Dist Crunch 2
S-Dist Finger 1
Pop Organ 3
4
DX EP Dynamics
Elec Guitar 4
Stage E.Piano 1
Elec Guitar 5
Pop Organ 5
Stage E.Piano 2
Clean Guitar 1
Pop Organ 6
Stage E.Piano 3
Clean Guitar 2
Banjo 2
Pop Organ Fast 1
Stage E.Piano 4
Clean Guitar 3
Mandolin
Pop Organ Fast 2
Stage E.Piano 5
Clean Guitar 4
Pedal Steel Gtr1
Pop Organ Fast 3
Stage E.Piano 6
Clean Guitar 5
Pedal Steel Gtr2
Combo Organ 1
S-Stage E.Piano1
Clean Guitar 6
Pedal Steel Gtr3
Combo Organ 2
S-Stage E.Piano2
Clean Guitar 7
Harp 1
Combo Organ 3
S-Stage E.Piano3
Clean Guitar 8
Harp 2
Pop Organ 4
4
S-Dist Finger 2
9
Banjo 1
Voices whose names begin with the prefix “S-” are referred to as “Super Articulation Voices.” For information about what sound is produced when you play
these Voices, see “Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List” on page 34. For details about Super Articulation Voices, see page 37.
32
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Voice List
9
Harp 3
2
Slap Bass 1
4
Oud
Smooth Bass 9
Sitar 1
Harp 5
Slap Bass 3
Smooth Bass 10
Sitar 2
Deep Bass 1
Deep Bass 2
Slap Bass 6
Deep Bass 3
Log Drum
Kalimba
Picked Bass 1
Deep Bass 4
Picked Bass 2
Deep Bass 5
Vibraphone 3
Picked Bass 3
Marimba 1
Picked Bass 4
Marimba 2
Picked Bass 5
Fat Bass 2
Marimba 3
Picked Bass 6
Fat Bass 3
Xylophone 1
Picked Bass 7
Fat Bass 4
Xylophone 2
Picked Bass 8
Fat Bass 5
Glockenspiel 1
Picked Bass 9
Fat Bass 6
Glockenspiel 2
Picked Bass 10
Fat Bass 7
Fretless Bass 1
Fat Bass 8
Celesta 1
Fretless Bass 2
Fat Bass 9
Celesta 2
Fretless Bass 3
Fat Bass 10
Music Box 1
Fretless Bass 4
Glockenspiel 3
4
Kamanche
Slap Bass 5
Vibraphone 2
Vibraphone 1
3
4
5
Steel Drum
2
Voices
PERCUSSION
2
Smooth Bass 8
Slap Bass 2
Slap Bass 4
1
3
Harp 4
Deep Bass 6
5
Fat Bass 1
Music Box 2
WORLD
Chime 1
Chime 2
Chime 3
SYNTH BASS
1
Pan Flute 2
S-Pan Flute 1
Funk Bass 3
S-Pan Flute 2
Funk Bass 4
S-Irish Pipe 1
Timpani 1
Funk Bass 5
S-Irish Pipe 2
Timpani 2
Funk Bass 6
Bagpipe
Timpani 3
Funk Bass 7
Dulcimer 1
Timpani 4
Funk Bass 8
Dulcimer 2
Timpani 5
Funk Bass 9
Timpani Roll 1
Funk Bass 10
2
Zither
2
Shakuhachi
Dance Bass 1
Yokobue
Timpani Roll 3
Dance Bass 2
Shamisen 1
Timpani Roll 4
Dance Bass 3
Shamisen 2
S-Timpani Roll
Dance Bass 4
Koto
S-TimpaniRoll fp
Dance Bass 5
Timpani Roll 2
Dance Bass 6
ELECTRIC BASS
1
Pan Flute 1
Funk Bass 2
TIMPANI
1
1
Funk Bass 1
Fingered Bass 1
Fingered Bass 2
Fingered Bass 3
Fingered Bass 4
Fingered Bass 5
Fingered Bass 6
Fingered Bass 7
Fingered Bass 8
Fingered Bass 9
Fingered Bass 10
Fingered Bass 11
S-Fingerd Bass 1
S-Fingerd Bass 2
S-Fingerd Bass 3
3
Taishokoto
3
Er Hu 1
Dance Bass 7
Er Hu 2
Dance Bass 8
Er Hu 3
Dance Bass 9
Ban Hu
Dance Bass 10
Ma Tou Qin
Dance Bass 11
Di Zi
Dance Bass 12
Suo Na
Dance Bass 13
Hu Lu Si
Dance Bass 14
Sheng
Dance Bass 15
Gu Zheng 1
Dance Bass 16
Gu Zheng 2
Smooth Bass 1
Yang Qin
Smooth Bass 2
Pi Pa
Smooth Bass 3
S-Pi Pa
Smooth Bass 4
Liu Qin
Smooth Bass 5
Smooth Bass 6
Smooth Bass 7
San Xian
4
Nay
Surnay
Voices whose names begin with the prefix “S-” are referred to as “Super Articulation Voices.” For information about what sound is produced when you play
these Voices, see “Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List” on page 34. For details about Super Articulation Voices, see page 37.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
33
Voice List
Super Articulation Voice Supplementary List
This list describes the effects that are produced by playing the Super Articulation Voices (having names beginning with
the prefix “S-”). The meanings of the column titles are as follows:
• Super Articulation
Describes the effects produced just by playing the keyboard, regardless of the settings. For information about AEM in the list, see
page 7. “Key-off Samples” refers to the special, characteristic sound which results when releasing the key.
• Auto
Describes the effects produced by playing the keyboard when setting AUTO (page 43) to ON in page 2 of the Voice Condition display.
An effect marked with “(octave)” will be produced only when you play intervals of minor 7th, Major 7th or octave in legato.
• ART.1 / ART.2
Describes the effects produced by playing the keyboard with the left footswitch when selecting “ART.1” or “ART.2” of FOOT SWITCH
LEFT in page 2 of the Voice Condition display. An effect indicated by “***/***” means a key-on effect/key-off effect. For example,
“Grace Note/Bend Down” indicates that the Grace Note is added by pressing a key while turning on the Left Footswitch while the Bend
Down is applied by releasing a key while turning on the Left Footswitch. An effect indicated by “Sound Effect” is applied when you just
simply press the Left Footswitch. An effect having other indications is applied when you press a key while turning on the Left
Footswitch.
• Type
Lists one of the four types A – D, each of which is determined by how you play the Voice. For example about each of four types, see
page 37.
Category
STRINGS/
VIOLIN
CONTRABASS
BRASS/
TRUMPET
Auto
ART.1
ART.2
S-Strings 1
Voice Name
Legato
–
–
–
S-Strings 2
Legato
–
–
–
S-Strings 3
Legato
–
–
S-Violin 1
Key-off Samples,
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up, Bend Down,
Portamento (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Grace Note /
Bend Down
D
S-Violin 2
Key-off Samples,
Legato (AEM)
Portamento (Octave)
Grace Note /
Bend Down
Bend Up /
Bend Down
D
34
Type
–
S-AcousticBass 1
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-AcousticBass 2
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-BrsSect.Legato
Legato
–
–
–
S-BrsSect.Fall
–
Fall Down
–
S-BrsSect.Up
–
Glissando Up
–
B
B
S-Trumpet 1
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up, Bend Down,
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-Trumpet 2
Legato (AEM)
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-Trumpet Fall
–
Glissando Up
–
B
S-Trumpet Shake
–
Shake
–
B
S-Trombone
WOODWIND/
FLUTE
Super Articulation
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up, Bend Down,
Glissando (Octave)
S-Horn Section
Legato
–
S-Flute
Key-off Samples,
Legato (AEM)
–
S-Flute Flutter
Key-off Samples,
Legato (AEM)
S-Clarinet 1
Bend Up (Fast) /
Bend Down
–
Bend Up (Slow) /
Glissando Down
D
–
Grace Note /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
Grace Note,
Glissando (Octave)
Grace Note /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
Legato (AEM)
Grace Note,
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-Clarinet 2
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up, Bend Down,
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-Alto Sax
Key-off Samples,
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up,
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-Alto Sax Growl
Key-off Samples,
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up,
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-Tenor Sax 1
Key-off Samples,
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up,
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-Tenor Sax 2
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up,
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-Tenor Sax 3
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up, Bend Down,
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-TenorSax Growl
Key-off Samples,
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up,
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-Soprano Sax
Key-off Samples,
Legato (AEM)
Grace Note,
Glissando (Octave)
Grace Note /
Bend Down (Fast)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
D
S-SprnoSax Growl
Key-off Samples,
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up,
Glissando (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Voice List
Category
CHOIR
Voice Name
ART.1
ART.2
Legato
Super Articulation
–
–
–
S-ChoirBoys Aah
Legato
–
–
–
S-ChoirSoft Ooh
Legato
–
–
–
S-ChoirBoys Ooh
Legato
–
–
–
S-GsplChr Hmm
Key-off Samples, Legato
S-GsplChr Hm/Ah
S-GsplChr Wow
Key-off Samples, Legato
S-GsplChr W/Hey
PIANO
GUITAR
Sound Effect
“Aah”
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
–
Sound Effect
–
2
A
B
A
–
“Hey”
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
S-ShoBeDoBa/Hmm
Scat Singing
–
“Hmm”
–
C
S-ShoBeDoBa/Wah
Scat Singing
–
“Wah”
–
C
S-ShoBeDoBa/Doo
Scat Singing
–
“Doo”
–
C
S-ShoBaDoBa/Daa
Scat Singing
–
“Daa”
–
C
S-DoBaBe/Shoo
Scat Singing
–
“Shoo”
–
C
S-DoBeDoBe/Wah
Scat Singing
–
“Wah”
–
C
S-GsplChr Hey
ORGAN
–
–
Type
Sound Effect
B
A
S-DoBeBaDa/DoWe
Scat Singing
–
“DoWe”
–
C
S-BaDaYah/Doo
Scat Singing
–
“Doo”
–
C
S-YaBaDaBa/Doo
Scat Singing
–
“Doo”
–
C
S-Scat/Doo
Scat Singing
–
“Doo”
–
C
S-Scat/DoWe
Scat Singing
–
“DoWe”
–
C
S-Scat/SFX 1
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
S-Scat/SFX 2
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
S-WhtShouldWeDo
Scat Singing
–
“Wah”
–
C
S-WhoAreYou/Wee
Scat Singing
–
“Wee”
–
C
S-DoWeYouBe/Wah
Scat Singing
–
“Wah”
–
C
S-HaaVibrato/SFX
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-OohVibrato/SFX
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-OohBoysVib/SFX
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-OhGirlsVib/SFX
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-DooVibrato/SFX
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-DooBoys/SFX
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-DooGirls/SFX
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-DaaVibrato/SFX
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-BaaVibrato/SFX
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-WahVibrato/SFX
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-YooVibrato/SFX
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Harmonica
Legato (AEM)
Grace Note, Bend Down,
Legato (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Grace Note /
Bend Down
D
S-BluesHarp
Legato (AEM)
Grace Note, Bend Down,
Legato (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Grace Note /
Bend Down
D
S-Piano 1
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-Piano 2
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-Harpsichord
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-Stage E.Piano1
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-Stage E.Piano2
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-Stage E.Piano3
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-Stage E.Piano4
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-Stage E.Piano5
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-E.Grand CP80 1
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-E.Grand CP80 2
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-Clavi
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-Muted Clavi
Key-off Samples
–
–
–
S-Nylon Guitar 1
Key-off Samples, Legato
S-Nylon Guitar 2
–
Sound Effect
–
Harmonics
Sound Effect
–
A
A
A
B
S-FlamencoGuitar
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Steel Guitar 1
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
–
Harmonics
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Jazz Guitar 2
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Jazz Guitar 3
Key-off Samples
–
Octave Playing
S-Steel Guitar 2
S-Jazz Guitar 1
–
–
Voices
Auto
S-ChoirSoft Aah
B
B
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
35
Voice List
Category
GUITAR
Super Articulation
Auto
ART.1
ART.2
S-Clean Solid 1
Voice Name
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Clean Solid 2
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Clean Solid 3
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
S-Clean Guitar 1
Key-off Samples
–
Harmonics
–
Harmonics
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Clean Guitar 5
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Clean Guitar 6
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Clean Finger 1
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Clean Finger 2
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Clean Finger 3
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Clean Finger 4
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-CleanVintage 1
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-CleanVintage 2
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-CleanVintage 3
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Dist Solid 1
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Dist Solid 2
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Dist Solid 3
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Dist Solid 4
Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Dist Solid 5
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Dist Solid 6
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Dist Vintage 1
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Dist Vintage 2
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Dist Crunch 1
Key-off Samples, Legato
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Dist Crunch 2
Key-off Samples, Legato
Sound Effect
A
S-Clean Guitar 2
S-Clean Guitar 3
S-Clean Guitar 4
TIMPANI
ELECTRIC
BASS
WORLD
36
–
–
Sound Effect
Type
A
B
B
A
–
Sound Effect
S-Dist Finger 1
–
Grace Note
–
B
S-Dist Finger 2
–
Grace Note
–
B
S-Timpani Roll
Key-off Samples
S-TimpaniRoll fp
Key-off Samples
–
S-Fingerd Bass 1
Key-off Samples
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Fingerd Bass 2
Key-off Samples
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Fingerd Bass 3
Key-off Samples
–
Sound Effect
Sound Effect
A
S-Pan Flute 1
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up,
Glissando Up (Octave)
Bend Up (Fast) /
Bend Down
Bend Up (Slow) /
Bend Down
D
S-Pan Flute 2
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up,
Glissando Up (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Glissando Up /
Glissando Down
D
S-Irish Pipe 1
Legato (AEM)
Bend Up, Bend Down,
Grace Note (Octave)
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Grace Note /
Bend Down
D
S-Irish Pipe 2
Legato,
Grace Note (AEM)
Bend Down
Bend Up /
Bend Down
Grace Note /
Bend Down
D
S-Pi Pa
Key-off Samples
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Tone Generator
Example: S-Alto Saxophone (type D)
Tone Generator
AWM Tone Generator
2
Voices
The Electone features the AWM (Advanced Wave
Memory) tone generation system.
When “ART.1” is selected, playing the keyboard with the
Left Footswitch pressed will bend the pitch up.
When “ART.2” is selected, playing the keyboard with the
Left Footswitch pressed will produce glissando.
When “AUTO” is set to ON, both the bend-up and
glissando are produced automatically by just playing the
keyboard.
AWM is a synthesis system based on sampled waves, or
audio recordings of actual instruments. AWM Voices use
multiple samples, so that they sound like a real
instrument. This section also describes how to play the
Super Articulation Voices, since you will need special
settings and operations for playing these Voices.
What are Super Articulation Voices?
The Super Articulation Voices (having names beginning
with the prefix “S-”) realistically recreate many of the
performance techniques and characteristic sounds
generated when an artist plays an instrument. As a result,
you can produce superbly detailed expression such as the
realistic sound of finger slides on guitar and keyboard
action noise of electronic piano. Moreover, these Voices
will enable you to feel the breath noise of musicians
which employ performance techniques such as legato,
pitch bend and glissando, as well as scat singing (“ShooBee-Doo-Bah,” etc.), such as adlibbed by jazz vocalists.
These expressions can be called up by simply playing the
keyboard or by using the Left Footswitch.
Expression examples via the Super
Articulation Voice
The following expressions can be produced by setting the
parameters of ARTICULATION (page 43) on page 2 of
the Voice Condition display.
Example: S-Nylon Guitar (type A)
When either of “ART.1” or “ART.2” is selected, pressing
the Left Footswitch will produce body-tapping sound.
Example: S-Steel Guitar (type B)
When “ART.1” is selected, playing the keyboard with the
Left Footswitch pressed will produce sound via picking
harmonics.
Example: S-ShooBeeDooBah/Hmm (type C)
When “ART.1” is selected, playing the keyboard with the
Left Footswitch pressed will produce a humming sound
while playing the keyboard with the Left Footswitch
released will produce “Shoo,” “Bee,” “Doo,” and “Bah”
alternatively.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
37
3 Organ Flutes
This Electone has an Organ Flutes feature that allows you to create your own organ Voices, giving you access
to an unlimited combination of organ sounds. With this function, you can recreate all of the classic organ
sounds by adjusting the flute footage levels and the percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. There
are nine flute footage settings, with three additional footage settings for the attack sound.
1
Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons
(UPPER or LOWER).
3
The lamp above the button lights and the Flute
Footage Levers appear on the display.
Adjust flute footage settings (over a
range of 0 – 8).
The Flute footage levers can be adjusted by directly
touching the display.
The Data Control dial cannot be used. Play the
keyboard and listen to the changes in the sound as
you adjust the footage levels.
4
Press the [ATTACK/VOLUME] button in
the upper right on the display to adjust
the volume and Rotary Speaker settings.
ATTACK/VOLUME Page
FOOTAGE Page
1
2
3
4
5
1 ATTACK
2
Determines the level of each volume in the percussive
portion of the Voice. Footage settings are 4', 2-2/3' and 2'.
The LENGTH lever determines the duration of the attack
sound.
Select the wave type for the Organ Flute
Voice.
Specifies the type of organ tone generation to be
simulated.
• SINE: Produces a clean, clear sound.
• VINTAGE: Produces a gritty, slightly distorted
sound.
• EURO: Produces the sound of the transistor
electronic organ equipped with the electronic
tremolo.
2 RESP. (Response)
Determines the overall speed of the keyboard response.
Moving the lever downward makes the keyboard
response slower, creating a pipe organ effect.
3 MODE
Determines which notes in a held group of notes are
given an attack sound.
This parameter is common to both Upper and Lower
Organ Flute Voices.
• FIRST: Only the first note played will have attack. All
other notes played while the first is held have no attack.
• EACH: All notes played have an attack sound.
38
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
4 REVERB
EFFECT Page
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ
Flute Voice. When the panel REVERB control is set to the
minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
Reference page
1
3
• Reverb (page 44)
5 VOLUME
2
1 EFFECT TYPE
5
Press the [VIBRATO] button in the upper
right on the display, then set the related
parameters.
Organ Flutes
Determines the overall volume of the Organ Flute Voice.
The volume balance of the individual footages is
maintained. A minimum setting here produces no Organ
Flute sound.
Selects the Rotary Speaker (tremolo) effect type. Press the
EFFECT TYPE button to call up a list of the effect types.
Select the desired type from the list.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
Reference pages
• Effect List (page 52)
• Rotary Speaker (page 47)
VIBRATO Page
1
1 -1 1 -2 1 -3
1 VIBRATO
The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices,
making them sound warmer and more animated. This
effect is applied independently to each Voice section.
1 -1 ON/OFF
Turns on or off the Vibrato effect.
1 -2 DEPTH
Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect.
Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato.
Range: 1 – 3
Select the desired effect type
1 -3 SPEED
Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect. Higher
settings increase the speed of the vibrato.
Range: 0 – 63
6
Press the [EFFECT] button at the top
right of the display for the Rotary
Speaker settings.
2 Effect Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the
selected effect type.
7
Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons
(UPPER or LOWER) to cancel the Organ
Flute function (the lamp above the
button turns off).
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
39
4 Voice Controls and Effects
The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the
Voices: Voice Controls and Effects. Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best
enhance its sound. However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the
controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.
The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections. Available
functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied differently according to the different
types: independently for each Voice section, independently for each keyboard, or globally for the entire
system.
Selected from the display
Controls and Effects
Reference
page for
changing
the
settings
Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied
Upper Keyboard
Upper
Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Lead Voice
Organ Flute
Voice
Lead Voice
1, 2
Lower Keyboard
Lower
Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Organ Flute
Voice
Pedalboard
Voice 1, 2
Pan
page 41

—


—

Touch Tone
page 41

—


—

Pitch
page 41

—


—

Feet
page 42

—


—

Reverb (send level)
page 42






Brilliance
page 42

—


—

Volume
page 42






Priority
page 42
—
—
*
—
—
—
Poly (Pedal
polyphonic mode)
page 42
—
—
—
—
—

Vibrato
page 42

—


—

Touch Vibrato
page 43

—


—

Lead Slide
page 43
—
—

—
—
—
Articulation Auto
page 43

—


—

Articulation Foot
SW Left
page 43

—


—

Transpose
page 44

—


—

Tune
page 44

—


—

Effect (1/2)
page 43

(Rotary
Speaker only)


(Rotary
Speaker only)
Reverb
page 44
Sustain
page 46
Rotary Speaker
page 47

Selected from
the panel
Pedalboard





—


*Priority is applied only for Lead Voice 2.
NOTE
Vibrato, Touch Vibrato, Slide, Articulation Auto, Articulation Foot SW Left and Sustain may not be available on some Voices.
40
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Settings Selected from the Voice Condition Display
3 TOUCH TONE
Settings Selected from the
Voice Condition Display
Voice Condition [Page 1]
1
3 -1 INITIAL touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the
velocity at which you play the keys. The harder you
play the keys, the greater the volume and the
brighter the timbre will become.
Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum
setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14
NOTE
2
Initial Touch may not be effective on some organ Voices.
3
4
4
Voice Controls and Effects
Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button
on the panel again (or press the name of the selected
Voice in the display). The Voice Condition display
appears.
Voice Condition display for each Voice has five pages that
can be switched by pressing [1] – [5] buttons at the top
right of the display.
The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control
over the volume and timbre of a Voice. All Voices are
provided with this expressive function, making it possible
to perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal
changes of actual instruments.
Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial
Touch and After Touch.
3 -2 AFTER touch
3-1 3-2
4-1
5
6
7
8
9
1
Controls volume and timbre according to the
pressure you apply to the keys after playing them.
The harder you press down on the keys, the greater
the volume and the brighter the timbre will become.
Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum
setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14
NOTE
2
• After Touch is not applied to the Pedal Voices.
• After Touch has no effect on percussive Voices (such as
piano or vibraphone), percussion sounds, or some organ
Voices.
3
4 PITCH
3-1
5
6
7
8
)
In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls,
including panning, touch tone and volume. The displays
of the various Voice sections have slight differences in
their functions.
1 Voice Link
Lets you register the settings on the Voice Condition
display (except for Volume and Brilliance) to the Voice
Link Category as a Voice. The registered Voice can be
selected from the “Voice Link” category on the display
called up via the User buttons of all the Voice Sections.
For detailed instructions, see page 48.
Controls pitch according to the playing style of
Horizontal Touch or After Touch. On some Voices in the
Lead Voice 2 section, not only pitch but also timbre may
be affected.
4 -1 AFTER touch
Controls the pitch according to the pressure you
apply to the keys after playing them.
The minimum setting produces no effect at all.
Higher (positive) settings make the pitch higher
according to the pressure and lower (negative)
settings make the pitch lower. The extreme settings
of +14 and -14 result in the widest pitch change.
Range: -14 – +14
2 PAN
Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image.
Seven pan positions are available.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
41
Settings Selected from the Voice Condition Display
5 FEET
Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you
use the Voice over a wide register. There are three
settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2'
setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. PRESET is
the original (factory) setting.
Voice Condition [Page 2]
1 -1
1
6 REVERB
3
4
3-1 3-2
4-1 4-2
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice
section. When the panel REVERB control is set to the
minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
See page 44 for details.
7 BRILLIANCE
1-2 1-3
1-4
2
Determines the tonal quality of the Voice, brighter or
mellower. Range is from -3 to +3. Higher settings makes
the Voice tone brighter.
The items included in this page differ between the Lead
Voice sections and the other sections. SLIDE (3) only
applies to Lead Voice 1 and 2.
8 VOLUME
1 VIBRATO
9 PRIORITY (only for the Lead Voice 2)
Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top.
• LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or
more keys are played simultaneously.
• TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or
more keys are played simultaneously. When the Solo
mode is on, Lead Voice 2 sounds according to Last
mode, regardless of the setting made here.
Reference page
• Solo function (page 27)
) POLY (only for Pedal Voices)
Allows you to switch the pedal polyphonic mode on or
off. Setting POLY to on switches the normally
monophonic pedal Voices to polyphonic play. This makes
it possible to play the Pedalboard in various expressive
ways, such as playing legato or playing intervals and
chords.
Keep in mind that you cannot exceed the total maximum
polyphony: 14 notes for all sections, Upper, Lower and
Pedal.
The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices,
making them sound warmer and more animated. This
effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For
some Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the
effect may not sound as expected.
1 -1 PRESET/USER
Selecting PRESET calls up the original (factory)
vibrato settings for the Voice.
When PRESET is selected, DELAY, DEPTH and
SPEED parameters cannot be edited.
Selecting USER lets you adjust the vibrato settings
for yourself.
Vibrato Control
Speed
Delay
Depth
Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 26 for
more information.
1 -2 DELAY
Determines the amount of time that elapses between
the playing of a key and the start of the vibrato
effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the
vibrato onset.
Range: 0 – 14
1 -3 DEPTH
Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect.
Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato.
The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.
Range: 0 – 14
42
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Settings Selected from the Voice Condition Display
1 -4 SPEED
Voice Condition [Pages 3 and 4]
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher
settings increase the speed of the vibrato.
Range: 0 – 14
2 TOUCH VIBRATO
1
4
3
NOTE
Touch Vibrato is not applied to the Pedal Voices of this Electone.
3 SLIDE (only for Lead Voices)
Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The
Slide function is effective within a one-octave range for
Lead Voices. Slide has no effect when playing notes
beyond a one-octave range.
Reference page
• Controlling Lead Slide with Foot Pedal (sold separately; see
page 177)
3 -1 ON/FOOT PEDAL/OFF
On/Off switch and Foot Pedal selector for the Slide
effect.
You can edit the effect parameters from these two
displays. Both displays have the same contents. You can
select two effects for each Voice section with these
displays (Voice Condition Pages 3 and 4).
1 EFFECT 1 (Page 3)/EFFECT 2 (Page 4)
Voice Controls and Effects
Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting
Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply vibrato to individual
notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you
press down the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When
Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth cannot be controlled,
no matter how hard you press the keys.
2
Selects the effect category. Pressing the EFFECT button
on the display calls up the effect category list. Select the
desired effect category from the list.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
Reference page
• Effect List (page 52)
3 -2 TIME
Determines the speed of the slide or portamento
effect. Higher settings makes the slide speed slower.
Range: 0 – 14
NOTE
The parameters here are not available when a Super Articulation
Voice is selected.
4 ARTICULATION
The settings here, available only for Super Articulation
Voices, produce effects (such as pitch bend and
glissando) which are characteristic of the corresponding
acoustic instrument, making your keyboard performance
more realistic.
4 -1 AUTO
Setting this to ON will apply various effects such as
pitch bend and glissando to your keyboard
performance.
4 -2 FOOT SW LEFT
Determines the effect produced via the Left
Footswitch: ART.1, ART.2 and OFF.
NOTE
For information about what effect is produced by setting
AUTO, ART.1 and ART.2 to ON, see “Super Articulation
Voice Supplementary List” on pages 34 – 36. As listed on
these pages, AUTO, ART.1 and ART.2 are not available for
some Voices.
By selecting [PRESET] in the list, the original (factory)
effect category for the selected Voice is automatically set.
Selecting [THRU] bypasses the effect (no effect is added
to the selected Voice).
2 TYPE 1 (Page 3)/ TYPE 2 (Page 4)
Determines the type of the effect. Pressing the TYPE
button on the display calls up the effect type list,
corresponding to the selected effect category. Select the
desired effect type from the list.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
If you have selected the [PRESET] category, the effect
type cannot be edited.
After changing the effect type, the effect parameter below
is automatically changed corresponding to the selected
effect type.
3 Effect Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the
selected effect type.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
43
Selecting from the Panel
Voice Condition [Page 5]
Selecting from the Panel
The Reverb, Sustain, Brilliance and Rotary Speaker
displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons
on the panel.
Reverb
1
2
1 TRANSPOSE
Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section.
Range is from -6 to +6.
Reference page
• Transpose (for entire instrument); (page 180)
2 TUNE
Determines the fine pitch settings (detune) for each Voice
section, producing a richer sound. Each step represents a
1-cent change in pitch.
Range: -64 – +63
Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the
impression of a performance in a large room or concert
hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice
sections, or adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and
accompaniment separately.
To adjust the reverb effect and call up
the Reverb pages:
Press one of the REVERB buttons, located to the left of
the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display
appears.
Reference page
• Pitch (for entire instrument); (page 180)
The Reverb display consists of four pages.
REVERB [Page 1]
DEPTH:
Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level
of the reflected sounds. Coarse reverb depth settings are
made with the panel REVERB buttons. The REVERB
buttons let you make coarse adjustment in five settings to
the reverb depth while the slider gives you fine control.
When this parameter or the panel REVERB control is set
to the minimum, the settings in the pages that follow
have no effect.
Range: 0 – 24
44
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Selecting from the Panel
NOTE
3 ORGAN
Depending on the reverb depth value (set by the slider), two
adjacent REVERB lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating
an intermediate position.
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ
Flute Voice. This parameter corresponds to the REVERB
slider contained in the ATTACK/VOLUME Page of the
Organ Flute display.
Range: 0 – 24
REVERB [Page 2]
Reference page
• Organ Flutes (page 38)
4
REVERB [Page 3]
2
Voice Controls and Effects
1
3
1 TYPE
Determines the reverb type for each of the Voice sections
and the Organ Flute Voice.
Several types can be selected: Room, Hall, Stage, and so
on.
Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the
Reverb Type list.
Reference page
• Effect List (page 52)
Determines the amount of reverb effect applied to each
Voice section.
Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in Voice
Condition Page 1 of the respective Voices.
Range: 0 – 24
Press the number buttons to change the display pages.
REVERB [Page 4]
The list contains many reverb types, more than can fit on
one display page. To change the display pages, press the
appropriate number buttons [1] or [2] in the display.
Select the desired reverb type from the list.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
After changing the reverb type, the TIME parameter
below is automatically changed corresponding to the
selected reverb type.
2 TIME
Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice
sections and the Organ Flute Voice.
Higher settings make the reverb effect longer.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
1
2
3
4
1 TYPE
Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment,
keyboard percussion, and microphone signal.
Reference page
• Connecting a microphone (page 185)
2 TIME
Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm,
accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and microphone
signal.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
45
Selecting from the Panel
3 RHYTHM
SUSTAIN LENGTH display
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm
(with PERCUSSION slider) and accompaniment (with
ACCOMPANI. slider). Each slider corresponds to the
REVERB slider in the Rhythm Condition display.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference page
• Changing the rhythm reverb (page 58)
4 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the
Keyboard Percussion.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference page
• Keyboard Percussion (page 66)
To adjust the sustain length value, use the display slider. If
you set the highest value (HOLD), some Voices such as
organ or synth will sound continuously even when the
keys are released.
Range: 0 – 12, HOLD
NOTE
Sustain
The sustain effect, selectable for each Voice section,
causes Voices to gradually fade out when the keys are
released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings
are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum
expressive control.
The Foot Pedal can also be used to switch the sustain on/
off. Sustain cannot be applied to the Lead Voices.
Reference page
• Foot Pedal (page 176)
To add sustain to the Voices and call up
the Sustain Length display:
Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of
the panel, to set the sustain. The SUSTAIN LENGTH
display appears.
The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is
on. Press the button again to turn sustain off and the
lamp turns off. When the lamp is off, sustain does not
affect the corresponding keyboard.
Remember to check whether the sustain button lamps are
on or off before you start to play.
46
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
• If you change the Voice when the sustain length is set to HOLD
and the keys are released, the Voice only changes after you play
another key.
• When the sustain length is set to HOLD, previously played note(s)
may be cut off by subsequently played notes.
• The minimum setting results in no sustain. Turning sustain off
automatically resets the sustain length to be the default setting.
• Only “HOLD” is available for the Voices listed below. No effect is
produced when a value of 0 – 12 is set.
S-Violin 1/ 2
S-Trumpet 1/2
S-Trombone
S-Flute
S-Flute Flutter
S-Clarinet 1/2
S-Alto Sax
S-Alto Sax Growl
S-Tenor Sax 1/2/3
S-TenorSax Growl
S-Soprano Sax
S-SprnoSax Growl
S-Harmonica
S-BluesHarp
S-Pan Flute 1/2
S-Irish Pipe 1/2
• If the pedal Voice using a Super Articulation Voice (excepting
S-Piano 1/2) is played when the sustain length is set to HOLD, the
Voice sound which is played earlier continues to sound without
being cut off, regardless of whether Pedal Poly (page 42) is set to
on or off.
Selecting from the Panel
Rotary Speaker
Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the
popular rotating speaker effect.
The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as
you play, with either the front panel button or the Left
Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation).
Keep in mind that the Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be
turned on only by turning on the [ROTARY SP SPEED]
button. To properly use the Rotary Speaker effect, follow
the procedure below.
Select the Rotary Speaker effect from
the desired Voice.
ROTARY SPEAKER display
When you want to set Rotary Speaker to one of the
Voice sections, you can select the effect category of
Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition display
Page 3 or 4. See page 43 for details.
Voice Controls and Effects
1
4
Select “Rotary Speaker” here.
1
2
1 SPEED
Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.
Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz
2 MODE
When you want to set Rotary Speaker for the Organ
Flute Voice, select the effect type in the EFFECT
Page. See page 39 for details.
Select an effect type other than [OFF].
Determines the slow/stop mode when [ROTARY SP
SPEED] button is off. If [SLOW] is selected, a slow
chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on
the panel.
If [STOP] is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off
when you turn off the button on the panel.
Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on
and set, you can control the effect in real time from
the panel or from the Left Footswitch.
3
2
Adjust the rotating speed and mode of
the Rotary Speaker.
Control the Rotary Speaker effect from
the panel or from the Left Footswitch.
You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from
the panel but also the Left Footswitch, if the
Footswitch has been properly assigned. See page 176
for details.
Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel.
The ROTARY SPEAKER display appears. The
settings in this display are common to all Voice
sections.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
47
Using Voice Link
The settings will be registered, then the Voice Link
indication (chain link icon) appears at right of the
Voice name on the display.
Using Voice Link
Registering a Voice with the
settings on the Voice Condition
display to Voice Link
You can register the current Voice with the current
settings (except for Volume and Brilliance) on the Voice
Condition display to the Voice Link category as a Voice.
1
2
This Voice Link indication in the Voice name will be
shown also on the Voice Display, enabling you to
confirm which Voice Section uses Voice Link.
Make the desired settings on the Voice
Condition display.
Here, set the FEET to “4'.”
This chain link icon appears when the corresponding
Voice is registered as a Voice Link.
At the left top on the display, press the
[LINK] button.
NOTE
When the same Voice has already been registered to Voice
Link, the [REGISTER] button in step 3 is grayed out and
cannot be used. If this occurs, press the [RENAME]
button, assign a different name to the current Voice, then
register the Voice to Voice Link again. For details, see
page 50. If you want to overwrite the current Voice with the
same Voice name to Voice Link, see page 49.
Selecting a Voice registered to
Voice Link
3
Press the [REGISTER] button on the
display.
1
Press a User button in the desired Voice
Section.
User buttons
48
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Using Voice Link
2
Press the Voice Link Category from the
Voice Categories at the right top on the
display, then press the desired Voice
name, for example “Strings 2” here.
Voice Categories
Voice Link
Releasing the current Voice
settings from Voice Link
When you want to change the Voice Condition settings of
the Voice already registered to Voice Link without
affecting the sound of another Voice Section and another
Registration Memory number, you should release the
Voice from Voice Link, then register the settings to Voice
Link with a different Voice name by following the
instructions on page 50.
From the Voice Link Category display,
select the Voice to be released from
Voice Link.
Editing the Voice registered to
Voice Link
Voice Controls and Effects
1
4
If you change the settings on the Voice Condition display
of the Voice in Voice Link, storing to the Registration
Memory will apply the changed new settings to all
Registrations which use the same Voice in Voice Link.
1
2
Select a Voice in Voice Link, call up the
Voice Condition display, then make the
desired settings.
2
Press the [LINK] button on the display.
3
Press the [OK] button.
Store the panel settings to a
Registration Memory button by
following the instructions on page 93.
NOTE
• When you save the Song or Unit next time, the settings of the
Voice Condition display will be applied to all the Units.
• When you want to change the Voice Condition settings of the
Voice already registered to Voice Link without affecting the sound
of another Voice Section and another Registration Memory
number, you should release the Voice from Voice Link (see next
topic), then register the settings to Voice Link with a different Voice
name (page 50).
The current Voice is now released from Voice Link.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
49
Using Voice Link
The settings will be registered, then the Voice Link
indication appears at right of the Voice name on the
display.
Registering a Voice to Voice Link
with a different Voice name
This section covers how to register the current Voice to
Voice Link with a different Voice name.
1
After pressing the [LINK] button on the
display, press the [RENAME] button on
the dialog window.
Deleting a Voice from Voice Link
2
Change the Voice name, then press the
[OK] button.
Since there is a limit to the number of Voices that can be
registered to Voice Link, you may want to delete
unnecessary Voices from Voice Link if the amount of
registered Voices comes close to 80.
The delete operation can be executed in any Voice
Section.
1
From the Voice menu in the Voice Link
category, select a Voice to be deleted.
Reference page
• Changing the Song Name (page 114)
3
50
Press the [REGISTER] button on the
dialog window.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
2
Press the [DELETE] button on the
display.
Using Voice Link
3
Press the [OK] button on the dialog
window.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
The selected Voice is now deleted from Voice Link.
When you press the Registration Number button
containing data using a Voice registered to Voice Link,
the corresponding Voice and its settings on the Voice
Condition display will be called up from its original Voice
Category (not from Voice Link). This means that the
Voice will sound the same as when the Voice settings
were stored to the Registration Memory, regardless of
changes made in the operation here.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
51
Effect List
Effect List
REVERB
HALL 1
HALL 2
HALL 3
HALL M
HALL L
XG HALL 1
XG HALL 2
ROOM 1
ROOM 2
ROOM 3
ROOM 4
ROOM S
ROOM M
ROOM L
XG ROOM 1
XG ROOM 2
XG ROOM 3
STAGE 1
STAGE 2
XG STAGE 1
XG STAGE 2
PLATE 1
PLATE 2
XG PLATE
GM PLATE
WHITE ROOM
ATMO HALL
ACOSTIC ROOM
DRUMS ROOM
PERC ROOM
TUNNEL
CANYON
BASEMENT
XG DLY LCR
DELAY LR
ECHO
CROSS DELAY1
TEMPO ECHO
TEMPO CROSS1
GATE REVERB2
REVERS GATE
XG CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 3
DELAY
DELAY LCR
CROSS DELAY2
TEMPO DELAY1
TEMPO DELAY2
TEMPO CROSS2
TEMPO CROSS3
TEMPO CROSS4
ER 1
ER 2
GATE REVERB1
KARAOKE 1
KARAOKE 2
KARAOKE 3
CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 1
ER/KARAOKE
CHORUS
CHORUS 1
XG CHORUS 4
GM CHORUS 1
GM CHORUS 2
GM CHORUS 3
GM CHORUS 4
FB CHORUS
CHORUS FAST
CHORUS LITE
AMB CHORUS
CELESTE 1
CELESTE 2
CELESTE 3
CELESTE 4
AMB CELESTE
SYMPHONIC
XG SYMPHONIC
AMB SYMPHO
ENS DETUNE 1
ENS DETUNE 2
FLANGER
FLANGER 1
FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 1
XG FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 3
GM FLANGER
V_FLANGER
TEMP FLANGER
DYNA FLANGER
VIN FLANGER1
VIN FLANGER2
AMB FLANGER
PHASER 3
EP PHASER 1
EP PHASER 2
PHASER
PHASER 1
PHASER 2
EP PHASER 3
TEMP PHASER1
TEMP PHASER2
DYNA PHASER
VIN PHASER 1
VIN PHASER 2
VIN PHSR ST1
VIN PHSR ST2
VIN PHSR ST3
VIN PHSR ST4
TREMOLO 1
TREMOLO 2
XG TREMOLO
EP TREMOLO
GT TREMOLO 1
GT TREMOLO 2
ORG TREMOLO
VIBE VIBRATE
T_TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
XG AT PAN 1
XG AT PAN 2
EP AUTO PAN
T_AUTO PAN 1
T_AUTO PAN 2
ROTARY SP 1
ROTARY SP 2
ROTARY SP 3
ROTARY SP 4
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN
ROTARY SPEAKER
XG ROTARY SP
ROTARY SP 5
2WAY ROT SP
DUAL ROTSP 1
DUAL ROTSP 2
DUAL ROT BRT
DUAL ROT WRM
DIST+ROT SP
ODRV+ROT SP
AMP+ROT SP
DIST+2ROT SP
ODRV+2ROT SP
AMP+2ROT SP
DISTORTION
52
DIST HARD 1
DIST HARD 2
DIST SOFT 1
DIST SOFT 2
ST DIST HARD
ST DIST SOFT
OVERDRIVE
ST OVERDRIVE
XG DIST
XG ST DIST
V_DIST WARM
V_DIST HARD
V_DIST SOFT
COMP+DIST
XG CMP+DIST
V_DIST CLS H
V_DIST CLS S
V_DIST METAL
V_DIST CRUNC
V_DIST BLUES
V_DIST EDGY
V_DIST SOLID
V_DIST CLN 1
V_DIST CLN 2
V_DIST TWIN
V_DIST ROCA
V_DST JZ CLN
V_DST FUSION
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Effect List
DISTORTION+
DIST+DELAY
ODRV+DELAY
XG DIST+DLY
XG ODRV+DLY
CMP+DIST+DLY
CMP+ODRV+DLY
XG CMP+DT+DL
XG CMP+OD+DL
V_DIST H+DLY
V_DIST S+DLY
DIST+T DLY
ODRV+T DLY
CMP+DST+TDLY
CMP+OD+TDLY1
CMP+OD+TDLY2
CMP+OD+TDLY3
CMP+OD+TDLY4
CMP+OD+TDLY5
CMP+OD+TDLY6
VDST H+TDLY1
VDST H+TDLY2
VDST S+TDLY1
VDST S+TDLY2
AMP SIMULATOR
XG AMP SIM
ST AMP SIM 1
ST AMP SIM 2
ST AMP SIM 3
ST AMP SIM 4
ST AMP SIM 5
XG ST AMP
ST AMP SOLID
ST AMP CRUNC
ST AMP BLUES
ST AMP CLEAN
ST AMP HARP
SML ST DIST
SML ST OVRDR
SML ST VINTG
SML ST HEAVY
B CMB CLASC
B CMB TOPBST
B CMB CUSTOM
B CMB HEAVY
B LGND BLUES
B LGND HVY1
B LGND HVY2
B LGND CLEAN
B LGND D CLN
US CMB TWIN
USCMB RCH CL
USCMB THN CL
USCMB CRUNCH
JZ CMB BASIC
JZ CMB WARM
US HI GN DTY
US HI GN RIF
US HIGN BURN
US HIGN SOLO
B LD DIRTY
B LD DRIVE
B LD GAINER
B LD HARD
AUTO WAH
XG AUTO WAH
V_AUTO WAH
TOUCH WAH 1
TOUCH WAH 2
TOUCH WAH 3
V_TOUCH WAH
AT WAH+DIST
XG AT WH+DST
AT WH+DST HD
WAH
AT WH+DST HV
AT WH+DST LT
AT WAH+ODRV
XG AT WAH+OD
AT WH+OD HD
AT WH+OD HV
AT WH+OD LT
TC WAH+DIST
XG TC WH+DST
TC WH+DST HD
TC WH+DST HV
TC WH+DST LT
TC WAH+ODRV
XG TC WAH+OD
TC WAH+OD HD
TC WAH+OD HV
TC WAH+OD LT
CLAVI TC WAH
EP TOUCH WAH
WAH+DST+TDLY
WAH+OD+TDLY1
WAH+OD+TDLY2
WAH+DIST+DLY
XG WH+DST+DL
WAH+ODRV+DLY
XG WH+OD+DLY
TEMPO AT WAH
T_A.WH+DST
T_A.WH+DSTHD
T_A.WH+DSTHV
T_A.WH+DSTLT
T_A.WH+ODRV
T_A.WH+OD HD
T_A.WH+OD HV
T_A.WH+OD LT
M BAND COMP
COMPRESSOR
COMP MED
COMP HEAVY
COMP MELODY
COMP BASS
V_COMPRESSOR
NOISE GATE
ST 2BAND EQ
ST 3BAND EQ
XG 3BAND EQ
EQ DISCO
EQ TEL
HM ENHANCER
XG HM ENHNCE
4
Voice Controls and Effects
AMP SIM
DYNAMIC
EQ/ENHANCER
PITCH CHANGE
PITCH CHANGE
XG PCH CHG 1
XG PCH CHG 2
MISCELLANEOUS
AMBIENCE
IMPULSE EXP
RESONATOR
VOICE CANCEL
TALKING MOD
LO-FI
DYNA FILTER
DYNA RINGMOD
RING MOD
ISOLATOR
LOOP FX1
LOOP FX2
LO-FI DRUM1
LO-FI DRUM2
LO-FI DRUM3
LO-FI DRUM4
DAMPER RESO
THRU
THRU
NOTE
Damper Resonance (DAMPER RESO) can be applied only when Sustain is turned on. For information on turning Sustain on, see
page 46.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
53
5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
This Electone features more than 600 different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion sampled
sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and
completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a
Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the Upper, Lower
keyboard and Pedalboard.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Selecting Rhythms with
the Rhythm Buttons
You can instantly select a rhythm from more than 600
rhythms with the ten rhythm buttons on the front panel.
2
Select the desired rhythm name from
the Rhythm menu.
The Rhythm menu contains many Pops rhythms,
more than can fit on the display page. To change the
display pages, press the appropriate number buttons
in the display.
Selecting a rhythm
In the explanation below, 16Beat 1 in the POPS category
is selected as an example.
1
Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the
RHYTHM section on the front panel (for
example, the [POPS] button).
Rhythm buttons
The relevant Rhythm Menu is displayed.
54
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
The color of the selected rhythm name changes to
orange, indicating that it has been selected.
Selecting Rhythms with the Rhythm Buttons
Rhythm structure
Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a
rhythmic variation of the basic rhythm, you can use them to
add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats while
you are playing. You can freely change the section while the
rhythm is played back.
INTRO
This is used for the beginning of the Song. There are three
Intro sections that can be selected with the INTRO [1] – [3]
buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm
automatically shifts to the Main section.
Operating the rhythm from the
panel
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as
desired by pressing the buttons on the panel. Using the
Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic interest
and “spice” to your performance.
To start/stop the rhythm:
5
START
MAIN
This is used for playing the main part of the Song. There are
four Main sections that can be selected with the MAIN/FILL
IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several
measures repeats indefinitely.
The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is
pressed.
To stop the rhythm, press the button again.
SYNCHRO START
Selected Main section’s lamp is lit
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit
FILL IN
This is designed for use as a temporary and regular
rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating rhythm. There are
four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the
selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired.
When one measure pattern of a Fill In finishes playing, the
rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes
BREAK
This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the
rhythm pattern. The Break section is selected by pressing
the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern
finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main
section.
The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in
“standby.” The rhythm starts when you press a note on
the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard.
When the A.B.C. mode is set to OFF, pressing the
[SYNCHRO START] button again stops the rhythm.
When the A.B.C. mode is set to something other than
OFF, releasing the key from the Lower keyboard stops the
rhythm.
When the A.B.C. mode is set to Custom A.B.C., releasing
the keys both from the Lower Keyboard and the
Pedalboard stops the rhythm.
Reference page
• Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)
(page 64)
INTRO
The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected
ENDING
This is used for the ending of the Song. There are three
Ending sections that can be selected with the ENDING [1] –
[3] buttons. When the ending is finished, the rhythm
automatically stops.
Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit
Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons
automatically adds a short introduction before starting
the actual (Main) rhythm.
First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press
the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually
start the rhythm.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
55
Selecting Rhythms with the Rhythm Buttons
While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display
shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern.
For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a
pattern in 4/4 time, the display at right appears:
To use the Fill In patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm,
occasionally press the selected MAIN/FILL button as
desired. A Fill In pattern of one measure will be played
and the selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button)
flashes.
NOTE
NOTE
When an Intro or Ending pattern is playing, the Lower Keyboard
cannot be played.
ENDING
You can record the currently selected section to Registration
Memory. However, you cannot record the on/off status of the
Auto Fill In function.
When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be
played automatically. The Auto Fill In function is set in
the Rhythm Condition display.
Pressing the selected Rhythm button on the panel again
(or pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in
the display) calls up the Rhythm Condition display.
Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons
automatically adds an ending phrase before stopping the
rhythm.
When you press the Ending button while rhythm is
playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the
ending phrase is played. You can have the ending
gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the
ENDING button once again, while the ending is playing.
NOTE
Pressing the ENDING [1] button during playback of the Main
section will first call up the Fill In pattern, then the Ending 1
pattern.
When Auto Fill is set to ON in the left side of the display,
the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you
switch the Main sections.
To switch the rhythm sections:
You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by
pressing the desired MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] button.
The selected section’s lamp (above the button) is lit.
To use the Break patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm,
occasionally press the [BREAK] button.
Moreover, you can start/stop the rhythm and switch the
sections by using the Footswitch. See page 175 for details.
56
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Selecting Rhythms with the Rhythm Buttons
Changing the rhythm volume
Adjusting the tempo
There are two ways to set the rhythm volume: using the
VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume
slider in the display. The volume buttons let you make
coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives
you fine control.
Use the TEMPO buttons (as shown below) to decrease or
increase the tempo.
Using VOLUME buttons on the panel
(coarse):
Decreasing the tempo
Increasing the tempo
TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed
values are given in beats per minute.
The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.
When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator
changes function to a BAR/BEAT indicator.
BAR/BEAT Indicator
Bar (measure) Beat
Using VOLUME slider in the display
(fine):
On the BAR/BEAT indicator, the number on the left
indicates the current bar or measure and the one on the
right indicates the number of the beat in each bar.
Pressing the same rhythm button on the panel again (or
pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in the
display) calls up the Rhythm Condition display.
You can also see the Tempo and Bar/Beat indications in
the Voice Display. In the Voice Display, both Tempo and
Bar/Beat can be seen in one display.
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Press one of the VOLUME buttons of the rhythm on the
panel to set the desired level.
The buttons have five volume settings, from a minimum
of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume.
TEMPO Indicator
To set the volume, touch the PERCUSSION VOLUME
slider in the display or use the Data Control dial. The
control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).
NOTE
Depending on the volume value (set by the slider), two adjacent
VOLUME lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an
intermediate position.
Reference page
• Voice Display (page 17)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
57
Selecting Rhythms from the User Buttons
Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press
[PRESET TEMPO] button in the display or
simultaneously press both TEMPO buttons on the panel
to restore the tempo to the original setting.
Selecting Rhythms from
the User Buttons
As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has
User buttons (numbered 1 or 2) from which rhythms can
be selected. You can select original User rhythms that you
have created with the Rhythm Pattern Program function.
This also allows you to assign two or three rhythms from
the same category to be selected from different buttons;
one from the original Rhythm button, and the others
from the User buttons.
1
Press one of the User buttons at the
right of the Rhythm buttons.
Changing the rhythm reverb
You can adjust the amount of reverb applied to the
rhythms and the percussion sounds used in the rhythms
in the Rhythm Condition display.
To adjust the amount of reverb, touch the slider in the
display or use the Data Control dial.
Reference page
• Reverb (page 44)
User buttons
The Rhythm Menu appears in the display.
2
Select the desired rhythm category with
the category buttons in the display.
You can also choose the “User” category to select a
User rhythm you have created.
Reference page
• Rhythm Pattern Program (page 142)
The currently selected rhythm category appears in
small letters above of the rhythm buttons in the
display. Keep in mind that the rhythm name shown
above the category name is that of the currently
assigned rhythm and is irrelevant to the rhythm
category.
When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum,
the setting here will have no effect.
Range: 0 – 24
Currently selected rhythm name
Currently selected rhythm category
3
Select a rhythm from the displayed
Rhythm Menu.
Use the number buttons in the display to call up
other rhythms in the category.
58
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm List
Rhythm List
This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this
list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu.
MARCH
1
2
*2
Jazz Waltz 2
Simple 6/8 March
*2
Jazz Waltz 3
Jungle Drum
3
Medium Jazz 1
Acoustic Jazz 1
German March
Modern Waltz
Acoustic Jazz 2
6/8 March 1
Pop Waltz
Fast Jazz
Country Waltz
Combo Swing
Mariachi
Cool Combo
3
OrchestralMarch+
*1
Banda Vals
Light Swing
Anime Fantasy +
*1
Snow Waltz
InstrumentalJazz
Galaxy Ship
Vocal Waltz
Manhattan Swing
SF March 1
Alpine Waltz
SF March 2 +
Jazz Club
AlpenLand 3/4
*1
Blockbuster
4
Bebop
Scand Hambo
Five-Four
Broadway
*2
Highland Waltz
Trad Piano Jazz
Showtune +
*1
Musette
Piano Trio
Italian Mazurka
Jazz Ballad 1
Italian Waltz
Jazz Ballad 2
French Waltz
Midnight Swing
Movie Soundtrack
Slow Jazz
Wild West
Pop Classics +
*1, *2
French 50s
4
Alpine March
6/8 Organ March
Choir Soundtrack
*3
Moonlight 1
Pub Piano
OrchestraBolero+
*1
Sing-a-longPiano
Romantic Waltz
*3
*3
Moonlight 2
Dreamy Ballad
Piano March
*2, *3
Classical Menuet
Piano 6/8 March
*2, *3
Green Fantasia
*2, *3
Winter Song 2
Piano Musical
*2, *3
Guitar Serenade
*2, *3
ChristmasShuffle
Baroque
*3
Piano Jazz Waltz
*2, *3
ChristmasBallad+
Baroque Air
*3
Baroque Concerto
*3
Strings Adagio
*3
Strings Concerto
*3
ClassicalSerenad
Choral Symphony
5
Winter Song 1
Movie Swing 2
SWING&JAZZ
Guitar Swing
Simple Big Band
*2
Afro Cuban 1
*3
Simple ComboJazz
*2
Afro Cuban 2
*3
Simple Swing
1
Afro Cuban 3
6
Foxtrot 1
*2, *3
Big Band 1
Brass Band Hymn+
*1, *3
Big Band 2
Foxtrot 2
Big Band 3
Slowfox 1
Big Band 4
Slowfox 2
Big Band 5
Dixieland 1
*2
Big Band 6
Dixieland 2
*3
Big Band 7
Dixieland Jazz 1
Orch Big Band 1
Dixieland Jazz 2
Vienna Waltz 1
Orch Big Band 2
Ragtime 1
Vienna Waltz 2
Big Band Jazz
Ragtime 2
Vienna Waltz 3
Big Band Fast
Charleston
Gentle Waltz 1
Classic Big Band
Gentle Waltz 2
30s Big Band
Classic Waltz
Modern Big Band
Jazz Singers
Slow Waltz
Mod BigBand Shfl
Tap Dance Swing
WALTZ
Simple Waltz
Orchestral Waltz
*1
Movie Swing 1
Romantic Ballet
Waltz
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Medium Jazz 2
Jazz Waltz Fast
6/8 Kids
1
Movie Panther
Marching Band 3
*2
6/8 March 2
4
Big Band Bop
Jazz Waltz Med
Marching Band 2
3
2
Jazz Waltz 4
Marching Band 1
2
Jazz Waltz 1
Simple March
2
*3
Quickstep
7
Orchestra Swing
*1 Cannot be selected for creating a Rhythm Pattern Program.
*2 Contains a Section with no Auto Bass part. Such a Section cannot produce the bass sound even if A.B.C. is turned on.
*3 Contains a Section with no Drum part. When playing such a Section, make sure to turn Accompaniment on.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
59
Rhythm List
7
Organ Groove
Piano Swing
6
*2, *3
60s Chart Swing
New R&B
Piano Stride
*2, *3
Bubblegum Pop
Worship Medium
Tijuana
Worship Fast +
70s 8Beat
Worshp Power Bld
70s Country Pop
Piano Blues 1
*2, *3
Piano Blues 2
*2, *3
Simple 8Beat Pop
*2
70s ChartCountry
Simple 3/4 Pop
*2
Country Brothers
Simple Shffl Pop
*2
Euro Pop Organ
8Beat Light 1
Euro Fox
8Beat Light 2
Euro Pop
8Beat Light 3
Piano 8Beat
1
*2, *3
Simple BossaNova
*2
Simple Samba
*2
*2
Simple Rumba
*2
Simple Shuffle 2
R&B
Simple Shuffle 3
1
Bossa Nova 1
Simple Funk
*2
Bossa Nova 2
16Beat 1
Simpl R&B Ballad
*2
Bossa Nova 3
16Beat 2
Simple R&B Shffl
*2
Bossa Nova 4
16Beat 3
Soul 1
Pop Bossa 1
16Beat 4
Soul 2
Pop Bossa 2
British 16Beat 1
16Beat Soul 1
Bossa Brazil
British 16Beat 2
16Beat Soul 2
Guitar Pop
Soul Brothers
Classic 16Beat
Frankly Soul
16Beat Shuffle 1
Live Soul Band +
16Beat Shuffle 2
70s Chart Soul
Light Samba 2
Soul Swing
Pop Samba 1
6/8 Soul
Pop Samba 2
Folk Rock 1
2
*2
Lounge Bossa
2
Samba
Big Band Samba
*1
Light Samba 1
Amazing Gospel 1
Jazz Samba
Folk Rock 2
Amazing Gospel 2
SingerSongWriter
Gospel Brothers
Mambo 2
Easy Pop
Gospel Sisters
Big Band Mambo
Hollywood Gospel
Rumba
60s 8Beat
Gospel Party
Pop Rumba
80s Boy Band
New Gospel
Fast Rumba
Surfin' 8Beat
Gospel Shuffle
Rumba Flamenco
Gospel Funk 1
Cha Cha Cha
Finger Pickin'
Gospel Funk 2
Big Band Cha Cha
Jazz Pop
Funk Beat 1
Pop Cha Cha 1
Eurovision Pop
Funk Beat 2
British Pop
Jazz Funk
Pop Shuffle
Kool Funk +
Kool Shuffle
Let's Funk
Salsa 3
Motor City 1
Montuno
Unplugged 2
Motor City 2
Calypso
Unplugged 3
Detroit Pop 1
Guaguanco
JPN Pop Shuffle
Detroit Pop 2
Danzon
Unplugged 1
*2
3
*2
JPN Idol Hits
JPN 70s Anime +
4
*1
3
Pop Cha Cha 2
4
*1
Salsa 1
Salsa 2
Blues Rock
Blueberry Blues+
Mambo 1
Guajira
*1
Cuban Bolero
JPN Soundtrack
Cool Blues
Cute Pop
Slow Blues
The 3rd Funk
Blues Shuffle 1
*2
Sunset DECA
Blues Shuffle 2+
*1
US 70s TV Theme
6/8 Blues
UK Soul Pop
Lovely Shuffle
Asian Pops
Modern Shuffle +
8Beat Adria
Cool R&B
Italian Tango
Scand Shuffle
70s Scat Legend
Tango Orchestra
Modern R&B 1
Tango Milonga
Sing Along
60
LATIN
Simple Shuffle 1
Heart Beat
6
*2
Simple Mambo
Chart Guitar Pop
5
*2
*1
8Beat Light 4
Fusion Shuffle 2
4
*1
Piano JazzBallad
Fusion Shuffle 1
3
Modern R&B 2 +
Soul R&B
POPS
2
5
60s Vintage Pop
7
1
Jersey Pop
*2, *3
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
5
Bomba
Pop Latin
5
Beguine 1
Beguine 2
Tango 1
Tango 2
*1
Tango 3
*2
Rhythm List
6
Guitar Rumba 1
*3
Guitar Rumba 2
BALLAD
1
Simple 8BtBallad
*2
*2
Piano Rumba
*2, *3
SimpleRockBallad
Piano Cha Cha
*2, *3
8Beat Ballad
Acoustic 8Bt Bld
Guitar Ballad 3
Piano Ballad
ClassicPianoBld
Flamenco
16Beat Ballad 3
ElecPiano Ballad
16Beat Ballad 4
Pop Piano Ballad
*2
6/8 Ballad
Piano8BeatBallad
*2, *3
Tarantella
6/8 Slow Rock 1
Piano Slow Rock
*2, *3
Sirtaki
6/8 Slow Rock 2
PianoOrchBallad
*3
Scand Schottis
6/8 Slow Rock 3
Hawaiian
6/8 Orchestral 1
*2
2
ROCK
Schlager 6/8
Simple Rock
*2
Polka 1
Moonlight 6/8
Simple Shfl Rock
*2
Euro Slow Rock
Hard Rock 1
Acoustic Ballad
Hard Rock 2
Orchestral Polka
Big Rock Ballad
Hard Rock 3 +
Zither Polka
90s Rock Ballad
Tears Rock 1
*3
3
1
*1
Power Ballad
Tears Rock 2
Scottish Polka
Easy Ballad
British Rock
Ober Polka
Romantic Ballad
Soft Rock
Party Polka
Love Song
Euro Polka
Epic Ballad +
*1
Stadium Rock +
*1
Dramatic Ballad
*3
Contemp Rock +
*1
Italian Polka
Polka Pop +
*1
2
Power Rock
Animation Ballad
Standard Rock
Secret Service
Acoustic Rock
Celtic Dance
70s Cool Ballad
Brit Rock Pop +
Celtic Dance 3/4
80s SmoothBallad
German Rock
90s Cool Ballad
Funk Pop Rock
Irish Dance
Irish Hymn
*2
Celtic Christmas
4
Scottish Reel
Pop Evergreen
*1
Chart Rock Shfl+
*1
ChartPianoShfl +
*1
Reggae
VocalPopBallad +
Happy Reggae
70s Pop Duo 1
Sheriff Reggae 1
70s Pop Duo 2
Sheriff Reggae 2
70s Glam Piano
Shuffle Reggae
Movie Ballad 1
60s Rock 2
Caribbean
Movie Ballad 2
60s Rock 3 +
*1
Zouk
80s Movie Ballad
60s Rock 4 +
*1
Hully Gully
BigScreenClassic
70s Rock +
*1
Chart Ballad
80s Power Rock+
*1
Hoedown 2
Analog Ballad
80s Synth Rock+
*1
Bluegrass 1
Pop Ballad
80s Pop Rock +
*1
Bluegrass 2
Modern PopBallad
80s Guitar Pop+
*1
Modern Bluegrass
New R&B Ballad
Country Band
Slow&Easy 1
Country Shuffle
Slow&Easy 2
Country 2/4
Chillout
Rock Shuffle 3 +
*1
Pickin' Swing
Country Rock Bld
70s RockShuffle+
*1
Easy Country
Rock&Roll 1
JPN Romantic Bld
Rock&Roll 2
Hoedown 1
ChinaPopBallad 1
*3
5
*2
6
ChinaPopBallad 2
China Dance
JPN FolkPopDuo
China Trad 1
JPN Dance Ballad
China Trad 2
*2
Ethereal Voices
*2, *3
Beach Rock
Surf Rock
3
*2
On Broadway
60s Rock 1
00s Boy Band
4
Rock Shuffle 1
Rock Shuffle 2
*2
Rock&Roll 3 +
*2
*2
*2, *3
Coudy Bay +
*1, *3
Night Walk +
*1, *2, *3
*1
6/8 Rock
JPN R&B Ballad
JPN TVSoundtrack
Kung Fu
*1, *2
*2
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
6/8 Orchestral 2
*3
*3
Enka
Banda Polka
6
Guitar Ballad 2
*2
16Beat Ballad 2
Polka 2
5
Organ Ballad 2
Bolero
Mexican Dance
4
Guitar Ballad 1
Pop Gtr Ballad
Pasodoble
3
7
16Beat Ballad 1
Pop Flamenco
2
Organ Ballad 1
8Beat Modern
WORLD MUSIC
1
6
60s Rock&Roll +
*1
Rock&RollShuffle
*3
Jive
Skiffle
5
Boogie Woogie 1
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
61
Rhythm List
5
Boogie Woogie 2
3
Swingin' Boogie
Disco Fox
Oldies Rock&Roll
Mallorca Disco +
*1, *2
*1, *2
Disco Palace
Metronome 4/4 +
*1, *2
Southern Rock
Disco Philly 1
Metronome 6/8 +
*1, *2
Cowboy Rock
Disco Philly 2
Metronome 9/8 +
*1, *2
Scand Bugg
Disco Teens 1
Country Rock 1
*1
4
Country Blues
*1, *2
Disco Funk 1
Metronome 7/4 +
*1, *2
Disco Funk 2
Metronome 8/4 +
*1, *2
Click 2/4 +
*1, *2
Country Straits+
*1
2
Dance Pop
Click 3/4 +
*1, *2
Country Strum
US Disco
Click 4/4 +
*1, *2
Irish Rock
Saturday Night +
Click 6/8 +
*1, *2
*1
60s Rising Pop
*2
Disco Fever
Click 9/8 +
*1, *2
Alp Rock +
*1
90s Disco
Click 12/8 +
*1, *2
Caribbean Rock 1
70s Disco 1
Click 5/4 +
*1, *2
Caribbean Rock 2
70s Disco 2
Click 7/4 +
*1, *2
70s Disco 3
Click 8/4 +
*1, *2
*1, *2
5
Trip Hop
*2
3
Cowbell 2/4 +
*1, *2
JPN Pop Rock 2
Chart Pop 1
Cowbell 3/4 +
*1, *2
JPN Band Rock 1
Chart Pop 2
Cowbell 4/4 +
*1, *2
JPN Band Rock 2
Ground Beat
Cowbell 6/8 +
*1, *2
JPN Light Rock 1
Synth Pop
Cowbell 9/8 +
*1, *2
JPN Light Rock 2
Synth Pop Duo +
*1
Cowbell 12/8 +
*1, *2
Cowbell 5/4 +
*1, *2
Cowbell 7/4 +
*1, *2
Cowbell 8/4 +
*1, *2
WoodBlock 2/4 +
*1, *2
Pop Beat 1
WoodBlock 3/4 +
*1, *2
Pretty Cute
Pop Beat 2
WoodBlock 4/4 +
*1, *2
Happy Pop
Funky Dance
WoodBlock 6/8 +
*1, *2
Dancehall
WoodBlock 9/8 +
*1, *2
Garage 1
WoodBlock 12/8 +
*1, *2
*1
US Pop
JPN Idol Rock
UK Pop
JPN Kids Hero
Turkish Eurobeat
Dragon Rock
Oriental Pop
Miracle Rock
*2
6
DANCE
Simple DancePop+
Simple Disco
*1, *2
Garage 2 +
*1
WoodBlock 5/4 +
*1, *2
Electronica +
*1
WoodBlock 7/4 +
*1, *2
WoodBlock 8/4 +
*1, *2
Latin Disco 1
Latin Disco 2
*3
7
Trance Pop
US Hip Hop 1
US Hip Hop 2 +
Euro Trance 1
Euro Trance 2
Euro Hip Hop 2 +
6/8 Trance 2
Hip Hop Pop
Club Dance 2 +
Hip Hop Groove
Classic Hip Hop
Pop R&B
Global DJ's
*2
8
JPN Idol Pop 1 +
Techno Party
JPN Idol Pop 2
Dream Dance
JPN Idol Pop 3
80s Dance
JPN Dance Pop 1
Club House
JPN Dance Pop 2
Swing House
Cute Techno
Funky House
Dance Police
Dirty Pop
Mallorca Party +
*1
Hip Hop Light
*2
*1, *2
Club Dance 3
Dancefloor
*1, *2
Euro Hip Hop 1
*2
6/8 Trance 1
Club Dance 1
4
Club Latin
Ibiza 2
Ibiza 3
*2
Latin DJ's
*2
Ibiza 1
*1, *2
Party Arena
Apres Ski Hit
62
*1, *2
Metronome 5/4 +
Disco Chocolate
JPN Rock Duo +
3
*2
Disco Teens 2
*2
JPN Pop Rock 1
2
1
*1, *2
Metronome 12/8 +
New Country
Disco Fox Rock +
1
METRONOME
Metronome 3/4 +
Country Rock 2
7
*1, *2
Metronome 2/4 +
Croco Twist +
6
Disco Rock +
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
*1
Accompaniment
Accompaniment
The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated
chords and other instrumental embellishments when
rhythms are used.
Accompaniment controls are selected from the Rhythm
Menu and Rhythm Condition display.
1
Press any one of the RHYTHM buttons
once.
Main Drum and Add Drum contains drum and
percussion rhythm patterns.
When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off,
the drum and percussion do not sound. Generally,
Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm
and Add drum has additional percussion sounds,
such as tambourine.
3
Adjust the volume and amount of reverb
applied to the Accompaniment.
Accompaniment parts
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Pressing the same rhythm button on the panel again
calls up the Rhythm Condition display.
The two sliders at the right side of the display can
control the Accompaniment volume and reverb.
Touch the slider in the display or use the Data
Control dial to adjust the volume/reverb.
At the bottom of the display, there are seven part
buttons, such as Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, and so on.
These parts, with the exception of Main Drum and
Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts.
2
Turn the desired parts on.
The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1,
Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1, and Phrase 2, and each of
them can be set to on or off by pressing
corresponding button in the display.
If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment
does not sound.
CHORD 1/CHORD 2:
These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.
PAD:
This part features sustained chords and commonly
uses lush sounds such as strings and organ.
PHRASE 1/PHRASE 2:
These parts are used for various embellishments and
riffs that enhance the Song, such as brass section
accents and chord arpeggios.
Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some
parts may be empty depending on the selected
rhythm and rhythm section.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
63
Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)
SINGLE FINGER:
Automatic Accompaniment
– Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)
The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the
Rhythm section of the Electone to automatically produce
bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely new
dimension to your performance by effectively putting a
full backing band at your disposal. One of three different
modes (Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.) is
used for producing Automatic Accompaniment patterns.
Before using the A.B.C. function, turn Pedal Poly off. If
Pedal Poly is set to on, the bass pattern of the A.B.C. will
not sound.
The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and
easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass
combinations. You can produce major, minor, 7th,
and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at
most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The
chord produced will sound in the same octave
regardless of where it is played on the Lower
keyboard.
Key of C
C
Press the root of the chord (the note
that corresponds to the chord’s name).
Cm
Minor chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any
one black key to the left of it.
Reference page
• POLY (page 42)
To set the A.B.C. function:
Major chords:
C7
7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any
one white key to the left of it.
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
Cm7
Minor 7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root as well
as any black key and any white key to
the left of it.
Playing single finger chords without the use of the
rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your
performance.
FINGERED CHORD:
A.B.C./M.O.C. display
1
2
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. The A.B.C. section is
at the left half of this display.
1 A.B.C. MODE
OFF:
Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.
64
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces
bass accompaniment for chords played in the Lower
keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord
types than in the Single Finger mode. In the
Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the
Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the
appropriate bass pattern. If you play only one or two
notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord
will sound based on the previously played chord.
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)
Key of C
Cm
C7
Cm7
Cmaj7
Cm maj7
Caug
Cdim
Cdim7
Csus4
C7sus4
Cm7-5
C6
Cm6
Cadd9
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)
The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically
adds a harmony part to the melodies you play on the
Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the
chords you play on the Lower keyboard — or from the
chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic
Accompaniment. Melody On Chord has three different
modes, each providing a different set of harmonics to
accompany the melody played. Melody On Chord can
also be controlled with the Foot Pedal (sold separately).
To set the M.O.C. function:
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
C
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
NOTE
When playing certain chords (aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and m6),
make sure to play the root of the chord as the lowest note
in that chord.
Playing fingered chords without the use of the
rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your
performance.
CUSTOM A.B.C.:
The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the
Fingered Chord mode. It allows you to determine
what bass notes will be played in the
accompaniment by playing a note on the Pedalboard
along with the chords you play in the Lower
keyboard.
A.B.C./M.O.C. display
2 MEMORY
LOWER:
When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices
and chord accompaniment keep playing even after
you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard,
while the rhythm plays.
1
PEDAL:
When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and
bass accompaniment keep playing even after you
release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the
rhythm plays.
(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When
this is set to on, the bass accompaniment of the
Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you
release your fingers from the Lower keyboard.
When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START]
button, set the Lower/Pedal Memory to on. When
Memory is off, releasing your fingers from the Lower
keyboard stops the rhythm.
2
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. The M.O.C. section
is at the right half of this display.
1 M.O.C. MODE
OFF:
Cancels the Melody On Chord function.
Mode 1:
Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range
close to the melody played.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
65
Keyboard Percussion
Mode 2:
Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range
close to the melody played.
Keyboard Percussion
Mode 3:
The Keyboard Percussion function features many types of
drum and percussion sounds, playable from the
keyboards and Pedalboard.
Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and
User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset
drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned
beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard
Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any
key or pedal you wish.
Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range
relatively distant from the melody played.
2 F.PEDAL
On/off switch for Foot Pedal control over Melody On
Chord operation. To use the Melody On Chord function
with Foot Pedal control, first switch the Foot Pedal
setting to ON, then select one of the three modes
(described above). When the control is on, pressing the
Foot Pedal activates the Melody On Chord function.
Reference page
• Controlling Melody On Chord (with Foot Pedal); (page 177)
Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper
Keyboard Voice section’s volume is set to the appropriate
value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead
Voices.
Using the Preset Keyboard
Percussion
1
Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal
Voices by setting each Voice’s volume
to MIN.
NOTE
In the Voice Display, each Voice section can be muted
(page 16).
2
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion
function by pressing the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] or [2] button.
The Keyboard Percussion (K.B.P.) display appears.
Pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button
calls up the Preset 1 kit on the Upper/Lower
keyboards, and pressing the [2] button calls up the
Preset 2 kit on the Pedalboard.
NOTE
Two Keyboard Percussion sets, [1] and [2], can be played
at the same time by setting both buttons to on.
66
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Keyboard Percussion
3
4
Press the [ASSIGN] button at the top
right in the display to call up the
ASSIGN Page.
5
Adjust the volume and amount of reverb
applied to the Keyboard Percussion.
Two sliders in the K.B.P. display determine the
reverb and volume settings. To adjust the volume
and amount of reverb, touch the slider in the display
or use the Data Control dial.
Press the [KIT CHANGE] button at the
center of the display to call up the
Keyboard Percussion Kit List.
5
6
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
The settings here determine the reverb/volume for
the entire Keyboard Percussion setup, not for each
percussion instrument. You can, however, adjust
each percussion instrument’s reverb/volume
(page 81).
Play some notes on the keyboards and/
or Pedalboard.
Press the kit name you want to use from the 38
Keyboard Percussion types. For details of percussion
assignments for each kit, see the Preset Keyboard
Percussion List on page 68.
The message “Are you sure you want to reset the
setup data to the default values?” appears when you
change the kit. Select [OK] to clear detailed settings
(made in the SETUP Page) and call up the selected kit
on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up the selected
kit without erasing the detailed settings.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
67
Keyboard Percussion
Preset Keyboard Percussion List
EL Kit
Preset 1 (UK)
-
SD Brush Roll
Surdo Mute
Side Stick
-
Snare Drum Heavy
Surdo Open
Snare
Claves
SD Brush Shot 1
Hi Q
Hand Clap
-
SD Reverb 1
Whip Slap
Snare Tight
-
Snare Drum Light
Scratch H
Floor Tom L
Synth Tom 3
Tom 3
Scratch L
Hi-Hat Closed
Concert BD
Snare Drum Rim 1
Finger Snap
Floor Tom H
Synth Tom 2
Tom 2
Click Noise
Hi-Hat Pedal
Bass Drum Heavy
Hi-Hat Closed
Metronome Click
Low Tom
Synth Tom 1
Tom 1
Metronome Bell
Hi-Hat Open
Bass Drum Light
Hi-Hat Open
Seq Click L
Mid Tom L
-
Snare Drum Heavy
Ride Cymbal 1
-
Seq Click H
Mid Tom H
-
SD Brush Roll
Synth Tom 3
-
Brush Tap
Crash Cymbal 1
-
Snare Drum Heavy
Crash Cymbal 1
-
Brush Swirl
High Tom
-
SD Brush Shot 1
Synth Tom 2
-
Brush Slap
Ride Cymbal 1
-
SD Reverb 1
Orchestra Cymbal
-
Brush Tap Swirl
Chinese Cymbal
-
Snare Drum Light
-
-
Snare Roll
Ride Cymbal Cup
-
Tom 3
Synth Tom 1
-
Castanet
Tambourine
-
Snare Drum Rim 1
-
-
Snare Soft
Splash Cymbal
-
Tom 2
-
Sticks
-
Hi-Hat Closed
-
Kick Soft
-
Tom 1
-
Open Rim Shot
-
Hi-Hat Open
-
Kick Tight
-
Ride Cymbal 1
Bongo H
Kick
-
Orch Snare Drum
Bongo L
Side Stick
-
Crash Cymbal 1
Conga H Mute
Snare
-
Snare Drum Roll
Conga H Open
Hand Clap
-
Orchestra Cymbal
Conga L
Snare Tight
-
Orch Cymbal Roll
Timbale H
Floor Tom L
-
Triangle Mute
Timbale L
Hi-Hat Closed
-
Tambourine
Agogo H
Floor Tom H
-
Triangle Open
Agogo L
Hi-Hat Pedal
-
Castanet
Cabasa
Low Tom
-
Cowbell 1
Maracas
Hi-Hat Open
-
Timbale 1 Low
Samba Whistle H
Mid Tom L
-
Timbale 1 High
Samba Whistle L
Mid Tom H
-
Wood Block Low
Guiro Short
Crash Cymbal 1
-
Conga Low
Guiro Long
High Tom
-
Wood Block High
Claves
Ride Cymbal 1
-
Conga High
Wood Block H
Chinese Cymbal
-
Bongo Low
Wood Block L
Ride Cymbal Cup
-
Agogo Low
Cuica Mute
Tambourine
-
Bongo High
Cuica Open
Splash Cymbal
-
Agogo High
Triangle Mute
Cowbell
-
Cuica Low
Triangle Open
Crash Cymbal 2
-
Hand Claps
Shaker
Vibraslap
-
Cuica High
Jingle Bells
Ride Cymbal 2
-
Shaker
Bell Tree
-
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
&
-
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
Bass Drum Heavy
'
&ᅊ
Preset 2 (PK)
-
&
&
Standard Kit 1*
Preset 1 (LK)
: Indicates the keys of the Electone keyboard.
* Standard Kit 2, Hit Kit, Room Kit, Rock Kit, Electro Kit, Analog Kit, Dance Kit, Jazz Kit, Brush Kit, Symphony Kit, Live!Studio Kit,
Live!Power Kit 1, Live!Power Kit 2 and Live!Rock Kit have the same sound assignments as Standard Kit 1.
68
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Keyboard Percussion
Live!AcousticKit
Preset 1 (UK)
Stick Acoustic
Surdo Mute
Stick Real
Surdo Open
Snare Acoustic
Surdo Open
Snare Real 1
Hi Q
Hand Clap Power
Hi Q
Clap Power
Whip Slap
Snare Rough Aco
Whip Slap
Snare Real 2
Scratch H
Tom Acoustic 1
Scratch H
Tom Real 1
Scratch L
Hi-HatClosedAco
Scratch L
Hi-HatClosedReal
Finger Snap
Tom Acoustic 2
Finger Snap
Tom Real 2
Click Noise
Hi-HatPedal Aco
Click Noise
Hi-Hat PedalReal
Metronome Click
Tom Acoustic 3
Metronome Click
Tom Real 3
Metronome Bell
Hi-Hat Open Aco
Metronome Bell
Hi-Hat Open Real
Seq Click L
Tom Acoustic 4
Seq Click L
Tom Real 4
-
Seq Click H
Tom Acoustic 5
-
Seq Click H
Tom Real 5
-
Brush Tap
CrashCymbalAco 1
-
Brush Tap
CrashCymbalReal1
-
Brush Swirl
Tom Acoustic 6
-
Brush Tap Swirl
Tom Real 6
-
Brush Slap
RideCymbal Aco 1
-
Brush Slap
RideCymbalReal 1
-
Brush Tap Swirl
China Cymbal Aco
-
Brush Tap Swirl
ChinaCymbal Real
-
Snare Roll Aco
RideCymbalCupAco
-
Snare Roll Rock
RideCym Cup Real
-
Castanet
Tambourine
-
Castanet
Tambourine
-
Snare Soft Aco
SplashCymbal Aco
-
Snare Tight
SplashCymbalReal
-
Sticks
-
Sticks
-
Kick Soft Aco
-
Kick Genuine
-
Rim Acoustic
-
Rim Real
-
Kick Mute Aco
-
Kick Real 1
Bongo H
Kick Open Aco
Bongo H
Kick Real 2
Bongo L
Stick Acoustic
Bongo L
Stick Real
Conga H Mute
Snare Acoustic
Conga H Mute
Snare Real 1
Conga H Open
Hand Clap Power
Conga H Open
Clap Power
Conga L
Snare Rough Aco
Conga L
Snare Real 2
Timbale H
Tom Acoustic 1
Timbale H
Tom Real 1
Timbale L
Hi-HatClosedAco
Timbale L
Hi-HatClosedReal
Agogo H
Tom Acoustic 2
Agogo H
Tom Real 2
Agogo L
Hi-HatPedal Aco
Agogo L
Hi-Hat PedalReal
Cabasa
Tom Acoustic 3
Cabasa
Tom Real 3
Maracas
Hi-Hat Open Aco
Maracas
Hi-Hat Open Real
Samba Whistle H
Tom Acoustic 4
Samba Whistle H
Tom Real 4
Samba Whistle L
Tom Acoustic 5
Samba Whistle L
Tom Real 5
Guiro Short
CrashCymbalAco 1
Guiro Short
CrashCymbalReal1
Guiro Long
Tom Acoustic 6
Guiro Long
Tom Real 6
Claves
RideCymbal Aco 1
Claves
RideCymbalReal 1
Wood Block H
China Cymbal Aco
Wood Block H
ChinaCymbal Real
Wood Block L
RideCymbalCupAco
Wood Block L
RideCym Cup Real
Cuica Mute
Tambourine
Cuica Mute
Tambourine
Cuica Open
SplashCymbal Aco
Cuica Open
SplashCymbalReal
Triangle Mute
Cowbell
Triangle Mute
Cowbell
Triangle Open
CrashCymbalAco 2
Triangle Open
CrashCymbalReal2
Shaker
Vibraslap
Shaker
Vibraslap
Jingle Bells
RideCymbal Aco 2
Jingle Bells
RideCymbalReal 2
Wind Chime
-
Wind Chime
-
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
&
-
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Surdo Mute
(
(
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick Real 2
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
Kick Open Aco
'
&ᅊ
Live!Real Drums
Preset 2 (PK)
-
&
&
Preset 1 (LK)
69
Keyboard Percussion
Live!RealBrushes
Preset 1 (UK)
Surdo Mute
Stick Brush
Surdo Mute
Snare T8 Rim
Surdo Open
Vintage Slap 4
Surdo Open
Snare T8 2
Hi Q
Clap Power
Hi Q
Clap T9
Whip Slap
Vintage Slap 5
Whip Slap
Snare T8 1
Scratch H
TomRealBrushes 1
Scratch H
Tom T8 1
Scratch L
Hi-Hat Closed RB
Scratch L
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Finger Snap
TomRealBrushes 2
Snare Hammer
Tom T8 2
Click Noise
Hi-Hat Pedal RB
Kick Zap Hard
Hi-Hat Pedal T8
Metronome Click
TomRealBrushes 3
Snare Garg L
Tom T8 3
Metronome Bell
Hi-Hat Open RB
Kick Tek Power
Hi-Hat Open T8
Vintage Tip
TomRealBrushes 4
Kick Slimy
Tom T8 4
-
Vintage Swirl 1
TomRealBrushes 5
-
Kick T8 4
Tom T8 6
-
Vintage Slap 1
CrashCymbal RB 1
-
Snare Analog CR
Crash Cymbal T8
-
Vintage Swirl 2
TomRealBrushes 6
-
Snare T8 7
Tom T8 7
-
Vintage Slap 2
Ride Cymbal RB
-
SnareClap Analog
Ride Cymbal T9
-
Vintage TapSwirl
ChinaCymbal RB
-
Snare T8 6
China Cymbal 2
-
VintageSlapSwirl
Ride Cup RB 1
-
Tom T8 5
RideCymbal Cup 2
-
Vintage Swirl 3
Tambourine
-
Snare T8 5
Tambourine RX5
-
Vintage Slap 3
Splash Cymbal RB
-
Kick T8 3
Splash Cymbal
-
Sticks
-
Snare T8 4
-
Kick Soft L
-
Kick T8 2
-
Open Rim Shot RB
-
Snare T8 3
-
Kick Soft H
-
T8 Kick Bass
Bongo H
KickJazzAmbience
Conga T8 5
Kick T8 1
Bongo L
Stick Brush
Conga T8 4
Snare T8 Rim
Conga H Mute
Vintage Slap 4
Conga T8 3
Snare T8 2
Conga H Open
Clap Power
Conga T8 2
Clap T9
Conga L
Vintage Slap 5
Conga T8 1
Snare T8 1
Timbale H
TomRealBrushes 1
Timbale H
Tom T8 1
Timbale L
Hi-Hat Closed RB
Timbale L
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Agogo H
TomRealBrushes 2
Glass H
Tom T8 2
Agogo L
Hi-Hat Pedal RB
Glass L
Hi-Hat Pedal T8
Cabasa
TomRealBrushes 3
Cabasa
Tom T8 3
Maracas
Hi-Hat Open RB
Maracas T8
Hi-Hat Open T8
Samba Whistle H
TomRealBrushes 4
Fx Gun 2
Tom T8 4
Samba Whistle L
TomRealBrushes 5
Fx Gun 1
Tom T8 6
Guiro Short
CrashCymbal RB 1
Analog Shaker H
Crash Cymbal T8
Guiro Long
TomRealBrushes 6
Analog Shaker L
Tom T8 7
Claves
Ride Cymbal RB
Claves T8
Ride Cymbal T9
Wood Block H
ChinaCymbal RB
Hi Q 1
China Cymbal 2
Wood Block L
Ride Cup RB 1
Hi Q 2
RideCymbal Cup 2
Cuica Mute
Tambourine
Scratch H 2
Tambourine RX5
Cuica Open
Splash Cymbal RB
Scratch L 2
Splash Cymbal
Triangle Mute
Cowbell
Triangle Mute
Cowbell T8
Triangle Open
CrashCymbal RB 2
Triangle Open
Crash Cymbal 4
Shaker
Vibraslap
Analog Shaker
Vibraslap
Jingle Bells
Ride Cup RB 2
Sleigh Bells
Ride Cymbal 3
Wind Chime
-
Wind Chime
-
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
-
Snare Hip 1
-
Snare Hip 2
-
Snare Hip Gate
-
Snare Break 1
-
Kick Blip
-
Snare Fx 1
-
Kick Fx Hammer
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
&
-
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
70
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick T8 1
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
KickJazzAmbience
'
&ᅊ
Analog T8 Kit
Preset 2 (PK)
-
&
&
Preset 1 (LK)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Keyboard Percussion
Analog T9 Kit
Preset 1 (UK)
Snare T9 Rim
W Kick
Snare T9 Rim
Surdo Open
Snare T9 1
Disco Fx
Snare T9 1
Hi Q
Clap T9
WhiteNoiseDown 1
Clap T9
Whip Slap
Snare T9 2
PinkNoise Down 1
Snare T9 2
Scratch H
Tom T9 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
Tom T9 1
Scratch L
Hi-Hat Closed T9
PinkNoise Down 2
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Snare Drum&Bass1
Tom T9 2
White Noise Up 2
Tom T9 2
Kick Break 2
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
White Noise Up 1
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Snare Distortion
Tom T9 3
Pink Noise Up
Tom T9 3
Kick Tek Power
Hi-Hat Open T9
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
Hi-Hat Open T9
KickDistortionRM
Tom T9 4
PinkNoise Up Rel
Tom T9 4
-
Kick T9 2
Tom T9 5
-
Kick T9 4
Tom T9 5
-
Snare Analog CR
Crash Cymbal T9
-
Snare T8 Rim
Crash Cymbal T9
-
Snare T9 5
Tom T9 6
-
Snare T8 5
Tom T9 6
-
Clap Analog Sm
Ride Cymbal T9
-
Hand Clap
Ride Cymbal T9
-
Snare T9 Gate 1
China Cymbal 2
-
Snare Garg L
Crash Cymbal 4
-
Snare Rock Roll
RideCymbal Cup 2
-
Snare Roll
RideCymbal Cup 2
-
Snare T9 3
Tambourine RX5
-
Snare T9 3
Tambourine Hit
-
Snare T9 4
Splash Cymbal 2
-
Snare T8 1
Splash Cymbal 2
-
Snare T9 Gate 2
-
Snare T9 5
-
Kick T9 4
-
Kick T9 1
-
Snare T9 6
-
Snare T9 Gate
-
Kick T9 1
-
Kick T9 2
Conga T8 5
Kick T9 3
Bongo H Open 1 F
Kick T9 5
Conga T8 4
Snare T9 Rim
Bongo L Open 3 F
Snare T9 Rim
Conga Tip
Snare T9 1
Conga H Tip
Snare T9 1
Conga Open Slap
Clap T9
Conga H SlapOpen
Clap T9
Conga Open
Snare T9 2
Conga H Open 2
Snare T9 2
Timbale H
Tom T9 1
Timbale H
Tom T9 1
Timbale L
Hi-Hat Closed T9
Timbale L
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Analog Click
Tom T9 2
Agogo H
Tom T9 2
Conga T8 1
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Agogo L
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Cabasa
Tom T9 3
Cabasa
Tom T9 3
Maracas Slur 2
Hi-Hat Open T9
Maracas Slur 2
Hi-Hat Open T9
Fx Gun 2
Tom T9 4
Vox Drum L
Tom T9 4
Fx Gun 1
Tom T9 5
Vox Drum H
Tom T9 5
Scratch H 3
Crash Cymbal T9
Guiro Short
Crash Cymbal T9
Scratch Down
Tom T9 6
Guiro Long
Tom T9 6
Hi Q 3
Ride Cymbal T9
Claves
Ride Cymbal T9
Hi Q 1
China Cymbal 2
Wood Block H
Crash Cymbal 4
Hi Q 2
RideCymbal Cup 2
Wood Block L
RideCymbal Cup 2
Scratch H 2
Tambourine RX5
Cuica H
Tambourine Hit
Scratch L 2
Splash Cymbal 2
Cuica L
Splash Cymbal 2
Triangle Mute
Cowbell 1
Triangle Mute
Cowbell 1
Triangle Open
Crash Cymbal 4
Triangle Open
Crash Cymbal 1
Analog Shaker
Cowbell T8
Analog Shaker
Cowbell T8
Sleigh Bells
Ride Cymbal 3
Sleigh Bells
Ride Cymbal 3
Wind Chime
-
Wind Chime
-
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
Snare Piccolo
Snare Break Roll
Snare T8 7
Noise Burst
SnareRckRollDist
Vox Bell
Snare Brush Mute
Snare R&B 1
Kick Blip Hard
Vox Alk
Snare Jungle 1
Udu High
Kick Sustain
Filter Kick
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
&
-
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Surdo Mute
(
(
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick T9 5
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
Kick T9 3
'
&ᅊ
House Kit
Preset 2 (PK)
-
&
&
Preset 1 (LK)
71
Keyboard Percussion
HipHop Kit
Preset 1 (UK)
Surdo Mute
SnareAnalogSmRim
Surdo Mute
Snare T9 Rim
Surdo Open
Snare HipHop 1
Surdo Open
Snare T9 1
Hi Q
Snare Clappy
Hi Q
Clap T9
Whip Slap
Snare HipHop 2
Whip Slap
Snare T9 4
Scratch H
Floor Tom L
Scratch H
Tom T9 1
Scratch L
Hi-HatClosed Hip
Scratch L
Hi-Hat Closed T9
Hi-HatClosedT8 2
Low Tom
Snare Drum&Bass1
Tom T9 2
Tom T8 3
Hi-Hat Pedal Hip
Kick Break 2
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Hi-Hat Open T8 2
Mid Tom L
Snare Distortion
Tom T9 3
Tom T8 6
Hi-Hat Open Hip
Kick Tek Power
Hi-Hat Open T9
Crash T8
High Tom
KickDistortionRM
Tom T9 4
-
Triangle Mute
Ride Cymbal 3
-
BassDrumHardLong
Tom T9 5
-
Triangle Open
Crash Cymbal 3
-
BassDrumTekPower
Crash Cymbal T9
-
Wind Chime
Shaker 2
-
Bass Drum Dist 5
Conga T8 1
-
TambourineLight2
ScratchBDForward
-
Bass Drum Dist 3
Ride Cymbal T9
-
TambourineLight1
ScratchBDReverse
-
Bass Drum Dist 1
Conga T8 2
-
Kick HipHop 9
Kick HipHop 2
-
BD Drum & Bass 1
Analog Click
-
Hi-HatClosed Tek
SnareHipHopRim 2
-
Bass Drum Blip
Claves T8 1
-
Kick Gate
HipHop Clap 2
-
BassDrumAnalogSm
Maracas T8
-
Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi
-
Kick T8 2
-
KickGranCasaOpen
-
Kick T8 3
-
Hi-HatReverseD&B
-
Kick T9 HD 3
-
Kick HipHop 1
-
Kick T9 2
Kick HipHop 3
Kick Analog CR
Snare T8 1
Kick T9 4
SnareHipHopRim 3
SnareAnalogSmRim
Snare T8 2
Snare T9 Rim
Snare HipHop 5
Snare HipHop 1
Snare T8 3
Snare T9 1
Electric Clap 1
Snare Clappy
Snare Analog CR
Clap T9
Handbell H
Snare HipHop 2
Snare Jungle 1
Snare T9 4
Kick HipHop 4
Floor Tom L
Snare Drum&Bass2
Tom T9 1
HipHop Clap 3
Hi-HatClosed Hip
Snare Hip 1
Hi-Hat Closed T9
HipHop Snap 2
Low Tom
Snare R&B 1
Tom T9 2
SnareHipHopRim 5
Hi-Hat Pedal Hip
Snare R&B 2
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
HipHop flex 1
Mid Tom L
Snare Hip 1
Tom T9 3
HipHop flex 2
Hi-Hat Open Hip
Snare Wood
Hi-Hat Open T9
Shaker 2
High Tom
Snare Timbre
Tom T9 4
Kick HipHop 5
Ride Cymbal 3
Hi-HatClosedT8 1
Tom T9 5
SnareHipHopRim 4
Crash Cymbal 3
Hi-Hat Open T8 1
Crash Cymbal T9
Snare HipHop 6
Shaker 2
Hi-HatClosedT8 2
Conga T8 1
Snare HipHop 11
ScratchBDForward
Hi-Hat Open T8 2
Ride Cymbal T9
Kick HipHop 10
ScratchBDReverse
Hi-Hat Pedal Aco
Conga T8 2
Snare HipHop 7
Kick HipHop 2
Hi-HatClosed Aco
Analog Click
HipHop Clap 5
SnareHipHopRim 2
Hi-Hat Open Aco
Claves T8 1
Conga H Tip
HipHop Clap 2
Hi-HatClosedLoFi
Maracas T8
Conga H Heel
HipHop Snap 1
Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi
TambourineAna CR
Conga H Open
Snare HipHop 3
Hi-HatClosed Syn
Analog Shaker
Conga L Open 1
Electric Clap 2
Hi-Hat Open Syn
Cowbell T8
Conga L Open 2
Kick Hip Deep
Analog Shaker 1
CowbellAnalog CR
Kick HipHop 8
-
Tambourine RX5 2
-
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
HipHop Clap 6
Tambourine 1 Hit
Snare T8 1
Electric Cowbell
Snare T8 1 H
Conga T8 3
HipHop Clap 7
ElectricTriangle
Tom T8 1
Claves T8 2
Hi-HatClosedT8 2
Analog Shaker 2
Tom T8 2
Electric Clap 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
&
-
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
72
Preset 2 (PK)
Kick T9 4
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
Kick Analog CR
'
&ᅊ
Drum Machine
Preset 2 (PK)
-
&
&
Preset 1 (LK)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Keyboard Percussion
Break Kit
Preset 1 (UK)
Snare Hip Rim 1
-
Cutting Noise 2
Surdo Open
Snare Break 3
-
-
Hi Q
Snare Break 1
-
String Slap
Whip Slap
Snare Break 2
-
-
Scratch H
Tom Break 1
-
-
Scratch L
HHClosedRockSoft
-
-
Finger Snap
Tom Break 2
-
-
Snare Break 8
Hi-Hat PedalRock
-
-
Snare Break 9
Tom Break 3
-
-
Hi-HatClosedBrk1
HH HalfOpen Rock
-
-
Hi-HatClosedBrk2
Tom Break 4
-
-
-
Kick Break Deep
Tom Break 5
-
-
-
-
Snare Hip
Crash Cymbal 1
-
-
-
-
Snare Lo-Fi
Tom Break 6
-
-
-
-
Snare Clappy
Ride Cymbal 3
-
-
-
-
Snare LdwH Mono
China Cymbal 2
-
-
Flute Key Click
-
Snare Rock Roll
RideCymbal Cup 2
-
-
-
-
Snare Gate 1
Tambourine 1 Hit
-
-
-
-
Snare Mid
Splash Cymbal 2
-
-
-
-
Snare Break Rim
-
-
-
Kick Break Heavy
-
-
-
Snare Hip Rim 4
-
-
-
Kick Break 2
-
-
Bongo H
Kick Break 1
-
Cutting Noise 1
Bongo L
Snare Hip Rim 1
-
Cutting Noise 2
Conga H Tip
Snare Break 3
-
-
Conga H OpenSlap
Snare Break 1
-
String Slap
Conga H Open
Snare Break 2
-
-
Bongo 2 H
Tom Break 1
-
-
Bongo 2 L
HHClosedRockSoft
-
-
Conga Open
Tom Break 2
-
-
Agogo L
Hi-Hat PedalRock
Shower
-
Cabasa
Tom Break 3
Thunder
-
Maracas Slur
HH HalfOpen Rock
Wind
-
Timbale H
Tom Break 4
Stream
-
Timbale L
Tom Break 5
Bubble
-
Scratch H 3
Crash Cymbal 1
Feed
-
Scratch Down
Tom Break 6
-
-
Claves
Ride Cymbal 3
-
-
Wood Block H
China Cymbal 2
-
Flute Key Click
Wood Block L
RideCymbal Cup 2
-
-
Scratch H 2
Tambourine 1 Hit
-
-
Scratch L 2
Splash Cymbal 2
-
-
Triangle Mute
Cowbell 1
-
-
Triangle Open
Crash Cymbal 2
-
-
Kick Break 3
Cowbell RX11
-
-
Kick Break 4
Ride Cymbal 2
-
-
Kick Break 5
-
Dog
-
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
Kick Break 6
Horse
Kick Break 7
Bird Tweet
Hi-HatClosedBrk3
-
Snare Break 4
-
Snare Break 5
-
Snare Break 6
Ghost
Snare Break 7
Maou
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
&
-
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Surdo Mute
(
(
Preset 2 (PK)
Cutting Noise 1
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
Kick Break 1
'
&ᅊ
SFX Kit 1/Live! SFX Kit 1
Preset 2 (PK)
-
&
&
Preset 1 (LK)
73
Keyboard Percussion
SFX Kit 2/Live! SFX Kit 2
Preset 1 (UK)
-
Door Squeak
-
Pink Noise
-
Door Slam
-
WhiteNoiseDown 1
-
Scratch Cut
-
PinkNoise Down 1
-
Scratch Split
-
WhiteNoiseDown 2
-
Wind Chime
-
PinkNoise Down 2
-
Telephone Ring
-
White Noise Up 2
-
-
-
White Noise Up 1
-
-
-
Pink Noise Up
-
-
-
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
-
-
-
PinkNoise Up Rel
-
-
-
WhiteNoiseUp LFO
-
-
-
-
-
PinkNoise Up LFO
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CarEngn Ignition
-
-
-
-
-
Car Tires Squeal
-
-
-
-
-
Car Passing
-
-
-
-
-
Car Crash
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Burst
Phone Call
-
White Noise
Roller Coaster
Door Squeak
-
Pink Noise
Submarine
Door Slam
-
WhiteNoiseDown 1
-
Scratch Cut
-
PinkNoise Down 1
-
Scratch Split
-
WhiteNoiseDown 2
-
Wind Chime
-
PinkNoise Down 2
-
Telephone Ring
-
White Noise Up 2
-
-
-
White Noise Up 1
Laugh
-
-
Pink Noise Up
Scream
-
-
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
Punch
-
-
PinkNoise Up Rel
Heart Beat
-
-
WhiteNoiseUp LFO
Foot Steps
-
-
PinkNoise Up LFO
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CarEngn Ignition
-
-
-
Car Tires Squeal
-
-
-
Car Passing
-
-
-
Car Crash
-
-
-
Siren
-
-
-
Train
-
-
-
Jet Plane
-
-
-
Starship
-
-
Machine Gun
-
-
-
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
Laser Gun
-
Explosion
-
Firework
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
&
-
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
74
Preset 2 (PK)
White Noise
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
Phone Call
'
&ᅊ
Preset 2 (PK)
-
&
&
Noise Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Keyboard Percussion
VocalEffectsKit
Preset 1 (UK)
Female Ha 1
-
-
-
Male Ha 2
-
-
-
Male Ha 3
-
-
-
Male Bh 1
-
-
-
Female Bh 1
-
-
-
Male Kh 1
-
-
-
Female Kh 1
-
-
-
Male Ph 1
-
-
-
Female Ph 1
-
-
-
Male Th 1
-
-
-
Female Th 1
-
-
-
-
Male Bh 2
-
-
C'mon
-
-
Female Bh 2
-
-
Hoo!
-
-
Male Kh 2
-
-
Aha!
-
-
Female Kh 2
-
-
Oh Yeah
-
-
Male Ph 2
-
-
Yayayayayah
-
-
Female Ph 2
-
-
Put Your Hands…
-
-
Male Th 2
-
-
C'mon Now
-
-
Female Th 2
-
-
Heeey
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Male Bh 3
Male Ha 1
Uhh Yeah
-
Female Bh 3
Female Ha 1
Aaoh
-
Male Kh 3
Male Ha 2
Come On!
-
Female Kh 3
Male Ha 3
Yeah!
-
Male Ph 3
Male Bh 1
Alright Now!
-
Female Ph 3
Female Bh 1
One
-
Male Th 3
Male Kh 1
Two
-
Female Th 3
Female Kh 1
Three
-
Male Bh 4
Male Ph 1
Four
-
Female Bh 4
Female Ph 1
One!
-
Male Kh 4
Male Th 1
Two!
-
Female Kh 4
Female Th 1
Three!
-
Male Ph 4
Male Bh 2
Four!
C'mon
Female Ph 4
Female Bh 2
Five!
Hoo!
Male Th 4
Male Kh 2
Six!
Aha!
Female Th 4
Female Kh 2
Seven!
Oh Yeah
-
Male Ph 2
Eight!
Yayayayayah
-
Female Ph 2
Clap!
Put Your Hands…
-
Male Th 2
Gospel Clap 1
C'mon Now
-
Female Th 2
Gospel Clap 2
Heeey
-
Male Ha 4
-
Everybody Now
-
Female Ha 2
-
ClapYourHands…
-
Male Ha 5
-
WithAllYourSoul
-
Male Ha 6
-
Stand Up On…
-
-
-
-
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
&
-
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
-
(
(
Preset 2 (PK)
-
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
Male Ha 1
'
&ᅊ
GospelAdLibs
Preset 2 (PK)
-
&
&
Preset 1 (LK)
75
Keyboard Percussion
Wonderland Kit
Preset 1 (UK)
Laser Shot
Horse
Cajon Low
Bongo H Open 3 f
Water Phone
Bass Drum
Cajon Slap
Bongo H Rim
Bubble
Footstep
Cajon Tip
Bongo H Tip
Puddle
Snare
Claves High
Bongo H Heel
Thunder
Snare Roll
Claves Low
Bongo H Slap
Shower
Footstep
Hand Clap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Beach
Lion
-
Bongo L Open 3 f
Stream
Footstep
Finger Snap
Bongo L Rim
Footstep
Oxen
Castanet
Bongo L Tip
Door Squeak
Footstep
Conga H Tip
Bongo L Heel
Door Slam
Door Slam
Conga H Heel
Bongo L Slap
Bass Drum
Bass Drum
Big Clock
-
Conga H Open
Timbale L
Gran Cassa
Gran Cassa
Footstep
-
Conga H Mute
-
Tom 2
Tom 2
Starship
-
Conga H SlapOpen
-
Tom 1
Tom 1
Footstep
-
Conga H Slap
-
Snare
Snare
Train
-
Conga H SlapMute
-
Snare Roll
Snare Roll
Car Crash
-
Conga L Tip
Paila L
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Footstep
-
Conga L Heel
Timbale H
Cymbal
Cymbal
Puddle
-
Conga L Open
-
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
-
Conga L Mute
Tambourine
Tambourine
-
Conga L SlapOpen
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
-
Conga L Slap
Castanet
Castanet
-
Conga L Slide
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Cowbell Top
Bongo H Open 1 f
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Cowbell 1
Bongo H Open 3 f
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Cowbell 2
Bongo H Rim
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Cowbell 3
Bongo H Tip
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Guiro Short
Bongo H Heel
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Guiro Long
Bongo H Slap
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Metal Guiro Short
Bongo L Open 1 f
Alarm Bell
Alarm Bell
Metal Guiro Long
Bongo L Open 3 f
Train
Train
Tambourine
Bongo L Rim
Horn 1
Horn 1
Tambourim Open
Bongo L Tip
Horn 2
Horn 2
Tambourim Mute
Bongo L Heel
Siren
Siren
Tambourim Tip
Bongo L Slap
CarEngn Ignition
CarEngn Ignition
Maracas
Timbale L
Car Crash
Car Crash
Shaker
-
Helicopter
Helicopter
Cabasa
-
Starship
Starship
Cuica Mute
-
Sheep
Sheep
Cuica Open
-
Goat
Goat
Cowbell High 1
Paila L
Oxen
Oxen
Cowbell High 2
Timbale H
Whinny
Whinny
Shekere
-
Horse
Horse
Shekere Tone
-
Lion
Lion
Triangle Mute
-
Dog
Dog
Triangle Open
-
Cat
Cat
-
Paila H
Hen
Hen
Wind Chime
-
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
Owl
-
Insects
-
Frog
-
Tweet 1
-
Tweet 2
-
Cuckoo Clock
-
Big Clock
-
Bell
-
Telephone
-
Camera
-
%
Gnaw
-
&
Applause
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
76
Preset 2 (PK)
Bongo H Open 1 f
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
Thunder
'
&ᅊ
Preset 2 (PK)
Laser Beam
&
&
PopLatin Kit
Preset 1 (LK)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Keyboard Percussion
Arabic Kit
Preset 1 (UK)
Side Stick
Asma Davul L
Tef Cymbal
-
Snare Soft
Asma Davul R
Tef Cymbal Mute
-
Arabic Hand Clap
Asma Davul Side
Tef Tremolo
-
Snare Drum
Asma Davul Both
Tef Shake 1
-
Floor Tom L
KoltukDavul Flam
Tef Shake 2
-
Hi-Hat Closed
KoltukDavul Teke
Tef Tek Flam
-
Floor Tom H
Koltuk Davul Tek
Tef Full Open
-
Hi-Hat Pedal
Koltuk Davul Dum
Tef Teke OpShort
-
Low Tom
Bendir Teke Flam
Tef Tek Op Short
-
Hi-Hat Open
Bendir Teke Dead
Tef Tek Open
-
Mid Tom L
Bendir Tek Dead
Tef Dum Open
-
Nakarazan Dom
Mid Tom H
-
Bendir Teke
Hollo FingerDead
-
Cabasa
Crash Cymbal 1
-
Bendir Tek
Hollo Slap
-
Nakarazan Edge
High Tom
-
Bendir Slap
Hollo Dum
-
Hager Dom
Ride Cymbal 1
-
Bendir Dum
Kasik
-
Hager Edge
Crash Cymbal 2
-
Zil Right Close
Kasik Flam
-
Bongo H
Duhulla Dom
-
Zil Right Open
BDarbuka TekDead
-
Bongo L
Tambourine
-
Zil Left Close
BDarbuka TekFlam
-
Conga H Mute
Duhulla Tak
-
Zil Left Open
BassDarbuka Teke
-
Conga H Open
-
Tef Teke Flam
-
Conga L
-
Tef Tek Mute
-
Zagrouda H
-
Tef Teke Damped
-
Zagrouda L
-
TefTekMuteMedium
Katem Dom
Kick Soft
BassDarbukaSlap2
Tef Dum Mute
Katem Tak
Side Stick
Bass Darbuka Dum
Tef Cymbal
Katem Sak
Snare Soft
DarbukaRollClose
Tef Cymbal Mute
Katem Tak
Arabic Hand Clap
Darbuka RollOpen
Tef Tremolo
Doff Tak
Snare Drum
DarbukaTekeFlamD
Tef Shake 1
Tabla Dom
Floor Tom L
Darbuka Tek Dead
Tef Shake 2
Tabla Tak 1
Hi-Hat Closed
DarbukaTekDamped
Tef Tek Flam
Tabla Tik
Floor Tom H
Darbuka TekeFlam
Tef Full Open
Tabla Tak 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Darbuka Teke
Tef Teke OpShort
Tabla Sak
Low Tom
DarbukaTekeFin 1
Tef Tek Op Short
Tabla Roll Edge
Hi-Hat Open
DarbukaTekeFin 2
Tef Tek Open
Tabla Flam
Mid Tom L
Darbuka Tek 1
Tef Dum Open
Sagat 1
Mid Tom H
DarbukaTekeFin 3
Hollo FingerDead
Tabel Dom
Crash Cymbal 1
DarbukaTekeFin 4
Hollo Slap
Sagat 3
High Tom
Darbuka Tek 2
Hollo Dum
Tabel Tak
Ride Cymbal 1
Darbuka Slap Med
Kasik
Sagat 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Darbuka Slap
Kasik Flam
Rik Dom
Duhulla Dom
Darbuka Dum
BDarbuka TekDead
Rik Tak 2
Tambourine
Bongo Tek Roll
BDarbuka TekFlam
Rik Finger 1
Duhulla Tak
Bongo Flam
BassDarbuka Teke
Rik Tak 1
Cowbell
Bongo Tek Flam
BDarbukaTekeFin1
Rik Finger 2
Duhulla Sak
Bongo Tek
BDarbukaTekeFin2
Rik BrassTremolo
Claves
Bongo Slap
Bass Darbuka Tek
Rik Sak
Doff Dom
Bongo Flam Hi
BassDarbukaSlap1
Rik Tik
-
Bongo Dum
-
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
&
-
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
-
(
(
Preset 2 (PK)
Tef Dum Mute
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
Kick Soft
'
&ᅊ
Turkish Kit
Preset 2 (PK)
-
&
&
Preset 1 (LK)
77
Keyboard Percussion
China Kit
-
Gong Batter
Symphonic Gong 1
Sus Cym 1 Roll S
-
Jin Luo
Symphonic Gong L
Sus Cymbal 1
-
Luo High 2
Symphonic Gong 2
Sus Cym 2 Roll L
-
Luo Mid-Low
Timpani E
Sus Cymbal 2
-
Luo
Timpani F
Concert Tom 5
-
Jin Luo Low
Timpani F#
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
-
Da Cha 1
Timpani G
Concert Tom 4
-
Da Cha Effect
Timpani G#
Orch Cymbal 1
-
Zhongcha
Timpani A
Concert Tom 3
-
Xiaocha Effect
Timpani A#
Orch Cymbal 2
Da Cha 2
Xiaocha
Timpani B
Concert Tom 2
-
Da Gu mp
Mang Luo Low
-
Timpani C
Concert Tom 1
-
Da Gu Rim
Mang Luo Mid
-
Timpani C#
Finger Cymbal
-
Da Gu f
Qing
-
Timpani D
Gong
-
Da Gu Hand
Finger Bell
-
Timpani D#
Ride Cymbal Tip
-
Da Gu Roll
Luo Big
-
Timpani High E
China Cymbal
-
Pai Gu 4
Muyu Low
-
Gran Cassa Hard
Ride Cymbal Cup
-
Pai Gu 4 High
Muyu Mid-Low
-
Gran Cassa Soft
Tambourine
-
Pai Gu 3
Muyu Mid
-
Gran Cassa Hit
Splash Cymbal
-
Pai Gu 3 High
-
Gran Cassa Cresc
-
Pai Gu 2
-
ConcertSnareDrum
-
Pai Gu 2 High
-
Snare Roll
-
Pai Gu 1
-
Snare Drum Light
Ban
Luo High 1
Bongo H Stick
Snare Ensemble
Bangu Roll
Gong Batter
Bongo L Stick
Sus Cym 1 Roll S
ChineseOperaVo 1
Jin Luo
Conga H Stick
Sus Cymbal 1
ChineseOperaVo 2
Luo High 2
Conga L Stick
Sus Cym 2 Roll L
ChineseOperaVo 3
Luo Mid-Low
Whip
Sus Cymbal 2
Yunluo F
Luo
Rotating Tom 5
Concert Tom 5
Yunluo F#
Jin Luo Low
Tubular Bell L
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Yunluo G
Da Cha 1
Rotating Tom 4
Concert Tom 4
Yunluo G#
Da Cha Effect
Tubular Bell M
Orch Cymbal 1
Yunluo A
Zhongcha
Rotating Tom 3
Concert Tom 3
Yunluo A#
Xiaocha Effect
Tubular Bell H
Orch Cymbal 2
Yunluo B
Xiaocha
Rotating Tom 2
Concert Tom 2
Yunluo C
Mang Luo Low
Rotating Tom 1
Concert Tom 1
Yunluo C#
Mang Luo Mid
Temple Block H
Finger Cymbal
Yunluo D
Qing
Temple Block L
Gong
Yunluo D#
Finger Bell
Claves
Ride Cymbal Tip
Yunluo E
Luo Big
Wood Block H
China Cymbal
Yunluo High F
Muyu Low
Wood Block L
Ride Cymbal Cup
Yunluo High F#
Muyu Mid-Low
Anveil
Tambourine
Yunluo High G
Muyu Mid
Triangle Roll
Splash Cymbal
Yunluo High G#
Muyu High
Triangle Mute
Cowbell
Yunluo High A
Nanbangzi Roll
Triangle Open
Jingle Ring
Yunluo High A#
Nanbangzi
Bell Tree
Castanet Roll
Yunluo High B
Bangu
Sleigh Bells
Table Castanet
Yunluo High C
-
Wind Chime
-
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
%
&
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
&
-
-
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
$ᅊ
78
Preset 2 (PK)
Snare Ensemble
'ᅊ
'ᅊ
Preset 1 (LK)
-
&ᅊ
'
Preset 1 (UK)
Luo High 1
'
&ᅊ
Preset 2 (PK)
-
&
&
OrchestraPerc
Preset 1 (LK)
Preset 1 (UK)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Keyboard Percussion
Creating a User Keyboard
Percussion Kit
You can create your own original Keyboard Percussion
kit by assigning specific drum/percussion sounds to the
notes on the keyboard. To do this, assign your desired Kit
(pages 83 – 92) to a User Keyboard Percussion (any of
User 1 – 40), then assign each desired drum/percussion
sound to any key or pedal. The created User Keyboard
Percussion kit can be called up via the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] or [2] button. In the instructions
below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up
with the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button.
5
By default, the same data as the Preset 1 – 2 of the EL Kit is
stored to User Keyboard Percussion 1 and 2.
1
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion
function by pressing the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] button.
The K.B.P. display appears.
2
Press [USER 1] on the display.
This procedure assigns User 1 to the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] button.
This lets you call up the User 1 settings the next time
you press the [1] button.
3
4
5
Select the desired drum instrument that
you wish to assign to a key.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
NOTE
Select the desired drum instrument category with
the category buttons in the display. The drum
instrument menu of the selected category appears.
Drum Instrument Category
Press the [ASSIGN] button at the right
top on the display to call up the ASSIGN
page.
Press the [KIT CHANGE] button at the
center on the display to call up the Kit
list of the Keyboard Percussion, then
select the desired kit.
Drum Instrument Menu
The message “Are you sure you want to reset the
setup data to the default values and clear the
assignments?” appears when you change the kit.
Select [OK] to clear all assignments and detailed
settings (made in the SETUP Page) and call up the
selected kit on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up
the selected kit without erasing the assignments and
detailed settings.
Reference page
• Kit Assign List (page 83)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
79
Keyboard Percussion
6
Assign an instrument to a particular key
or pedal by simultaneously holding
down the desired instrument name in
the display and pressing the key (or
pedal) to which the instrument is to be
assigned.
To erase one instrument:
Simultaneously hold down the [CLEAR] button in the
display (ASSIGN Page) and press the key (or pedal)
corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.
The key to which the instrument is to be assigned
Instrument Name
Hold down the Instrument
name…
NOTICE
Press the key.
7
8
The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is
automatically saved when you switch to another display.
While data is being saved, the square at the top left of the
display turns light blue for a few seconds. Do not turn the
power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being
saved.
When the assignment is complete, the key name and
instrument name is displayed at the top of the
display. The assignments are saved to the User
memory selected in step 2 (in this example, User 1).
To erase all instruments:
Repeat the operation steps above as
necessary to construct your own User
Keyboard Percussion set.
1
You can clear all assignments using the [CLEAR] button
in the display (ASSIGN Page).
Press, then release the [CLEAR] button.
The following display appears, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
From the Menu page of Keyboard
Percussion, select the User number
which you wish to use for your
performance.
When you select “User 5” on the K.B.P. [1] page for
example, pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION
[1] button will call up the User 5 of the Keyboard
Percussion.
NOTE
The User Keyboard Percussion data cannot be stored to
Registration Memory; only the on/off status of the [1]/[2]
buttons and which Keyboard Percussion kit (from Preset 1
– 2 and User 1 – 40) is selected can be stored there. When
you want to save the User Keyboard Percussion data
together with the current Registration Memory data,
execute the Save operation to the USB flash drive
(page 116). All 40 User Keyboard Percussion kits can be
saved for each Unit separately.
80
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
2
Press [CLEAR] in the display to erase all
data. When [CLEAR] is selected, a
“Completed” message momentarily
appears on the display.
Press [CANCEL] in the display to abort the
operation.
Keyboard Percussion
Copying the Keyboard Percussion
settings
You can copy the Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of
the User locations, or copy from one User location to
another. In the instructions below, Preset 1 is copied to
User 1.
1
4
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the
operation.
5
Press the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1]
button to copy Preset 1.
Detailed settings for each
percussion instrument
You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch,
reverb and volume for each instrument. The settings here
are system settings that cannot be memorized to
Registration memory.
1
2
3
Press the [COPY FROM] button in the
display.
A list appears, letting you select the copy source
location.
3
Turn off the volume of the relevant
keyboard (the keyboard to which the
instrument to be changed is assigned).
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Within the Menu buttons, select the
User location as the destination — for
example, User 1.
Press the [COPY] button in the display
to copy Preset 1. When [COPY] is
selected, a “Completed” message
momentarily appears in the display.
Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort
the operation.
To copy Preset 1, select the [1] button; to copy Preset
2, select the [2] button.
To copy either User location, select button [1] or [2].
2
Select the copy source (Preset 1 here)
from the list.
Press the [SETUP] button at the top
right of the K.B.P. display to call up the
SETUP Page.
Press the appropriate key (the key to
which the instrument to be changed is
assigned).
The selected instrument’s name is shown on the
display and you can change its settings.
The name of the
selected instrument
1
2
3
4
5
6
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
81
Keyboard Percussion
1 PAN
Determines the position of the currently selected
instrument in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are
available.
2 PITCH COARSE
Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by
100 cents.
Range: -64 – +63
3 PITCH FINE
Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by
one cent, allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument
than PITCH COARSE (2).
Range: -64 – +63
4 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently
selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 24
5 VOLUME
Determines the volume of the currently selected
instrument.
Range: 0 – 24
6 RESET
Initializes settings such as pan, pitch, and reverb to their
default values.
Pressing the [EXECUTE] button calls up the following
display, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to restore
(initialize) the default settings.
When [EXECUTE] is selected, a “Complete” message
momentarily appears on the display.
Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the
operation.
82
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Keyboard Percussion
Kit Assign list
EL Kit
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cym Mute
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Orchestra Cymbal
Orch Cymbal Roll
Orch Cymbal Mute
Cymbal March
Cym Brush Shot
Tam-Tam
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Analog HH Open
Analog HH Closed
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Drum Light
Snare Drum Heavy
Snare Drum Rim 1
Snare Drum Rim 2
SD Accent 1
SD Accent 2
SD Reverb 1
SD Reverb 2
Synth Snare Drum
Orch Snare Drum
Snare Drum Roll
Analog SD
SNARE BRUSH
• SD Brush Shot 1
• SD Brush Shot 2
• SD Brush Roll
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom 1
Tom 2
Tom 3
Tom 4
Tom Brush Shot 1
Tom Brush Shot 2
Tom Brush Shot 3
Tom Brush Shot 4
Synth Tom 1
Synth Tom 2
Synth Tom 3
BASS DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bass Drum Light
Bass Drum Heavy
Bass Drum Attack
Synth Bass Drum
Bass Drum March
Concert BD
Analog BD Short
Analog BD Long
CONGA/BONGO
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga High
Conga Low
Conga Slap
Conga Muff
Conga Slide
Bongo High
CUICA/SURDO
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cuica High
Cuica Middle
Cuica Low
Tamborim Open
Tamborim Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Mute
Surdo Rim
Surdo Muff
Standard Kit 1
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
TIMBALES/COWBELL
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Timbale 1 High
Timbale 1 Low
Timbale 2 High
Timbale 2 Low
Timbale 3 High
Timbale 3 Low
Timbale 4 High
Timbale 4 Low
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell 4
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cabasa
Shaker
Maracas High
Maracas Low
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Wood Block High
Wood Block Mid
Wood Block Low
Claves
Castanet
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Agogo High
Agogo Low
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime Down
Wind Chime Up
Tambourine
Pandeiro
Bells
Hand Claps
Finger Snap
Scratch
Noise Percussion
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Kotsuzumi 1
Kotsuzumi 2
Kotsuzumi 3
Kotsuzumi 4
Ohtsuzumi 1
Ohtsuzumi 2
Taiko 1
Taiko 2
Ohdaiko 1
Ohdaiko 2
Kakegoe 1
Kakegoe 2
Kakegoe 3
Snare
Snare Tight
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
• Kick
• Kick Tight
• Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard Kit 2
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
HI-HAT
• Bongo Low
• Bongo Slap
• Bongo Mute
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Short
Snare Tight H
Snare Soft 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot H
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
• Kick Short
• Kick Tight
• Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
83
Keyboard Percussion
PERCUSSION 2
PERCUSSION 1
TOM
• Hi-Hat Pedal
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SNARE DRUM
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Hit Kit
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine Light
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Ambient
Snare Tight 2
Snare Electro
Snare Roll
Stick Ambient
Snare Pitched
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hybrid Tom 1
Hybrid Tom 2
Hybrid Tom 3
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Hybrid Tom 6
BASS DRUM
• Kick Tight H
• Kick Wet
• Kick Tight L
84
Room Kit
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Room 1
Tom Room 2
Tom Room 3
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Tom Room 6
BASS DRUM
• Kick
• Kick Tight
• Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Rock Kit
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Snappy
Snare Tight Snap
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Rock
Snare Rock Tight
Snare Noisy
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom Rock 1
Tom Rock 2
Tom Rock 3
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Rock 6
BASS DRUM
• Kick Gate
• Kick 2
• Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
CYMBAL
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Keyboard Percussion
Electro Kit
• Finger Snap
• Hand Clap
CYMBAL
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Analog Kit
SNARE DRUM
Snare Noisy 2
Snare Noisy 3
Snare Snap Elec
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom Electro 1
Tom Electro 2
Tom Electro 3
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Tom Electro 6
BASS DRUM
• Kick Gate Heavy
• Kick Gate
• Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
CYMBAL
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hat Open Analog
Hat Close Analog
Hat Close Anlg 2
Dance Kit
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Analog
Snare Analog 2
Snare Noisy 4
Snare Roll
Side Stick Anlg
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom Analog 1
Tom Analog 2
Tom Analog 3
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Tom Analog 6
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine Anlg
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Dance Perc 3
Dance Perc 4
Snare Dance 1
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Dance Clap
Snare Clap
Snare Dry
Snare Techno
Reverse Dance 2
Side Stick Anlg
Rim Gate
Snare Analog 3
Snare Analog 4
Vinyl Noise
Reverse Cymbal
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom Dance 1
Tom Dance 2
Tom Dance 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Tom Dance 6
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch Dance 1
Scratch Dance 2
Dance Perc 2
Hi Q Dance 1
Dance Perc 1
Reverse Dance 1
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
• Kick Techno
• Kick Techno L
• Kick Techno Q
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 1
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BASS DRUM
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo Analog H
Bongo Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Dance
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
5
Jazz Kit
SNARE DRUM
TOM
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Analog
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 3
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Hat Close Anlg 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Kick Dance 1
Kick Dance 2
Dance Breath 1
Dance Breath 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 1
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 4
• Kick Analog
• Kick Anlg Short
• Kick 3
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Analog
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BASS DRUM
• Maracas 2
• Vibraslap Analog
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
• Samba Whistle L
Snare Jazz L
Snare Jazz M
Snare Jazz H
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
• Kick Jazz
• Kick Tight
• Kick Soft
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
85
Keyboard Percussion
PERCUSSION 1
TOM
• Hi-Hat Pedal
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SNARE DRUM
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Brush Kit
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Brush 1
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 3
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Tom Brush 6
BASS DRUM
• Kick Jazz
• Kick Tight
• Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Symphony Kit
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
86
Brush Slap 3
Brush Tap 2
Brush Slap 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Band Snare
Band Snare 2
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
• Gran Cassa Mute
• Gran Cassa
• Kick Soft 2
PERCUSSION 1
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BASS DRUM
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CYMBAL
Hand Cymbal
Hand Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Hand Cymbal S
Hand Cymbal 2 S
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Live!StudioKit
CYMBAL
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Snare Studio M
Snare Studio L
Snare Studio 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
• Kick Studio
• Kick Ambience L
• Kick Ambience H
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Keyboard Percussion
• Finger Snap
• Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Live!AcousticKit
• Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap Power
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CrashCymbalAco 1
CrashCymbalAco 2
SplashCymbal Aco
China Cymbal Aco
RideCymbal Aco 1
RideCymbal Aco 2
RideCymbalCupAco
Hi-Hat Open Aco
Hi-HatClosedAco
Hi-HatPedal Aco
Live!PowerKit1
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Acoustic
Snare Rough Aco
Snare Soft Aco
Snare Roll Aco
Stick Acoustic
Rim Acoustic
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom Acoustic 1
Tom Acoustic 2
Tom Acoustic 3
Tom Acoustic 4
Tom Acoustic 5
Tom Acoustic 6
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap Power
Snare Power 1
Snare Rough 1
SnareSoftPower 1
Snare Roll
Side Stick Power
Open Rim Power 1
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom Power 1
Tom Power 2
Tom Power 3
Tom Power 4
Tom Power 5
Tom Power 6
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Live!PowerKit2
SNARE DRUM
TOM
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CrashCymbalAco 1
CrashCymbalAco 2
SplashCymbal Aco
China Cymbal Aco
RideCymbal Aco 1
RideCymbal Aco 2
RideCymbalCupAco
Hi-HatOpen Power
Hi-HatClosePower
Hi-HatPedalPower
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 1
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
CYMBAL
• Kick Mute Aco
• Kick Open Aco
• Kick Soft Aco
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BASS DRUM
PERCUSSION 2
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CrashCymbalAco 1
CrashCymbalAco 2
SplashCymbal Aco
China Cymbal Aco
RideCymbal Aco 1
RideCymbal Aco 2
RideCymbalCupAco
Hi-HatOpen Power
HH Closed PW Eg
Hi-HatPedalPower
SNARE DRUM
• Kick Power Mute
• Kick Power Open
• Kick Ambient+
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 1
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BASS DRUM
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Snare Power 2
Snare Rough 2
SnareSoftPower 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Power
Open Rim Power 2
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
Tom Power 1
Tom Power 2
Tom Power 3
Tom Power 4
Tom Power 5
Tom Power 6
BASS DRUM
• Kick Power Mute
• Kick Power Open
• Kick Ambient+
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap Power
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
CYMBAL
• Maracas
• Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Live!Rock Kit
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CrashCymbalAco 1
CrashCymbalAco 2
SplashCymbal Aco
China Cymbal Aco
RideCymbal Aco 1
RideCymbal Aco 2
RideCymbalCupAco
Hi-Hat Open Rock
Hi-HatClosedRock
Hi-HatPedal Rock
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Rock
Snare Dry Rock
Snare Soft Rock
Snare Roll Rock
Stick Rock
Rim Rock
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
87
Keyboard Percussion
TOM
• Hi-Hat PedalReal
•
•
•
•
•
•
SNARE DRUM
Tom Rock 1
Tom Rock 2
Tom Rock 3
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Rock 6
BASS DRUM
• Kick Rock
• Kick Rock Heavy
• Kick Soft Rock
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Real 1
Snare Real 2
Snare Tight
Snare Roll Rock
Stick Real
Rim Real
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom Real 1
Tom Real 2
Tom Real 3
Tom Real 4
Tom Real 5
Tom Real 6
BASS DRUM
• Kick Real 1
• Kick Real 2
• Kick Genuine
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 3
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap Power
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Live!Real Drums
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Clap Power
PERCUSSION 4
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
88
CrashCymbalReal1
CrashCymbalReal2
SplashCymbalReal
ChinaCymbal Real
RideCymbalReal 1
RideCymbalReal 2
RideCym Cup Real
Hi-Hat Open Real
Hi-HatClosedReal
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Live!RealBrushes
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CrashCymbal RB 1
CrashCymbal RB 2
Splash Cymbal RB
ChinaCymbal RB
Ride Cymbal RB
Ride Cup RB 1
Ride Cup RB 2
Hi-Hat Open RB
Hi-Hat Closed RB
Hi-Hat Pedal RB
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
Vintage Slap 1
Vintage Slap 2
Vintage Slap 3
Vintage Slap 4
Vintage Slap 5
VintageSlapSwirl
Vintage Swirl 1
Vintage Swirl 2
Vintage Swirl 3
Vintage TapSwirl
Vintage Tip
Stick Brush
Open Rim Shot RB
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
TomRealBrushes 1
TomRealBrushes 2
TomRealBrushes 3
TomRealBrushes 4
TomRealBrushes 5
TomRealBrushes 6
BASS DRUM
• KickJazzAmbience
• Kick Soft H
• Kick Soft L
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Metronome Bell
Metronome Click
Analog T8 Kit
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Clap Power
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal T8
Crash Cymbal 4
Splash Cymbal
China Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal T9
Ride Cymbal 3
RideCymbal Cup 2
Hi-Hat Open T8
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Hi-Hat Pedal T8
SNARE DRUM 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare T8 1
Snare T8 2
Snare T8 3
Snare T8 4
Snare T8 5
Snare T8 6
Snare T8 7
Snare T8 Rim
Snare Analog CR
SnareClap Analog
Snare Break 1
Snare Garg L
Snare Fx 1
Snare Hammer
SNARE DRUM 2
• Snare Hip 1
• Snare Hip 2
• Snare Hip Gate
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom T8 1
Tom T8 2
Tom T8 3
Tom T8 4
Tom T8 5
Tom T8 6
Tom T8 7
PERCUSSION 2
BASS DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Kick T8 1
Kick T8 2
Kick T8 3
Kick T8 4
T8 Kick Bass
Kick Slimy
Kick Blip
Kick Tek Power
Kick Fx Hammer
Kick Zap Hard
PERCUSSION 3
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine
Jingle Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Conga T8 1
Conga T8 2
Conga T8 3
Conga T8 4
Conga T8 5
Timbale H
Timbale L
Keyboard Percussion
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cowbell T8
Claves T8
Glass H
Glass L
Maracas T8
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cabasa
Analog Shaker
Analog Shaker H
Analog Shaker L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine RX5
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Clap T9
Whip Slap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Hi Q 1
Hi Q 2
Scratch H
Scratch L
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Fx Gun 1
Fx Gun 2
Analog T9 Kit
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal T9
Splash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 4
China Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal T9
Ride Cymbal 3
RideCymbal Cup 2
Hi-Hat Open T9
Hi-Hat Closed T9
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
SNARE DRUM 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare T9 1
Snare T9 2
Snare T9 3
Snare T9 4
Snare T9 5
Snare T9 6
Snare T8 7
Snare T9 Gate 1
Snare T9 Gate 2
Snare T9 Rim
SNARE DRUM 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Drum&Bass1
Snare Jungle 1
Snare Distortion
Snare Analog CR
Snare Brush Mute
SnareRckRollDist
Snare Piccolo
Snare Rock Roll
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Kick T9 1
Kick T9 2
Kick T9 3
Kick T9 4
Kick Tek Power
Kick Sustain
Kick Blip Hard
KickDistortionRM
Kick Break 2
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga T8 1
Conga T8 4
Conga T8 5
Conga Open
Conga Open Slap
Conga Tip
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell 1
Cowbell T8
Maracas Slur 2
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cabasa
Analog Shaker
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine RX5
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Clap T9
Clap Analog Sm
Analog Click
Whip Slap
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Hi Q 1
Hi Q 2
Hi Q 3
Scratch H
Scratch H 2
Scratch H 3
Scratch L
Scratch L 2
Scratch Down
Fx Gun 1
Fx Gun 2
House Kit
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal T9
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 4
Splash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal T9
Ride Cymbal 3
RideCymbal Cup 2
Hi-Hat Open T9
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
TOM
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom T9 1
Tom T9 2
Tom T9 3
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 5
Snare T9 1
Snare T9 2
Snare T9 3
Snare T9 5
Snare T9 Gate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare T9 Rim
Snare T8 1
Snare T8 5
Snare T8 Rim
Snare Garg L
Snare R&B 1
Snare Roll
Snare Break Roll
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom T9 1
Tom T9 2
Tom T9 3
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 5
Tom T9 6
BASS DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Kick T9 1
Kick T9 2
Kick T9 4
Kick T9 5
W Kick
Filter Kick
NOISE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PinkNoise Down 1
PinkNoise Down 2
Pink Noise Up
PinkNoise Up Rel
WhiteNoiseDown 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
White Noise Up 1
White Noise Up 2
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
Noise Burst
Disco Fx
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open 2
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Tip
Bongo H Open 1 F
Bongo L Open 3 F
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell 1
Cowbell T8
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas Slur 2
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cuica H
Cuica L
Cabasa
Agogo H
Agogo L
Analog Shaker
Udu High
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine Hit
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Clap T9
Hand Clap
Vox Drum H
Vox Drum L
Vox Alk
Vox Bell
HipHop Kit
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash T8
Crash Cymbal 3
Ride Cymbal 3
Hi-Hat Open Hip
Hi-Hat Open T8 2
Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi
Hi-HatClosed Hip
Hi-HatClosedT8 2
Hi-HatClosed Tek
Hi-Hat Pedal Hip
Hi-HatReverseD&B
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare HipHop 1
Snare HipHop 2
Snare HipHop 3
Snare HipHop 5
Snare HipHop 6
Snare HipHop 7
Snare HipHop 11
Snare T8 1
Snare T8 1 H
Snare Clappy
SnareAnalogSmRim
SnareHipHopRim 2
SnareHipHopRim 3
SnareHipHopRim 4
SnareHipHopRim 5
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Tom T9 6
BASS DRUM
Floor Tom L
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
High Tom
Tom T8 1
Tom T8 2
Tom T8 3
Tom T8 6
BASS DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Kick HipHop 1
Kick HipHop 2
Kick HipHop 3
Kick HipHop 4
Kick HipHop 5
Kick HipHop 8
Kick HipHop 9
Kick HipHop 10
Kick Hip Deep
Kick Analog CR
Kick Gate
KickGranCasaOpen
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga H Heel
Conga H Tip
Conga L Open 1
Conga L Open 2
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Shaker 2
HipHop flex 1
HipHop flex 2
HipHop Snap 1
HipHop Snap 2
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
TambourineLight1
TambourineLight2
Handbell H
Wind Chime
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
89
Keyboard Percussion
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Whip Slap
HipHop Clap 2
HipHop Clap 3
HipHop Clap 5
HipHop Clap 6
HipHop Clap 7
Electric Clap 1
Electric Clap 2
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Scratch H
Scratch L
ScratchBDForward
ScratchBDReverse
Drum Machine
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal T9
Ride Cymbal T9
Hi-Hat Open T8 1
Hi-Hat Open T8 2
Hi-Hat Open T9
Hi-Hat Open Aco
Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi
Hi-Hat Open Syn
Hi-HatClosedT8 1
Hi-HatClosedT8 2
Hi-Hat Closed T9
Hi-HatClosed Aco
Hi-HatClosedLoFi
Hi-HatClosed Syn
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Hi-Hat Pedal Aco
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare T8 1
Snare T8 2
Snare T8 3
Snare T9 1
Snare T9 4
Snare T9 Rim
Snare R&B 1
Snare R&B 2
Snare Hip 1
Snare Timbre
Snare Wood
Snare Drum&Bass1
Snare Drum&Bass2
Snare Jungle 1
Snare Analog CR
Snare Distortion
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
Tom T9 1
Tom T9 2
Tom T9 3
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 5
BASS DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
90
Kick T8 2
Kick T8 3
Kick T9 2
Kick T9 4
Kick T9 HD 3
Kick Tek Power
Kick Break 2
KickDistortionRM
BD Drum & Bass 1
Bass Drum Dist 1
Bass Drum Dist 3
Bass Drum Dist 5
Conga T8 1
Conga T8 2
Conga T8 3
Cowbell T8
CowbellAnalog CR
Claves T8 1
Claves T8 2
Maracas T8
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Analog Shaker
Analog Shaker 1
Analog Shaker 2
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine RX5 2
Tambourine 1 Hit
TambourineAna CR
ElectricTriangle
Electric Cowbell
Clap T9
Whip Slap
Electric Clap 1
PERCUSSION 4
•
•
•
•
Hi Q
Scratch H
Scratch L
Analog Click
Break Kit
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BassDrumTekPower
BassDrumHardLong
Bass Drum Blip
BassDrumAnalogSm
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal 2
China Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 3
RideCymbal Cup 2
Hi-HatClosedBrk1
Hi-HatClosedBrk2
Hi-HatClosedBrk3
HH HalfOpen Rock
HHClosedRockSoft
Hi-Hat PedalRock
SNARE DRUM 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Break 1
Snare Break 2
Snare Break 3
Snare Break 4
Snare Break 5
Snare Break 6
Snare Break 7
Snare Break 8
Snare Break 9
Snare Break Rim
SNARE DRUM 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snare Gate 1
Snare Clappy
Snare Hip
Snare Hip Rim 1
Snare Hip Rim 4
Snare LdwH Mono
Snare Lo-Fi
Snare Mid
Snare Rock Roll
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
TOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tom Break 1
Tom Break 2
Tom Break 3
Tom Break 4
Tom Break 5
Tom Break 6
BASS DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Kick Break 1
Kick Break 2
Kick Break 3
Kick Break 4
Kick Break 5
Kick Break 6
Kick Break 7
Kick Break Deep
Kick Break Heavy
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga H OpenSlap
Conga H Tip
Conga Open
Bongo H
Bongo L
Bongo 2 H
Bongo 2 L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell 1
Cowbell RX11
Claves
Maracas Slur
SFX Kit 2
SFX 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SFX 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cabasa
Agogo L
Scratch H
Scratch L
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Scratch H 3
Scratch Down
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tambourine 1 Hit
Hi Q
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Phone Call
Telephone Ring
Wind Chime
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch Split
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps
CarEngn Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
Live! SFX Kit 1
SFX
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
String Slap
Flute Key Click
Shower 2
Thunder 2
Wind 2
Stream 2
Bubble 2
Feed
Ghost
Maou
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet
Live! SFX Kit 2
SFX 1
SFX Kit 1
SFX
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
String Slap
Flute Key Click
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Ghost
Maou
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Phone Call
Telephone Ring 2
Wind Chime
Door Squeak 2
Door Slam 2
Scratch Cut
Scratch Split
Laugh
Scream 2
Punch 2
Heart Beat
Foot Steps 2
SFX 2
•
•
•
•
•
CarEngn Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren 2
Keyboard Percussion
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Train 2
Jet Plane 2
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
Machine Gun 2
Laser Gun
Explosion 2
Firework
Noise Kit
NOISE
White Noise
WhiteNoiseDown 1
WhiteNoiseDown 2
White Noise Up 1
White Noise Up 2
WhiteNoiseUp Rel
WhiteNoiseUp LFO
Pink Noise
PinkNoise Down 1
PinkNoise Down 2
Pink Noise Up
PinkNoise Up Rel
PinkNoise Up LFO
VocalEffectsKit
FEMALE 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Female Bh 1
Female Bh 2
Female Bh 3
Female Bh 4
Female Ha 1
Female Ha 2
Female Kh 1
Female Kh 2
Female Kh 3
Female Kh 4
Female Ph 1
Female Ph 2
Female Ph 3
Female Ph 4
FEMALE 2
•
•
•
•
Female Th 1
Female Th 2
Female Th 3
Female Th 4
MALE 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Male Bh 1
Male Bh 2
Male Bh 3
Male Bh 4
Male Ha 1
Male Ha 2
Male Ha 3
Male Ha 4
Male Ha 5
Male Ha 6
Male Kh 1
Male Kh 2
Male Kh 3
Male Kh 4
MALE 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
Male Ph 1
Male Ph 2
Male Ph 3
Male Ph 4
Male Th 1
Male Th 2
GospelAdLibs
GOSPELADLIBS 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Aaoh
Aha!
Heeey
Hoo!
Oh Yeah
Uhh Yeah
Yayayayayah
Yeah!
C'mon
C'mon Now
Come On!
Alright Now!
Everybody Now
Put Your Hands…
Stand Up On…
WithAllYourSoul
GOSPELADLIBS 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
One
Two
Three
Four
One!
Two!
Three!
Four!
Five!
Six!
Seven!
Eight!
Clap!
ClapYourHands…
Gospel Clap 1
Gospel Clap 2
• Car Crash
• Helicopter
• Starship
ANIMAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Laser Beam
Laser Shot
Water Phone
Bubble
Puddle
NATURE
•
•
•
•
Thunder
Shower
Beach
Stream
DAILY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Footstep
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Alarm Bell
Cuckoo Clock
Big Clock
Bell
Telephone
Camera
Gnaw
Applause
VEHICLE
•
•
•
•
•
Train
Horn 1
Horn 2
Siren
CarEngn Ignition
Cymbal
Snare
Snare Roll
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom 1
Tom 2
Bass Drum
Gran Cassa
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wonderland Kit
SE
Sheep
Goat
Oxen
Whinny
Horse
Lion
Dog
Cat
Hen
Owl
Insects
Frog
Tweet 1
Tweet 2
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Timbale H
Timbale L
Paila H
Paila L
Cowbell Top
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell High 1
Cowbell High 2
Claves High
Claves Low
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Metal Guiro Long
Metal Guiro Short
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maracas
Cuica Open
Cuica Mute
Cabasa
Shaker
Tambourine
Tambourim Tip
Tambourim Open
Tambourim Mute
Castanet
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime
PERCUSSION 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hand Clap
Finger Snap
Shekere
Shekere Tone
Cajon Low
Cajon Slap
Cajon Tip
Arabic Kit
Pop Latin Kit
CONGA
ARABIC 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Conga H Open
Conga H Mute
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Slap
Conga H SlapMute
Conga L Tip
Conga L Heel
Conga L Open
Conga L Mute
Conga L SlapOpen
Conga L Slap
Conga L Slide
BONGO
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Male Th 3
• Male Th 4
Nakarazan Dom
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Arabic Hand Clap
Duhulla Dom
Duhulla Tak
Duhulla Sak
Doff Dom
Doff Tak
ARABIC 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Tik
Tabla Roll Edge
Tabla Flam
Tabel Dom
Tabel Tak
ARABIC 3
• Sagat 1
• Sagat 2
• Sagat 3
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
91
Keyboard Percussion
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 1
Rik Tak 2
Rik Sak
Rik Tik
Rik Finger 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik BrassTremolo
CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 1
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Snare Drum
Snare Soft
Side Stick
TOM/BASS DRUM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Cowbell
Claves
Cabasa
Tambourine
Turkish Kit
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
Zil Right Open
Zil Right Close
Zil Left Open
Zil Left Close
BONGO
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bongo Tek
Bongo Tek Roll
Bongo Tek Flam
Bongo Dum
Bongo Slap
Bongo Flam
Bongo Flam Hi
DAVUL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Asma Davul L
Asma Davul R
Asma Davul Side
Asma Davul Both
KoltukDavul Teke
Koltuk Davul Tek
Koltuk Davul Dum
KoltukDavul Flam
DARABUKA 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
92
Darbuka Tek 1
Darbuka Tek 2
Darbuka Tek Dead
DarbukaTekDamped
DarbukaTekeFin 1
DarbukaTekeFin 2
DarbukaTekeFin 3
DarbukaTekeFin 4
Darbuka Teke
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DarbukaTekeFlamD
Darbuka TekeFlam
Darbuka Slap
Darbuka Slap Med
Darbuka RollOpen
DarbukaRollClose
Darbuka Dum
DARABUKA 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bass Darbuka Tek
BDarbuka TekDead
BDarbuka TekFlam
BassDarbuka Teke
BDarbukaTekeFin1
BDarbukaTekeFin2
BassDarbukaSlap1
BassDarbukaSlap2
Bass Darbuka Dum
BENDIR
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bendir Tek
Bendir Tek Dead
Bendir Teke
Bendir Teke Flam
Bendir Teke Dead
Bendir Slap
Bendir Dum
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Da Gu Roll
Da Gu Hand
Pai Gu 1
Pai Gu 2 High
Pai Gu 2
Pai Gu 3 High
Pai Gu 3
Pai Gu 4 High
Pai Gu 4
GONG 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yunluo F
Yunluo F#
Yunluo G
Yunluo G#
Yunluo A
Yunluo A#
Yunluo B
Yunluo C
Yunluo C#
Yunluo D
Yunluo D#
Yunluo E
Yunluo High F
Yunluo High F#
Yunluo High G
Yunluo High G#
TEF
GONG 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tef Tek Flam
Tef Tek Open
Tef Tek Mute
TefTekMuteMedium
Tef Tek Op Short
Tef Teke Flam
Tef Teke Damped
Tef Teke OpShort
Tef Dum Open
Tef Dum Mute
Tef Cymbal
Tef Cymbal Mute
Tef Shake 1
Tef Shake 2
Tef Full Open
Tef Tremolo
PERCUSSION
•
•
•
•
•
Hollo FingerDead
Hollo Slap
Hollo Dum
Kasik
Kasik Flam
Yunluo High A
Yunluo High A#
Yunluo High B
Yunluo High C
CYMBAL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Da Cha 1
Da Cha 2
Da Cha Effect
Zhongcha
Xiaocha
Xiaocha Effect
Gong Batter
Luo Big
Luo
Luo Mid-Low
Luo High 1
Luo High 2
Jin Luo
Jin Luo Low
Mang Luo Low
Mang Luo Mid
DRUM
• Da Gu f
• Da Gu mp
• Da Gu Rim
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Concert Tom 5
Rotating Tom 1
Rotating Tom 2
Rotating Tom 3
Rotating Tom 4
Rotating Tom 5
BASS DRUM
•
•
•
•
Gran Cassa Hard
Gran Cassa Soft
Gran Cassa Hit
Gran Cassa Cresc
GONG
•
•
•
•
Gong
Symphonic Gong 1
Symphonic Gong 2
Symphonic Gong L
TIMPANI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Timpani E
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani C
Timpani C#
Timpani D
Timpani D#
Timpani High E
PERCUSSION
PERCUSSION 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Muyu Low
Muyu Mid-Low
Muyu Mid
Muyu High
Ban
Bangu
Bangu Roll
Nanbangzi
Nanbangzi Roll
Qing
Finger Bell
ChineseOperaVo 1
ChineseOperaVo 2
ChineseOperaVo 3
OrchestraPerc
CYMBAL
China Kit
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
China Cymbal
Finger Cymbal
Orch Cymbal 1
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Orch Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Tip
Ride Cymbal Cup
Splash Cymbal
Sus Cymbal 1
Sus Cym 1 Roll S
Sus Cymbal 2
Sus Cym 2 Roll L
SNARE DRUM
•
•
•
•
ConcertSnareDrum
Snare Drum Light
Snare Ensemble
Snare Roll
TOM
•
•
•
•
Concert Tom 1
Concert Tom 2
Concert Tom 3
Concert Tom 4
Conga H Stick
Conga L Stick
Bongo H Stick
Bongo L Stick
Cowbell
Claves
Bell Tree
Sleigh Bells
Tubular Bell H
Tubular Bell M
Tubular Bell L
Wind Chime
Jingle Ring
Tambourine
Castanet Roll
Table Castanet
PERCUSSION 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Roll
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Temple Block H
Temple Block L
Anveil
Whip
6 Registration Memory
Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, providing a
convenient way to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing, with the simple touch
of a single button on the Registration Memory panel. The buttons are conveniently located between the Upper
and Lower keyboards for easy access while playing. Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right
footswitch. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash drive.
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
D.
Storing Registrations
Functions and settings that cannot
be memorized:
Newly created Registrations you make can be stored to
the Registration Memory panel buttons. All Registrations
in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash
drive for future recall.
The following settings cannot be stored to a
Registration Memory number.
Reference pages
• Selecting a Voice (page 25)
• Selecting a Rhythm (page 54)
• Voice Controls and Effects (page 40)
1
2
Create your original Registration.
While holding down the [M.] (Memory)
button in the Registration Memory
section, press the numbered button to
which you wish to save your Registration.
1. While holding down the [M.] button...
2. Press desired numbered button.
13
14
15
16
1
12
D.
When saving of the Registration is started, the
numbered button flashes momentarily, until the
operation is completed.
NOTICE
When recording Registration settings, the square at the
top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds,
indicating that the Registration is currently being saved.
Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being
saved, otherwise the data will be lost.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6
Registration Memory
Registration Memory and Bank
This Electone lets you create up to five Registration Banks A – E, each of which consists of 1 – 16 Registration
Memories. Although preset various Registrations are stored to the Number buttons 1 – 16 of only Bank A by
default, you can replace them with your original Registrations. Your original Registrations can be stored also
to Banks B – E, up to a maximum of 80 Registrations. Executing the Initialize function (page 96) recalls the
preset Registrations of Bank A, and then resets the created Registrations of Banks B – E to their original empty
status.
Pitch (page 180)
MIDI Control settings (page 188)
Mic. Volume (page 185)
Mic. Reverb (page 185)
LCD related settings (page 16)
Wireless LAN settings (page 189)
Score related settings except Next Page (page 123)
The following settings common to all Registration
Memory numbers 1 – 16 and cannot be stored
individually for each number.
Reference page
• Saving Registrations and Other Data to a USB Flash Drive
(page 116)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transpose (page 180)
Attack mode in Organ Flute Voices (page 38)
Registration Shift (page 97)
Auto Fill setting (page 56)
Reverb type (page 45)
User Voices (page 140)
User rhythms (page 157)
User Keyboard Percussion (page 79)
Rhythm Sequences (page 168)
Disable setting (page 94)
Disable mode (page 95)
Next Page setting of score setting (page 123)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
93
Storing Registrations to Another Bank
Storing Registrations to
Another Bank
With the default initial settings and Bank A selected, you
can store your original Registrations to Banks A and B.
Storing the Registrations to Bank B enables selection of
Bank C. Similarly, storing Registrations to Bank C enables
selection of Bank D, and so on, up to a maximum of Bank
E.
1
At the lower right section of the Voice
Display, select the Registration Bank.
NOTE
When you try to store Registrations after changing the Bank, a
confirmation dialog appears. Confirm whether or not you want to
set the current Bank as the destination.
Selecting Registrations
Select a Bank, then press the numbered button that
corresponds to the Registration you wish to select.
• You can also recall Registrations by using the right
footswitch. This function is called “Registration Shift”
(page 97).
You can select the Banks from A (at top) to an empty
Bank next to the last Bank containing data. When
Banks A and B contain Registration data, for
example, you can select Banks A, B, and C (which is
empty). The on/off indication of Bank (A – E) shows
whether the selected Bank contains data or not.
• You can also program the Registrations to change
automatically at specific points within the Rhythm
Sequence. This function is called “Registration
Sequence” (page 170).
Using the [D.] (Disable) button:
Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also
change when you select different Registration
Memory buttons. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button
allows you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment
patterns, tempo, and so on throughout all your
Registration changes, or make your own rhythm
selections if you want to (while the [D.] button is lit).
Disable button
2
Create your original Registration, then
store it to any of the Number buttons 1 –
16. (This corresponds to steps 1 – 2 on
page 93.)
Here, the Registration will be stored to Number
button [1] of Bank B.
7
8
9
10
11
12
D.
The particular settings that do not change when the
[D.] (Disable) button is on depend on the Disable
mode setting. For details on the Disable mode, see
“Selecting Disable mode” (page 95).
NOTE
The Disable function is available even after changing the
Bank.
94
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Saving the Registration Data to USB Flash Drive
Selecting Disable mode:
The Disable mode enables you to select what is to be
disabled when the [D.] (Disable) button is on. There
are two Disable modes: Normal (rhythm menu,
tempo, etc. are disabled) and Tempo (only tempo is
disabled).
1
2
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up
the GLOBAL Page of the Utility
display.
Press the DISABLE MODE
[NORMAL] or [TEMPO] button.
Saving the Registration
Data to USB Flash Drive
The Registration data stored to the Number buttons can
be saved to a USB flash drive connected to the [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal.
Reference page
• Saving Registrations and Other Data to a Unit (page 116)
With the MDR function, up to five Banks of the
Registration Memory stored to internal memory of the
instrument can be saved to a USB flash drive as a single
Song file. Although detailed information about the MDR
is described on chapter 7, these instructions show how to
save the Registration data to a USB flash drive.
2
Insert a USB flash drive into the [USB
TO DEVICE] terminal.
Press the [MDR] button on the panel to
call up the MDR display.
Registration Memory
1
6
Disable mode
NORMAL
When the Electone is set to the Normal mode and the
[D.] (Disable) button is on, the following functions
will not change, even when you change the
Registration Memory number.
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo,
Rhythm volume, Rhythm reverb
• Rhythm reverb time
• Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb,
On/Off status of Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode, Foot Pedal control for M.O.C.
• Second expression pedal control for rhythm tempo
TEMPO
When the Electone is set to the Tempo mode and the
[D.] (Disable) button is on, the rhythm tempo will
not change, even when you change the Registration
Memory number.
3
Select the Song to which you want to
save the Registration data (page 110).
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
95
Initializing Registration Memory
4
5
Press the [UNIT EDIT] button on the
lower right side of the display to call up
the Unit Edit display.
Initializing Registration
Memory
Press the [SAVE] button in the display.
Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory
initializes the Registration Memory. Be careful when
using this operation, since it erases all your existing data.
In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important
data, save it to a USB flash drive.
A message appears, indicating the Registration data
is currently being saved.
When the operation is completed, the message
closes.
Reference page
Reference pages
• Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 118)
• Changing the Song Name (page 114)
The Registration data stored to Banks A – E is now saved
as a Unit to the USB flash drive.
• Factory Set (Initializing the Electone); (page 23)
1
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel
to call up the GLOBAL Page in the
Utility display.
About Banks and Units
The Registration Memory data (16 x up to 5 Banks)
stored to internal memory of the instrument will be
handled as “Unit.” If you want to create more than 80
(=16 x 5 Banks) Registrations, create another Unit to
create more additional Registrations. The Unit can be
edited in the MDR function. See page 117.
Song
Unit 3
Unit 2
Unit 1
Bank E
Bank D
Bank C
Bank B
Registration Memory
Bank A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
Press the INITIALIZE [EXECUTE] button
on the right side in the display.
The message “Are you sure you want to initialize
Registration data?” appears.
Press [INITIALIZE] to actually initialize the data.
When the operation is complete, the Electone will be
restarted.
Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation.
96
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Registration Shift
1 OFF
Registration Shift
The Registration Shift function allows you to change
Registrations without taking your hands from the
keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the
expression pedal, you can “jump” to a specified
Registration or step through the panel Registrations in
sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you
specify.
Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User.
These are set in the Regist Shift display. You can also view
and check the Registration Shift mode in the Voice
Display.
Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When you
select OFF, you cannot change Registrations by using the
Right Footswitch.
2 SHIFT
In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch
selects the Registration Memory presets in their
numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the
function ‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again.
The numbered buttons light up as they are selected.
NOTE
In the Shift mode, the Right Footswitch cannot call up another
Registration Bank.
3 JUMP
1
2
Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the
designated panel Registration.
You can set the Jump “destination” with
buttons in the display or the Data Control dial.
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the
panel.
6
Registration Memory
Setting the Registration Shift
mode in the Regist Shift display
Press the [RIGHT] button at the top right
of the display to call up the RIGHT Page
(REGIST SHIFT display).
Registration number of the destination
4 USER
In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch
selects Registrations according to the order you’ve
specified.
REGIST SHIFT display
1
2
3
4
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
97
Registration Shift
To set the User Registration order:
1
2
3
Select a Bank.
Press the desired numbered button in
the Registration Memory section.
Press the DATA [SET] button in the
display.
The Bank letter and Registration number appear in
the display, indicating that the Registration is
entered.
4
DELETE: For deleting a Registration number at the
current cursor position. To delete the unnecessary
number, move the cursor to a numbered position and
press [DELETE] in the display.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to set the
Registration order.
Registration row
3
4
1
INSERT: For inserting a Registration number just before
the current cursor position.
To perform the operation, first move the cursor to a
numbered position. Then, press the desired Registration
Memory button (the selected button will light), and press
[INSERT] in the display. The new Registration number is
inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to
the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the
new numbers.
Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the
Registration Shift function’s capacity of 400. If the insert
operation exceeds this capacity, a “Data Full” message
appears and the operation cannot be executed.
2
CLEAR: For erasing all current user Registration Shift
settings. After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears
prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [CLEAR] to clear all data. The message “Clear all
data” momentarily appears in the display and returns to
the previous display.
Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
3 SHIFT END
Determines how to end the Registration Shift function.
1 POSITION
These are cursor controls used to move the cursor
(colored orange) along the Registration row in the
display. Entered Registration numbers are shown in
boxes, while the numbers in the row above indicate the
position in the sequence (in other words, the number of
successive presses of the Right Footswitch). Up to 400
steps (Registrations) can be memorized.
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left.
TOP: After the last preset is reached, the first preset is
called up again, starting the sequence over again from the
beginning.
NEXT UNIT: After the last preset is reached, the next
Unit in the Song is called up. This function is available
only when two or more Unit sets are saved to one Song.
Reference page
Moves the cursor one step to the right.
• Saving Two or More Registration Units in a Song (page 116)
Moves the cursor five steps to the right.
NOTE
2 DATA
These are data controls used to enter and delete
Registration numbers in the Registration row.
SET: For initially entering a Registration number to a
blank space in the Registration row, or for replacing a
number at the current cursor position.
To enter a number, press the desired Registration
Memory button (the selected button will light), then
press [SET] in the display. The entered Registration
number will appear in the Registration row. After using
SET to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved
among the numbers.
98
STOP: Selects the last Registration and quits the
operation.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
• When you play the Song using Next Unit function, always press
the [R] (Play) button in the MDR display to start the Song and
activate these functions. The [CUSTOM] (Custom Play) button
(page 105) will not activate the Next Unit function.
• When you use the Next Unit function during Rhythm playback,
Rhythm Sequence and User Rhythm cannot be loaded.
The Shift End mark ( or
) will automatically be put
at the end of the Registrations you entered when Top or
Next Unit is selected as the Shift End.
4 BANK SELECT
Selects the Bank which contains the desired Registration.
Registration Shift
Registration Shift, in “SHIFT” mode:
Confirming the Registration Shift
setting in the Voice Display
You can confirm the Registration Shift mode in the Voice
Display, Page 1.
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call
up the Voice Display.
Current Registration
Next Registration
The current Registration number (left) and the next
number (right) are displayed.
Registration Shift, in “JUMP” mode:
6
The current Registration number (left) and the
destination number (right) will be displayed. You can
change the destination number even in the middle of the
performance by using the
buttons in the
display or the Data Control dial.
Registration Memory
Destination number can be changed.
Registration Shift, in “USER” mode:
The Registration Shift mode is shown at the bottom right
of the display.
Registration Shift, OFF:
The current Registration number is displayed.
Indicates the current position of the Registration Shift.
You can change the Registration by moving the cursor (in
orange) right/left, using the displayed buttons or the Data
Control dial. This is handy if you’ve inadvertently
advanced the shift setting in the middle of your
performance. The user Registration settings cannot be
edited here.
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left and selects
the next Registration.
Moves the cursor one step to the right and selects
the previous Registration.
Moves the cursor five steps to the right and
selects the Registration.
NOTE
The Registration shift display in the Voice display cannot be
interlocked with the Registration sequence.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
99
Unifying Values/Settings of a Specific Parameter
Unifying Values/Settings
of a Specific Parameter
In the Voice Display, Page 2, you can conveniently unify
the values or settings of a specific parameter used in the
current Registration Bank at one time. This is useful
when you are changing, for example, the Voice Brilliance
setting for the Upper Keyboard and want the same setting
to be applied to all Registrations in the Bank.
3
Select the Bank, then press the
PARAMETER button (indicates the
currently selected parameter) in the
display to select the desired parameter
for changing.
The Parameter Select pop-up menu appears, letting
you select the desired parameter.
Available parameters
• Reverb
• Rhythm Reverb
• Volume
• Panning
• Brilliance
Parameter
• Sustain
1
2
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on
the panel.
Press the [2] button at the top right of
the display to select Page 2.
Part
Select the parameter and part in the
Parameter Select pop-up menu.
After selecting the desired parameter, the pop-up
menu automatically closes.
The amount of the selected parameter for each
Registration is shown in the display.
Parameter value for each Registration
Selected parameter
NOTE
A parameter can be unified only within the current Bank.
100
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Unifying Values/Settings of a Specific Parameter
4
Select the targeted Registration
numbers and turn them on.
Parameters in Registrations set to ON will be changed.
Unifying the currently highlighted
parameter’s value:
Pressing [SET] unifies the currently highlighted
parameter’s values to the one in the currently selected
Registration (at the cursor position). A message appears
prompting you to confirm the operation.
Press the targeted Registration in the display and
turn it on with the SETTINGS buttons: ALL ON,
ALL OFF, ON, OFF, and SELECT.
6
ALL OFF: Cancels all Registration memory
numbers.
ON: Sets the currently selected Registration
memory number to “ON.”
OFF: Sets the currently selected Registration
memory number to “OFF.”
SELECT: Turns on the Registration memory
numbers that contain the same Voice as the one
which is currently set in the Registration at the
cursor position.
The targeted Registration numbers are underlined.
5
Offsetting the currently highlighted
parameter’s value:
Pressing the [+]/[-] buttons in the display or using the
Data Control dial offsets the currently highlighted
parameter’s value. If you select Pan as the parameter, the
[L][R] buttons are shown instead of [+]/[-].
Registration Memory
ALL ON: Selects all Registration memory numbers.
To continue the operation, select [UNIFY]. Select
[CANCEL] to abort the operation.
If you change the value, and if parameter values for some
Registration memory number reach the maximum or
minimum, the following message appears.
Unifies the currently turned-on
parameter’s values.
You unify the relevant parameter values in each
Registration memory number or offset them. Keep
in mind that you cannot restore the original data
once you change the parameter’s value.
In this case, pressing [OK] continues the operation,
ignoring those parameters at maximum or minimum
value. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
101
Copying Registrations
Copying Registrations
In the Voice Display, Page 3, you can copy a Registration
stored to a specific Registration Memory number to
another number on a specific section basis (Voices,
rhythm, keyboard percussion). (The function is called
Regist Section Copy.) This is useful, for example, when
you want the upper keyboard Voice in Registration
number 4 to be the same as in Registration number 1.
1
2
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on
the panel to call up the Voice Display.
Press the [3] button at the top right of
the display to call up Page 3.
Registration number
4
Press the Voice Section button at the
lower right of “COPY FROM” to select
the Voice Section as source.
To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button.
3
Press the Registration number button at
the lower left of “COPY FROM.”
To abort the operation press the [CLOSE] button.
Section
102
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Copying Registrations
5
In the same way, select the COPY TO
Registration number and Regist
Section.
The COPY TO Regist Section depends on the Regist
Section selected for COPY FROM.
NOTE
If you change the source Regist Section after changing the
destination Regist Section the destination may
automatically change to the section selected as the source
Regist Section.
6
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the
SECTION COPY area in the display.
To copy a Bank:
You can also copy Registration data by Bank. To do this,
select the source Bank in the COPY FROM area, select
the destination Bank in the COPY TO area, then press
the [EXECUTE] button at the right bottom in the display.
To delete the current Bank:
Press the [DELETE] button in the display.
NOTE
Data of Banks that follow the deleted Bank will be moved up to
the previous Bank respectively. For example, deleting the Bank
A will move the data of Bank B to Bank A, Bank C to Bank B,
Bank D to Bank C, and Bank E to Bank D.
The following display appears, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
6
Registration Memory
7
Press the [COPY] button in the display
to copy the Registration and a message
momentarily appears in the display
indicating that the Registration has
been copied.
Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
103
7 Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The Music Data Recorder (MDR) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone that lets you
record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash drive. Before using a USB flash drive,
carefully read “Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” section on page 108.
Calling Up the MDR Display
Using the MDR Display
Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the MDR
display. All operations related to the MDR, such as
recording and playing your performances, can be done in
the MDR display.
The MDR display consists of two display pages: the
SONG Page and the TOOLS Page. In the SONG Page,
you can select a Song, then play it back or record it. The
TOOLS Page has a variety of Song utility operations, such
as copy, delete, rename, etc.
Pressing the [SONG] or [TOOLS] button at the top right
of the display switches between the SONG Page and the
TOOLS Page.
SONG Page
1
8
2
3 5
)
9
TOOLS Page
47
!
5
67
NOTE
The USB flash drives (USB 01, USB 02...) are shown in random
order in the display.
Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while
the MDR display is open exits from the MDR display. If
you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the
[MDR] button again to recall the MDR display.
All the instructions in this chapter are related to the MDR
display. To call up the MDR functions and the MDR
display, press the [MDR] button.
104
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
#
$
%
^
&
@
*
Using the MDR Display
1 Current USB Flash Drive/Folder
) CUSTOM PLAY
Displays the currently selected USB flash drive and
folder(s). The left side of the indication (before “:/”)
shows the particular USB flash drive and the right side
shows the path with the currently selected folder name at
the end. For example, “USB 01:/Folder1/” indicates that
the folder named “Folder1” contained in the USB flash
drive is selected.
Records/plays back only the performance data of the
selected Songs. Using this button does not recall the
Registration data.
! SCORE
Displays the selected Song’s score.
Reference page
• Displaying the Score (page 122)
2 USB Flash Drive/Folder/Song List
Displays the USB flash drive, folders or Songs. Up to 120
folders can be displayed (5 folders at once).
3 Scroll buttons
If the USB flash drive/folder/Song list contains more than
5 USB flash drives/folders/Songs, you can scroll through
the display with these buttons.
@ UNIT EDIT
Displays the Unit Edit display for the selected Song’s
Registration data.
Reference pages
• Saving Registrations and Other Data to a Unit (page 116)
• Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 118)
# CREATE FOLDER
4 SETTINGS
Displays/changes the settings for the currently selected
Song.
5 UP
Selects the higher layer folder or USB flash drive. For
example, when “USB 01:/Folder1/” (Folder1 in the USB
flash drive) is selected, pressing the [UP] button selects
“USB 01:/” (USB flash drive).
$ CHANGE NAME
Changes the folder/Song name.
Reference page
• Changing the Song Name (page 114)
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Reference page
• About the [SETTINGS] button (page 110)
Creates a new folder in the USB flash drive/folder/Song
list. Up to 120 folders can exist in one USB flash drive or
within a single upper folder. Pressing this button calls up
the New Folder display in which you can enter the
desired name. Enter the name and press the [OK] button
to create a new folder. The method for entering a folder
name is the same as that of the Song name. See page 114.
6 IN
Selects the next lower (or deeper) layer folder or USB
flash drive. For example, when “USB 01:/ Folder1/”
(Folder1 in the USB flash drive) is selected, pressing the
[IN] button selects “USB 01:/Folder1/SONG/” (the
SONG folder contained in Folder1 of the USB flash
drive).
% COPY
NOTE
Deletes the selected folder/Song.
You can execute the same operation also by pressing the
currently selected folder.
7 SEARCH
Search for the folder/Song in the selected USB flash drive.
Reference page
• Searching for a Song (page 110)
8 Elapsed time
Displays the elapsed time when recording/playing back a
Song (up to 59 min. 59 sec.).
9 Song control
Copies the selected USB flash drive/folder/Song.
Reference page
• Song copy (page 124)
^ DELETE
Reference page
• Song delete (page 126)
& CONVERT
Converts the selected Song for use on another Electone or
other instruments, or converts Songs recorded on
another Electone for use on this Electone. Songs can be
converted to XG format or EL format, and can be
converted from EL format.
Reference pages
• Converting to XG (page 127)
• Converting to EL format (page 128)
• Converting from EL format (page 129)
Controls Song recording, playback, etc.
Reference pages
• Recording your performance (page 112)
• Playing Back a Song (page 119)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
105
Using the MDR Display
* INFORMATION
Displays available memory when USB flash drive is
selected and displays information such as the title and
composer when a Song is selected. The information to be
displayed depends on the Songs.
Song icons
These icons are shown when you select a USB flash drive,
folder, and Song.
Reference pages
• Checking the remaining memory (page 129)
• About Protected Songs (page 119)
Indicates a USB flash drive. This icon is displayed
in the USB flash drive/folder list.
Indicates a folder.
If USB flash drive cannot be found:
1
Press the
(UP) button until the
button is grayed out.
The USB flash drive list will be displayed. If there are
more than five media selections, scroll through the
display with the Scroll buttons (page 105) to display
the desired USB flash drive.
Indicates that write-protect or copy-protect is
effective for the USB flash drive.
Indicates that performance data is contained in
the Song.
Indicates an XG-compatible Song.
Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 119
for details.
If Songs cannot be found:
1
2
Check the current USB flash drive/folder
(page 105).
If the desired Song is stored in the
currently displayed folder, use the Scroll
buttons (page 105) to display the Song.
If the desired Song is stored in a
different folder, use the
(UP) and
(IN) buttons to select the folder
in which the desired Song is stored.
If you are not sure of the folder in which the desired
Song is stored, search a Song by using SEARCH
function (page 110).
NOTE
If the message “Registration data will be initialized” is displayed
when you select a folder, press the [INITIALIZE] button. (The
USB flash drive is not initialized.) The message will appear when
recalling a Protected Song.
106
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 119 for
details.
Using the MDR Display
USB flash drive contents: Folders, Songs, and Files
Folders:
A folder is a storage location in the USB flash drive, used to organize multiple Songs in groups. If you’ve saved many
Songs to a USB flash drive, it may be difficult to find the desired Song quickly. Organizing your Songs in folders, with
similar Songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier to find the Songs you
want.
Song
1
Song
2
Song
3
Song
4
Song
5
Song
6
Song 1
Folder A
Song 4
Creating
folders
Song
Song
Song
USB flash drive
2 3
5 6
Folder B
7
USB flash drive
Songs:
Files:
A file is an element of data in a Song. For example, a single Song consists of various files, such as Registration files
and performance files. The following files are created with the MDR (The extension will not appear in the Electone
display. They will, however, be displayed on a computer.)
Files in the Song
File
Explanation
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
A Song is the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to USB flash drive. A single Song can contain a variety of
data, including the recorded performance, Registrations, and so on.
Extension
Performance data
This file contains performance data, played on the keyboards and pedals of the Electone.
.mid
Registration data
This file contains Registration settings, User Voices, User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences.
.b00
XG-converted data
This file contains XG Song data, for which Electone performance data is converted to XGcompatible format.
.mid
In addition, one file (extension: .nam) is automatically created in each folder for organization/maintenance of the
folder contents. It does not appear on the Electone display.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
107
Using the MDR Display
Precautions when using the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal
This instrument is equipped with the three [USB TO
DEVICE] terminals as follows:
• Two [USB TO DEVICE] terminals at the right front of
the keyboard.
• One [USB TO DEVICE] terminal at the rear side of the
instrument.
• When connecting then disconnecting the USB flash drive
(and vice versa), make sure to wait more than 6 seconds
between the two operations.
• When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length
is less than 3 meters.
NOTE
When you use a USB device other than a USB flash drive,
connect it to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal at the rear side of
the instrument.
Using USB flash drives
NOTE
For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to
the owner’s manual of the USB device.
Compatible USB devices
• USB flash drive
• USB wireless LAN adaptor
Maximum number of USB flash drives
allowed
Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or
mouse cannot be used.
Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this
instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading
from the USB device may differ depending on the type of
data or the status of the instrument.
The instrument does not necessarily support all
commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot
guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase.
Before purchasing a USB device for use with this
instrument, please visit the following web page:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Up to three USB flash drives can be connected to the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
NOTE
Turning off the instrument
The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5V/
500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this,
since this can cause damage to the instrument itself.
When turning off the instrument, make sure that the
instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by
playback/recording or file management (such as during
Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do
so may corrupt the device and the data.
Connecting USB device
When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the
device is appropriate and that it is connected in the
proper direction.
NOTICE
• Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB flash drive
while executing playback/recording and file management
operations (such as Save, Copy, Delete and Format), or
when accessing the USB flash drive. Failure to observe
this may result in “freezing” of the operation of the
instrument or corruption of the USB flash drive and the
data.
108
By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive, you
can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as
well as read data from the connected device.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Formatting USB flash drive
You should format the USB flash drive only with this
instrument (page 109). A USB flash drive formatted on
another device may not operate properly.
NOTICE
The format operation overwrites any previously existing
data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting
does not contain important data. Proceed with caution,
especially when connecting multiple USB flash drive.
Formatting a USB Flash Drive
Formatting a USB Flash
Drive
If you find that you are unable to use a new, blank USB
flash drive or an old one that has been used with other
devices, you may need to format it.
Formatting erases all the data in the USB flash drive and
makes it ready to record. The data erased by formatting
will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the USB
flash drive contains any important data you wish to keep
before executing the operation. Proceed with caution,
especially when connecting multiple USB storage media.
5
Press the [FORMAT] button in the
display.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the
operation. Select [FORMAT] to format the USB
flash drive, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
NOTICE
Do not remove the USB flash drive while formatting.
NOTE
Before purchasing a USB flash drive, please consult your
Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice,
or see the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
1
3
4
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
2
7
Connect the USB flash drive to the [USB
TO DEVICE] terminal.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top
right of the display to call up the TOOLS
Page.
Press the
(UP) button repeatedly
if necessary until the button is grayed
out.
Select the desired USB flash drive you
want to format.
The indications USB 01, USB 02, etc. will be
displayed depending on the number of the
connected USB flash drives.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
109
Selecting a Song
Selecting a Song
In the MDR display, you can select a blank Song to which
you want to record your performance or save the
Registration settings, or you can select a desired Song for
playback.
In the MDR display, Songs in the currently selected USB
flash drives are displayed.
First call up the desired USB flash drive (and folder, if
necessary) in the display, then select the desired Song.
1
About the [SETTINGS] button
Pressing the
(SETTINGS) button calls up a
display of the currently selected Song, letting you confirm
the tempo and parts that are played when playing the Song.
Check the currently selected USB flash
drive at the top of the display.
Confirm that the desired USB flash drive is
displayed at the top of the display.
Currently selected USB flash drive/folder
When playing back the Song (by pressing the [R] (Play)
button), only those parts that are set to “PLAY” in the
display actually play at the indicated tempo (over a range of
50% to 200% of the original tempo when recording). If the
Song contains no performance data, all parts are set to
“OFF.” Pressing the [PART SAVE] button saves each part
playback setting (the tempo is not saved).
Reference pages
• Playing back the selected part(s) (page 120)
• Changing the tempo (page 121)
NOTICE
2
Searching for a Song
Do not remove the USB flash drive while it is being
accessed by the instrument. (If you are using a USB
flash drive which has a lamp, the lamp will flash when
the instrument is accessing the USB flash drive.)
Search for a desired Song by using the Search function.
For information on selecting the desired USB flash
drive, see page 106.
1
Press desired Song button in the
display.
2
Referring to the Song name and icons, select the
desired Song. The selected Song button is
highlighted in orange.
Insert the USB flash drive containing
the desired folder/Song.
Select the USB flash drive containing
the folder/Song.
Song containing data
Blank Song (containing no data)
Reference pages
• Changing the Song Name (page 114)
• Song icons (page 106)
110
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
NOTE
Regardless of the current path, the Search operation will
be applied to the entire contents of the USB flash drive.
Selecting a Song
3
Press the [SEARCH] button in the
display.
6
Press the [OK] button.
The search will begin, and the detected folder/Song
name will be shown on the display.
NOTE
Previous searched data can be shown on the display.
However, the data does not appear if you’ve turned off the
power, removed the USB flash drive or saved the Song
after performing the search operation.
4
Press the [KEYWORD] button.
To cancel the Search operation, press the
[INTERRUPT] button.
7
Confirm the detected folder/Song name.
Detected folder/
Song list
Detected number
Displayed data number
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Previous key word
8
Press the desired folder/Song.
The display will automatically exit from the
SEARCH display and the selected folder/Song
appears.
If nothing is detected, try the search again by using
another name (see step 4 above).
5
Enter the folder/Song name for
searching.
If necessary, press the [DELETE] button so that the
previous key word can be deleted, then enter the
new key word. (See page 114 for instructions on
changing the Song name.)
NOTE
• This function does not distinguish between capital and
lowercase letters.
• When searching for XG Songs, entering the extension
“.mid” is unnecessary.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
111
Recording
Recording
4
An hourglass icon appears at the bottom left of the
display, indicating that Registration data is currently
being read.
Recording your performance
NOTE
Regardless of the currently selected Unit number, the
recording operation will save data other than your
performance to the first Unit of the Song. This is why
pressing the [I] (Record) button will call up the dialog to
confirm whether OK or not to save data to the first Unit
when the Registration Unit other than the first Unit is
loaded. In this situation, pressing [OK] will go to the
Recording Standby mode while pressing [CANCEL] will
exit from the Recording mode.
Set the desired Registrations on the Electone. Make all
the Electone settings necessary for the Song you will
record. This means entering the all Registrations you will
need for the entire performance in the Registration
Memory. Make sure also to select the Registration that
you will use at the beginning of the Song.
NOTICE
Never attempt to remove the USB flash drive or turn the
power off during recording, reading or playback.
1
2
Insert a USB flash drive to the [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal.
5
6
Select a blank Song for recording your
performance.
Press the [SONG] button at the top right
of the display to call up the SONG Page,
then select the [I] (Record) button.
The following display appears, indicating that you
can record your performance.
After the hourglass disappears, begin
playing.
When you finish playing, press the
[J] (Stop) button in the display.
The recording is finished and the LCD returns to the
MDR display. The Song to which your performance
is recorded is automatically named “SONG_XXX”
(XXX indicates Song number). You can change the
Song name as desired. (For details, see page 114.)
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
If you want to overwrite an existing Song already
containing performance data, you will need to delete
it beforehand.
3
Press the [R] (Play) button.
NOTICE
Do not remove the USB flash drive from the Electone
while data is being recorded (while the hourglass icon
or other message is shown).
Re-recording (Retry)
If you make a mistake during recording, you can rerecord the Song from the beginning.
1
Press the [I] (Record) button while the
Song is still running.
This automatically stops recording and returns you
to the starting point of the Song.
NOTE
If a message appears indicating there is not enough free
space in USB flash drive, press the [CANCEL] button, then
delete any unnecessary Songs if possible or insert new
USB flash drive. To continue recording your performance
on USB flash drive that does not have enough space,
press the [CONTINUE] button.
112
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Recording
2
The following setting lets you record only Lower
Keyboard and Pedalboard parts.
Press the [R] (Play) or [CUSTOM PLAY]
button to begin rerecording the Song.
Re-recording starts from the beginning of the Song
and replaces the previously recorded performance
with the newly recorded performance.
NOTE
Pressing the [J] (Stop) button cancels the re-recording
and records the previous performance. If you want to rerecord the performance only using the same Registration,
select the Song which you want to re-record and delete the
performance data only, and then record the performance.
NOTE
You should also set the Control button to “REC,” in order to
record Registration changes and expression pedal
operation.
Recording specified parts only
NOTE
3
4
2
5
Each pressing of a part button switches the status:
PLAY, OFF, and REC.
6
NOTE
When you record the Keyboard Percussion, make sure that
the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button is set to on.
Select the parts for recording.
Set the next parts you want to record (in this case,
the Upper part) to “REC.”
Also set the part already recorded (in this case
Lower and Pedal parts) to “PLAY,” so you can hear
the previously recorded parts as you record new
ones.
PLAY: Playback the parts that have been recorded.
OFF: Recording or playback is not active.
REC: Records the part.
If you set the Upper part to “REC,” the performance
on the Upper Keyboard (including Lead Voice 1
Voices) is recorded. Setting Lead to “REC,” however,
records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set
both Upper and Lead to “REC” at the same time;
neither can the Lower and Keyboard Percussion
parts be recorded at the same time.
Press the [I] (Record) button to set up
recording of the next part — Upper part
in this case.
7
A message appears prompting confirmation of
operation. Select [OVERWRITE] to overwrite and
the Rec Standby display appears.
Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 112 to call up
the Rec Standby display.
Select the parts for recording.
Press the [J] (Stop) button when you
are finished with your performance to
stop recording.
Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your
performance.
The Lead Voice 2 and the Keyboard Percussion 2 cannot be
recorded to each part separately.
1
Press the [R] (Play) button, and start
playing after the hourglass icon
disappears.
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
You can also record the parts of your performance
independently. This function lets you record Keyboard
Percussion and performance control data, such as
Registration changes and expression pedal operation,
separately from the other parts of the Song.
Even Keyboard Percussion 1 and Lead Voice 1 Voices can
be recorded separately, though, the Lead Voice 2 Voices
will be included in the performance data of the Upper
Keyboard. The following instruction is an example: First,
record the chords and bass to the Song using the Lower
and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the
Upper Keyboard.
7
Change the playback tempo for the
selected part.
The playback tempo can be set over a range of 50%
to 200% of the original.
The original recorded tempo is 100%; values less
than 100% result in a slower tempo while values
greater than 100% result in a faster tempo.
NOTE
Use the TEMPO [RESET] button in the display to reset the
tempo to its original value (100%).
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
113
Changing the Song Name
8
Press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button to
start recording of the part selected in
step 6 (Upper part).
Playback of the previously recorded parts starts
immediately.
The [CUSTOM PLAY] button is used here to record
only the parts that have been selected for recording,
and plays back only those parts that have been
selected for playback. While you listen to the parts
being played back, start playing the melody on the
Upper Keyboard.
When the end of the recorded performance is
reached, playback is automatically stopped. The
length of a subsequently recorded part cannot
exceed the length of the previously recorded parts.
Punch-in recording
Changing the Song Name
You can name the Song, such as giving it a title or
indicating the date on which it was recorded. However,
Song names of EL-series Electones, such as the EL-900,
cannot be changed.
NOTE
When you change the name of an XG Song, the extension (.mid)
cannot be changed.
1
Select the Song whose name you want
to change.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
3
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top
right of the display to call up the TOOLS
Page.
Press the [CHANGE NAME] button.
The following display appears.
This lets you re-record a specific phrase or section which
you don’t want to use, either that of a specific part(s) or
all parts.
NOTE
This function is best used when the phrase to be re-recorded
has definite beginning and end points, with slight pauses before
and after.
1
Select the Song which contains the
phrase you want to change.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
3
4
Press the [R] (Play) button to start
playback of the Song.
Press the [K] (Pause) button at the
point you want to execute punch-in
recording.
Press the [I] (Record) button.
The Recording display appears, indicating that the
Music Data Recorder is ready to record.
5
6
7
114
Set the parts which you want to change
to “REC” status and other parts to
“PLAY.”
Press the [R] (Play) button to start
punch-in recording. Play the new
phrase, as you want it to be changed.
Press the [J] (Stop) button to quit the
punch-in recording as soon as you
reach the end of the phrase.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
4
Move the cursor to the desired point by
using the [L] [R] buttons in the display
or the Data Control dial.
Cursor
Changing the Song Name
5
Select the desired character type:
alphabet, upper or lowercase, or
symbol.
To convert into kanji (Japanese
language):
This applies only if you are using the
button in Japanese.
1
NOTE
If you select Japanese as the Language in the Utility
display (page 16), you can also select Japanese language
characters (hiragana and kanji, normal size katakana, half
size katakana, full size alphabet, and full size symbols).
6
NOTE
An XG Song name can contain up to 46 characters.
• The converted area can be cleared at once by
pressing the
(cancel) button.
After finished, select [OK] to actually
enter the name.
The LCD will return to the TOOLS Page display.
2
To actually enter the change, press the
[OK] button or enter the next character.
To enter the hiragana character itself
(without converting it), press the
(delete) button.
A “name is not available” message may appear when
you press the [OK] button to finish entering the
name. If this message appears, the name is invalid
and you should enter another name.
NOTE
To delete an entered character:
1
Move the cursor to the character you
want to delete.
Cursor
2
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
When the input “Hiragana” characters
are shown in the reverse display
(highlighted), press the
(kanjiconversion) button once or several
times to convert to the characters into
the appropriate kanji.
• The reversed area can be changed by the [L] [R]
buttons in the display or the Data Control dial.
Select the desired character for entry.
A Song name can contain up to 50 characters.
(Kana-Kan)
Songs are ordered in the following sequence: symbol,
number, alphabet, hiragana, kanji, other symbols. Names
with an asterisk (*) at the top are exceptions to this rule.
The following names cannot be used. (“xx” indicates
numbers.)
MDR_xx.EVT
SONG_xxx
MDR_xx.MID
MDR_xxx.TMP
MDR_xx.Bxx
REG_xxx.TMP
MDR_xx.Vxx
ELS_SONG.TMP
SONG.NAM
SONG_xxx.C02
ELS_SONG.NAM TMP
MDR_xxx.MID
TMP.E02
REG_xxx.B00
Press the [DELETE] button at the
bottom right in the display.
The character is deleted.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
115
Saving Registrations and Other Data to a Unit
Saving Registrations and
Other Data to a Unit
You can also record Registration Memory data and other
created data without recording a performance, as listed
below. The data will be saved to a Unit (page 96) of the
selected Song.
2
Press the [UNIT EDIT] button at the right
lower section in the display to call up
the Unit Edit display.
At the left side in the display, the Registration Unit
list of the current Song is shown, such as “UNIT 1”
and “UNIT 2.”
3
• Registration Memory related data (including the
Registration Shift settings)
Press the blank button at the lowest
position of the Registration Unit list.
• User Voice data
• Keyboard Percussion data
• User Rhythm data
• Rhythm Sequence data
1
Select the destination (blank Song) to
which the created Registration Memory
data and other data will be saved.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
3
Press the [UNIT EDIT] button at the
lower right section in the display to call
up the Unit Edit display.
Creating two or more
Registration Units in a Song
When you want to use various Registrations exceeding
five Registration Banks (one Unit), you should save
additional Registration Units to a Song.
Reference pages
• Next Unit (page 98)
• Programming a Registration Sequence (page 170)
Select the destination Song which
includes Registration data.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
116
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Press the [SAVE] button.
This operation will add a new Unit next to the
lowest Unit.
NOTE
The above operation will simply create a new Unit which
will not be called up via Song playback, etc. To call up the
newly created Unit, set the order of the Registration Unit
(page 117), then make the Next Unit settings of
Registration Shift (page 97) and Registration Sequence
(page 170). Note that changing the Unit via the Next Unit
may result in no sound from the Electone for a few
seconds when User Voice data differ between the current
Unit and the next Unit.
Make sure that all data types you want
to load are selected, then press the
[SAVE] button, followed by the [CLOSE]
button in the display.
A message appears on the display, indicating the
data is currently being saved.
After the message disappears, press the [CLOSE]
button to return to the SONG page, then “SONG
XXX” (XXX: number) is assigned as Song name to
the destination Song.
1
4
Overwriting Registration data to
a Unit
This operation lets you replace just the Registration Unit
without changing the performance data in already
recorded Song data.
1
Select a Song containing the
performance data.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
Press the [UNIT EDIT] button in the
display to call up the Unit Edit display.
The Registration Unit list is shown.
3
Select the Registration Unit you wish to
overwrite.
Saving Registrations and Other Data to a Unit
4
Press the [SAVE] button.
3
A message appears, prompting confirmation of
overwriting the Registration Unit. Press
[OVERWRITE] to overwrite (replace), or press
[CANCEL] to abort the operation.
Change the order of the Registration
Units.
From the Registration Unit list at the left end in the
display, select the desired Unit then use the MOVE
buttons to move the order of the selected Unit.
NOTE
Also with the following operations, only Registrations and other
data (excepting performance data) can be recorded.
4
1. Select the desired Song number to which you want to record.
2. Press the [I] (Record) button to set recording to standby.
1
3. Press the [R] (Play) button, then press the [J] (Stop) button
without playing the keyboard.
5
6
7
Changing the order of the
Registration Units
2
3
1 Registration Unit list
NOTE
The first Unit (located at the top) will be called up first after Song
playback starts.
1
From the SONG page, select a Song
which contains two or more
Registration Units.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
Press the [UNIT EDIT] button in the
display to call up the Unit Edit display.
Lists the Registration Units included in the current Song.
When the current Song contains five or more
Registration Units, the scroll button
can be used
to scroll through the Registration Unit list. The selected
Unit is highlighted in orange.
2 MOVE buttons
Moves the Registration Unit selected at 1 up or down
one by one.
3 DATA TO BE LOADED
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
To call up another Registration Unit from the
Registration Shift (page 97) and Registration Sequence
(page 170) as the Next Unit, you should change the order
of the Registration Units as desired on the Unit Edit
display.
When loading the Registration Unit selected at 1, use
these buttons to select only the desired data. For more
information, see page 118.
4 LOAD
Loads the Registration Unit selected at 1 according to
the settings of 3.
5 SAVE
Saves the Registration Memory data to the Registration
Unit selected at 1.
6 COPY
Creates the copy of the Registration Unit selected at 1,
and then locates the copied Unit at the bottom of the
Registration Unit list (1).
7 DELETE
Deletes the Registration Unit selected at 1.
4
Press the [CLOSE] button at the top
right in the display to close the Unit Edit
display.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
117
Recalling Recorded Registrations
NOTE
Recalling Recorded
Registrations
Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to Song numbers
can be easily loaded back to the Electone by the following
procedure. The MDR independently recalls the following
five types of data:
When you load the Registration data by using the Next
Unit function, all data will be loaded no matter which
buttons you select here.
5
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the
operation. Press the [LOAD] button to load the
Registration data.
Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation.
• REGIST
NOTE
• USER VOICE
If you load a Registration while a rhythm is playing,
sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration data
cannot be loaded.
• K.B.P.
• USER RHYTHM
• SEQUENCE
You can select and recall the desired data independently.
1
Insert the USB flash drive and select the
Song you want to load back to the
Electone.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
3
4
118
Press [UNIT EDIT] button in the display
to call up the Unit Edit display.
Select the Unit you want to load to the
Electone.
Using the five “DATA TO BE LOADED”
buttons, select the desired data you
want to load.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Press the [LOAD] button.
6
Exit from the Unit Edit display by
pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top
right of the display.
When you select the Protected Song, the buttons
(DATA TO BE LOADED) may be unavailable
(grayed out). For example, combining a part of one
Protected Song with another Protected Song is not
allowed.
Playing Back a Song
About Protected Songs
If you buy or download Song data, it may be
protected so that you cannot delete or copy, in order
to prevent accidental erasure or protect copyright.
These are called Protected Songs. Protected Songs
can be saved to a USB flash drive confirmed by
Yamaha. A Protected Song can be played back in the
same way as Songs you’ve created, but it cannot be
converted to XG format or EL format. It is not
possible to edit the Registration data in the Protected
Song, nor can the performance data be overwritten. If
you want to edit a Protected Song, first copy it within
one USB flash drive/folder, then edit the copy. (You
cannot copy to another USB flash drive/folder.) The
copied Song (called “Protected Edit Song”) is
available only when the original Song (called
“Protected Original Song”) exists in the same folder.
Be careful not to delete the Protected Original Song.
Playing Back a Song
This section describes how to play back a Song recorded
with the MDR and the commercially available Song data
which can be played back with the MDR
1
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
When a Song contains both Registration data
and performance data:
Starting playback of such a Song will load only
Registration data (an hourglass icon appears), and
then begin actual playback of the performance data.
Folder
Protected
Edit Song
When the Song contains only the
performance data:
Copy
Starting playback of such a Song will start playback
of the performance data immediately.
You can edit this Song,
only when it is in the folder
that contains a Protected
Original Song.
NOTICE
To move the Protected Song in a USB flash drive with a
computer, you’ll need to use the Musicsoft Downloader
application. If you move the Song without Musicsoft
Downloader, the Song cannot be played back. Musicsoft
Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet
address: http://download.yamaha.com/
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
Depending on the Song, no note icon is shown by
the file name, indicating that only Registration data
is included and there is no performance data.
Starting playback of such a Song will load only
Registration data (an hourglass icon appears), and
then return operation to the SONG page.
When you want to edit a Protected Song, first initialize
the Registration Memory, then select the desired Song.
If you have not initialized the Registration first, the
edited Song may not be saved.
You cannot edit
this Song
Press the [R] (Play) button in the
display to start playback.
When the Song contains only the Registration
data (without performance data):
NOTICE
Protected
Original Song
Select the Song to be played back.
Reference page
• Changing the order of the Registration Units (page 117)
3
When you want to stop playback, press
the [J] (Stop) button on the display.
Although playback will stop automatically as soon as
playback position reaches to the end of the Song
data, you can stop playback at the middle of the
performance data by pressing the [J] (Stop) button
on the display.
NOTE
• When two or more Units are included in the current Song,
starting playback will load the Registration Unit shown at
the top in the Unit Edit display.
• Registration data is generally not included in most Song
data, such as commercially available XG Songs created
on instruments other than the Electone.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
119
Playing Back a Song
Custom Play
To play back the selected part(s) of XGcompatible Song data:
If you want to play back a Song without resetting the
Registrations, press the [CUSTOM PLAY] button
instead of the [R] (Play) button. This displays the
Song time and starts playback immediately.
Press the Part [XG] button while XG-compatible Song
data is being played back.
The following XG PART SETUP display appears.
Reference page
• Converting to XG (page 127)
When you play a Song using the Next Unit function,
always press the [R] (Play) button to start the Song,
not the [CUSTOM PLAY] button.
Playing back the selected part(s)
You can also play back selected parts of your recorded
performance, while other parts are temporarily turned
off. This function is especially useful for playing a single
part, such as the melody, over previously recorded
accompaniment parts.
Press the appropriate channel buttons (e.g., the [CH1]
button) to set each channel to playback or mute. Each
pressing of a button switches the status: PLAY and OFF.
Set a part to [PLAY] if you want it to play back and [OFF]
if you do not.
The [ALL] button enables you to switch all channels to
PLAY/OFF at once.
To set each channel’s volume use the sliders. Each
channel’s volume can be adjusted between 0 and 100.
The [ALL] slider adjusts the overall volume.
Fast forward, Rewind and Pause
To play back the selected part(s):
During playback or in the Settings display, press each part
button to turn the part you want to playback to “PLAY”
and the part you want to mute to “OFF.” Each pressing of
a part button switches the status between PLAY and OFF.
Pressing the [PART SAVE] button saves each part’s
playback status.
Reference page
• About the [SETTINGS] button (page 110)
Fast forward and Rewind:
During playback, press the [RR] (Fast forward) button
or [LL] (Rewind) button and hold it down until the
time reaches the desired position.
Even when the button is released, playback is paused. To
resume playback from the point you’ve advanced or
reversed to, press the [R] (Play) button or [CUSTOM
PLAY] button.
Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the Song or
Songs, press the [K] (Pause) button.
To resume playback from the point at which the Song was
paused, press the [R] (Play) button or [CUSTOM PLAY]
button.
120
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Playing Back a Song
Changing the tempo
You can change the tempo of the Song as the Song is
playing in the MDR display, either while the Song is
stopped or while it is playing.
NOTE
Only for Song data (recording of your performance) indicated
with the e mark can the tempo be changed during playback.
To change the tempo:
Use the TEMPO
buttons in the display or the
Data Control dial to change the tempo. (The TEMPO
buttons on the panel cannot be used to change the tempo
for the Music Data Recorder.) The range is 50 – 200%.
The original recorded tempo is 100% and values less than
100% indicate slower tempo; values greater than 100%
indicate faster tempo.
Repeat playback
This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all
Songs in a folder or only one specific Song.
1
Select the Song you wish to play back.
If you wish to play back all Songs in a folder, select
the first Song that will be played back. For details on
selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
3
Press the [SONG] button at the top right
of the display to call up the SONG Page.
Press the
(SETTINGS) button on
the panel to call up the Settings display.
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
To reset the changed tempo:
Use the TEMPO [RESET] button in the display to reset
the tempo to its original value (100%).
4
Press the REPEAT button to select the
repeat mode.
Each press of the button switches among the modes.
REPEAT button
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
121
Displaying the Score
SINGLE
Repeats the currently selected Song indefinitely.
ALL
Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder in
order.
5
6
Displaying the Score
RANDOM
Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder
randomly.
The MDR display can display music notation (score) of
the performance data recorded to USB flash drive. You
can change the size and the number of staffs to be
displayed.
While a Song is being played back, the cursor moves
according to the performance and the pages are
automatically turned.
OFF
Cancels repeat playback.
1
Exit from the Settings display by
pressing the
(FINISH) button at
the top right of the display.
Select the Song containing performance
data.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
Press the [SCORE] button in the display.
The currently selected Song score will be displayed.
Press the [R] (Play) button in the SONG
Page to begin playback.
NOTE
Scores for Protected Songs cannot be displayed,
excepting those Songs that specifically allow score
display.
3
Press the [R] (Play) button in the
display to start playing back the Song.
As the Song plays back, the cursor moves
accordingly and the page is automatically turned at
the appropriate point.
In this condition, pressing the [I] (Record) button
in the display lets you record a Song and have the
score displayed for you.
122
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Displaying the Score
The score size can be adjusted by pressing the [SIZE
CHANGE] button in the display. Each press of the
[SIZE CHANGE] button alternates the score size in
the following sequence: normal, large, extra large,
small, normal, and so on.
Please note that the size cannot be changed while a
Song is being recorded.
Changing the score contents
and settings
The Score Settings display lets you choose the contents to
be displayed. In this display, you can also assign the Next
Page function to the left foot switch:
NOTE
The score size setting cannot be stored to a Registration
Memory.
4
You can manually turn score “pages” by
first stopping playback of the Song by
using the [J] (Stop) or [K] (Pause)
button, and then pressing the PAGE [L]
or [R] buttons in the display.
1
2
Press the [SET UP] button in the display
to call up the SCORE SETTINGS display.
NOTE
Please note that the score settings cannot be changed
while the Song is being recorded. The [SET UP] button is
disabled during recording.
Pressing these buttons moves to the previous or next
page. The PAGE [R] button can be assigned to the
left foot switch (page 123).
7
To exit the score, press the [SCORE
OFF] button in the display.
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
5
Display the score.
3
Change the score settings.
To set whether a specific part is displayed or not in
the score, press the appropriate [ON] or [OFF]
buttons of each part. Please note that at least one of
the upper keyboard, lower keyboard or pedalboard
will be set to [ON].
Available settings for notes and how they will be
displayed (NOTE) include [A, B, C] (conventional
C-D-E indications), [FIXED DO] (solfeggio),
[MOVABLE DO] (relative solfeggio) and [OFF].
For the CH SETTINGS, the upper keyboard, lower
keyboard and pedalboard can be assigned to the
channels with the [] and [] buttons. You can
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
123
Other Functions (Tools)
also use the Data Control dial to select channels
after pressing the [] or [] button.
Selecting [AUTO] automatically assigns parts to the
channels according to the Song data.
To set the QUANTIZE value use the [] and []
buttons. You can also use the Data Control dial to
select channels after pressing the [] or [] button.
The shorter the selected note value, the more
precisely the score is displayed.
Setting the NEXT PAGE L. Foot SW [ON] lets you
turn the score to the next page with the left foot
switch. You can also turn the score to the next page
with the PAGE [R] button in the display. If rhythm,
glide and/or rotary speaker are assigned to the left
foot switch and set on, both the assigned functions
and the Next Page function work.
NOTE
• The score display settings cannot be stored to a
Registration Memory. However, the ON/OFF setting of
turning pages using the left foot switch can be saved to
the Unit as Registration data common to all the
Registration Memory numbers.
• Setting the NOTE to [MOVABLE DO] displays each key
note as “Do.”
Reference page
Other Functions (Tools)
The TOOLS Page in the MDR display has many
functions, such as Song copy, Song delete, etc.
Song copy
This function lets you copy a folder/Song. You can copy
and exchange the data even between two different USB
flash drives. (For Songs created on EL-series instruments,
such as the EL-900, one-by-one copy cannot be
executed.) Make sure to check the remaining memory of
the destination media in advance.
NOTE
• If the folder already contains 120 XG Songs the Songs can not be
copied, or if the folder already contains 120 folders the folder can
not be copied.
• A Song having a name/path that is too long may not be copied to
the root directory, even if the amount of folders/XG Songs has not
reached the maximum capacity.
• The Copy operation is automatically stopped if there is an
unrecognizable file in MDR
• About Quantize (page 151)
4
Exit from the SCORE SETTINGS display
by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the
top right of the display.
Moving a Protected Song
A Protected Song can be copied within a folder, but it
cannot be copied to another folder or USB flash
drive. If you specify another folder or USB flash drive
as the copy destination, a message appears prompting
moving of the Song — but not copying. When the
[MOVE] button is pressed, the Protected Original
Song and all Protected Edit Songs which come from
the same Protected Original Song will be moved
together. This effectively “moves” a Protected Song,
but does not “copy” it.
If you copy a folder which contains both Nonprotected Songs and Protected Songs, the copy
operation will be automatically executed for only
Non-protected Songs, and Protected Song will be
moved (not copied).
NOTE
If you copy a Protected Song to the same folder as the
source Song, the copied Song will be the Protected Edit
Song.
124
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Other Functions (Tools)
To copy a Song:
You can copy Song data within the USB flash drive, and
also to another USB flash drive.
Connect the USB flash drive containing the Song and (if
necessary) a USB flash drive for the copy destination to
the [USB TO DEVICE] terminals, then follow the
instructions below.
NOTICE
Insert the USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal
firmly. If the USB flash drive is not inserted firmly, the data
may be lost.
1
Select the folder/Song/USB flash drive
to be copied.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
Press the [COPY] button in the display
to call up the COPY TO display.
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute
the copy.
The folder/Song name in the destination is the same
as the one of the source Song. If you copy a folder/
Song to a folder that contains a Song whose name is
the same as the source Song, the copied name will be
“source Song name_XXX” (XXX indicates Song
number). If you want to change the folder/Song
name, see page 114.
If you copy an XG-compatible Song to another
folder or USB flash drive that contains a Song with
the same name as the source Song, a message
appears prompting confirmation of overwriting the
Song. Selecting [OVERWRITE] overwrites the XGcompatible Song in the destination.
NOTICE
• Never attempt to eject the USB flash drive or turn the
power off during copying (or moving a Protected
Song). Data may be lost.
• Removing the USB flash drive during operation may
result in loss of the data. Never attempt to remove
the USB flash drive unless the “Eject the source
media” message appears.
NOTE
• While the copy operation is in progress, the approximate
time of copying appears on the display; keep in mind that
the actual time necessary may differ.
• If the USB flash drive copy is executed, the folder name
“#MEDIA” will be created in the destination folder.
• If the message “The source folder hierarchy is too deep”
is displayed, copy each folder in the folder, one by one
manually.
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top
right of the display to call up the TOOLS
Page.
5
• If the “Path name is too long” message is displayed,
change the hierarchy or rename the folder name to make
it shorter.
• The copy operation will automatically be stopped if an
unrecognizable file is detected in the folder.
How to cancel the folder copy operation
If you want to cancel the folder copy operation while
the copy operation is in progress, press the
[CANCEL] button.
Keep in mind, however, that cancelling the operation
may take a long time, since the operation is stopped
only after all files in the current folder are copied.
If you cancel the operation, make sure to check which
files have been properly copied and which have not.
4
(If necessary) Change the destination.
For details on changing the destination, see
page 110.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
125
Other Functions (Tools)
Instructions when only one [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal is available:
8
It is recommended that you use connect both USB flash
drives (source and destination) to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminals. However, if there are not enough terminals
available, you can copy a Song by following the procedure
below.
Folder copy cannot be executed with this procedure.
1
2
3
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute
Song Copy. Select [CLOSE] or
[CANCEL] to abort the operation.
The Song is copied with the same name as the
source Song. If you copy a Song to a folder that
contains a Song whose name is the same as the
source Song, the copied Song name will be “source
Song name_XXX” (XXX indicates Song number).
If you copy an XG-compatible Song to another
folder or USB flash drive that contains a Song with
the same name as the source Song, a message
appears prompting confirmation of overwriting the
Song. Selecting [OVERWRITE] overwrites the XGcompatible Song in the destination.
If you want to change the Song name, see page 114.
Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 125.
Press the
(UP) button several
times until the Media List is displayed.
Select “MEMORY” as the destination.
NOTE
By pressing the [CANCEL] button, you can cancel the
operation which is being executed, then return the
Protected Song to the original USB flash drive. For details,
follow the on-screen instructions.
When moving a data-heavy Protected
Song:
4
When the Song being moved contains a large amount
of data, the move operation cannot be completed in a
single pass. In such a case, repeat steps 6 to 8 by
following the on-screen instructions.
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute
the Song Copy.
The Song to be copied is copied to the internal
memory of the Electone. The message “Eject the
source media” will appear on the display.
NOTE
If you want to abort the operation, press the [CANCEL]
button.
NOTICE
Never attempt to turn the power off during copying of a
Protected Song. Data may be lost.
5
Eject the source USB flash drive.
After ejecting the source USB flash drive, the
message “Insert the destination media” will appear
on the display.
6
7
Insert the destination USB flash drive to
which you want to copy.
Select the destination.
For details on specifying the destination, see
page 110.
126
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Song delete
You can delete the data of one Song. You can specify for
deletion only Registration data, only the performance
data, or both (entire Song). Also, only the Songs created
on this Electone and XG-compatible Songs can be
deleted. Songs created on the EL series instruments such
as the EL-900 cannot be deleted.
1
Select the Song to be deleted.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top
right of the display to call up the TOOLS
Page.
Other Functions (Tools)
3
Press the [DELETE] button in the
display.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the
operation.
Confirm that the Song to be deleted is shown in the
display. If you want to change the Song, press the
[CANCEL] button and select the desired Song.
4
Press the button of the specific data you
want to delete (“DELETE ALL,”
“DELETE REGIST” or “DELETE
PERFORMANCE”). The selected data
will be deleted.
Converting to XG
Song data recorded on this Electone can be converted to
XG-compatible data which can be played back by XGcompatible devices. Before executing the conversion,
confirm that the USB flash drive contains enough
amount of available memory.
NOTE
• The converted XG Song data may sound differently from the
original data.
• Protected Songs cannot be converted.
1
Select a Song to be converted to XG.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
Press the [CONVERT] button.
A “Which do you want to select?” message appears.
• DELETE ALL: Deletes the entire Song.
• DELETE REGIST: Deletes only Registration
data in the Song.
• DELETE PERFORMANCE: Deletes only
performance data in the Song.
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top
right of the display to call up the TOOLS
Page.
Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation.
When deleting folders, Songs with only
registration, Songs with only
performance data, Protected Songs or
XG-compatible Songs:
Select [DELETE] to actually delete the data, or select
[CANCEL] to abort the operation.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
127
Other Functions (Tools)
4
Press the [CONVERT TO XG] button.
2
The following display appears.
In the TOOLS Page, press the
[CONVERT] button.
A “Which do you want to select?” message appears.
5
(If necessary) Change the destination
for saving the converted Song.
For details on changing the destination, see
page 110.
6
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
A message appears indicating that the converted
data is being checked and the MDR starts playback
of the selected Song. When playback is finished, the
display returns to the previous display.
NOTE
Any playing of the keyboard or pressing of the panel
controls during the confirmation of the conversion will be
recorded to the converted XG-compatible Song.
3
Press the [CONVERT TO EL] button.
After the dialog appears, select the destination of the
converted data from F01 – F99.
Converting to EL format
Song data recorded via the ELS-01 series, ELS-02 series
and this Electone can be converted to EL seriescompatible data. The converted data in the USB flash
drive can be played back by EL-series instruments to
which the MDR-5 has already been installed. After
creating the folders named “F01” – “F99” on the root
directory in the USB flash drive, execute the instructions
below.
NOTE
Protected Songs cannot be converted.
Reference page
• About Protected Songs (page 119)
1
Select the Song to be converted to ELseries format.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
128
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
4
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the
display.
Other Functions (Tools)
Converting from EL format
If Song data created on an EL-series instrument, such as
the EL-900, is saved in the USB flash drive, you can
convert the Song data to data compatible with this
Electone.
1
Select the Song you want to convert.
For details on selecting a Song, see page 110.
2
Checking the remaining memory
When a USB flash drive is selected on the TOOLS Page,
pressing the [INFORMATION] button will indicate the
remaining memory in the USB flash drive. When a Song
is selected on the TOOLS Page, pressing the
[INFORMATION] button will indicate the data capacity,
amount of the Bank, Song title, composer of the Song,
etc. The indicated items differ depending on the Song.
In the TOOLS Page, press the
[CONVERT] button.
A message appears confirming if you want to
convert from the Song data for EL series to data
which is compatible with this Electone.
7
4
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
3
Press the [CONVERT FROM EL] button
in the display, then specify the
destination for the converted Song.
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the
display to start conversion.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
129
8 Audio
The convenient [AUDIO] button allows you to play back audio files (.WAV) saved to a USB flash drive.
Moreover, since you can record your performances and recordings as audio data (.WAV) to a USB flash drive,
it is possible to play back the files on computer, share them with your friends, and record your own CDs to
enjoy as well.
Audio file
Audio file
Audio file
Computer
USB flash drive
External
audio device
Compatible USB flash drives
Please make sure to use the compatible USB flash drives
listed in the Compatible USB Device List downloadable
from the Yamaha website:
Recording Your
Performance as Audio
http://download.yamaha.com/
Use of unsupported devices may result in data saving/
recalling operations to abort, etc. Before using a USB
flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting a USB device” on
page 108.
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to data,
follow the notices below.
• Yamaha recommends that you format a USB flash drive,
after checking if the USB flash drive does not contain any
important data, and to use it only for audio recording/
playback. Using MDR Songs and audio data together in
the same drive may cause severe fragmentation of the
USB flash drive, and may stop audio recording/playback
altogether.
• Insert the USB flash drive firmly and take care that the
USB flash drive does not loosen from the connection from
sudden shaking while performing, etc. during audio
recording/playback. If the USB flash drive is disconnected
while recording, it may result in data corruption in the
USB flash drive.
Audio Recording
With this method, recorded performances are saved
to a USB flash drive as an audio file. An Audio file is a
recording of the performed sound itself. Since it is
saved in stereo WAV format of normal CD quality
resolution (44.1kHz/16bit), it can be transmitted to
and played on portable music players by using a
computer. You can also record the monophonic
sound of an external device since all the sounds
produced via your vocal or guitar performance and
the sound input from the [MIC] jack will be
recorded.
NOTE
• The sound input from the [AUX IN] jack cannot be recorded.
• Keep in mind, however, that Audio recording cannot be used
to save Registrations. If you want to save Registrations,
perform the “Recording” operation described on page 112 in
chapter 7.
Try recording your performance as an audio file to a USB
flash drive. Maximum amount of recording time is 60
minutes per recording, though this may be less
depending on the capacity of the particular USB flash
drive.
File format that can be recorded
.wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo
NOTE
The file extension does not appear in the Electone display.
However, it can be viewed on a computer.
130
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Recording Your Performance as Audio
1
Connect a compatible USB flash drive
to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
4
Press the [I] (Record) button to engage
Standby status for recording.
Reference page
• Compatible USB flash drives (page 130)
2
Press the [AUDIO] button located at the
top right on the panel to call up the
AUDIO Page.
8
Start recording by pressing the
[R] (Play) button, and then start your
performance.
Audio
5
When recording begins, the elapsed recording time
is shown in the lower left of the AUDIO Page. Once
the elapsed recording time is shown, you can load
the Registration or play the Song with the MDR.
NOTE
Songs you’ve created on the Electone will not be shown in
the AUDIO Page even when the USB flash drive contains
Songs.
3
Select a blank audio file for recording
your performance.
To call up a blank audio file, press the
(IN)
button in the display of step 2 to open the USB flash
drive, then select the blank audio file. Since the
operation for selecting audio files is the same as that
for Songs, refer to the “Selecting a Song” on
page 110.
Elapsed recording time
NOTICE
Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn
the power off during recording. Doing so may corrupt
the USB flash drive data or the recording data.
6
When you finish playing, press the
[J] (Stop) button.
Recording stops and the audio file to which your
performance is recorded is automatically named and
selected in the AUDIO Page.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
131
Playing Back Audio Files
7
To hear your newly recorded
performance, press the [R] (Play)
button in the AUDIO Page.
Playing Back Audio Files
Try playing back audio files from a USB flash drive
connected to this instrument.
File format that can be played back
.wav — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16-bit resolution, stereo
NOTE
This instrument cannot play back DRM protected files.
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive
containing the audio file to be played
back to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
Reference page
• Compatible USB flash drives (page 130)
2
Press the [AUDIO] button located at the
top right on the panel to call up the
AUDIO Page.
Reference page
• Deleting the File/Changing the File Name (page 135)
Recording the Song playback as an
audio file
Once you’ve recorded your performance as a Song
using the MDR function, you can record the playback
of the Song as an audio file.
1
2
3
4
132
Connect two compatible USB flash
drives, one containing the Song, and
another for recording audio files, to the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminals.
Start audio recording (perform steps 2 –
5 above).
Select the Song on the MDR Display,
then start playback of the Song.
Play back the Song to the end of the Song.
Stop the audio recording (perform steps
6 and 7 above).
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
NOTE
Songs you’ve recorded using the MDR function on this
Electone and Protected Songs will not be shown in the
AUDIO Page, even when the USB flash drive contains
Songs.
Playing Back Audio Files
3
Select the desired audio file for
playback.
Rewind, Fast Forward and Pause
To simply play an existing audio file, select the
desired audio file (containing data), referring to the
audio file name and icon
. Since the operation
for selecting audio files is the same as that for Songs,
refer to instruction steps 2 and 3 in “Selecting a
Song” on page 110.
Rewind and Fast Forward:
4
Press the [R] (Play) button in the AUDIO
Page to call up the Playback page of the
AUDIO Page.
Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the audio file
press the [K] (Pause) button. To resume playback from
the point at which the audio file was paused, press the
[R] (Play) button again.
5
8
Audio
When playback begins, the elapsed time is shown in
the lower left of the display.
During audio playback (or when paused), press the
[LL] (Rewind) button or the [RR] (Fast forward)
button and hold it down until the time reaches the
desired position. When the button is released, playback is
paused at the desired position. To resume playback from
the point you’ve reversed or advanced to, press the
[R] (Play) button.
Press the [J] (Stop) button to stop
playback.
The display returns to the AUDIO Page.
NOTICE
Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn
the power off during playback. Doing so may corrupt
the USB flash drive data.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
133
Playing Back Audio Files
To adjust the Volume:
Changing the Volume, Tempo
and Pitch
Touch the VOLUME slider in the display or use the
Data Control dial.
Range: 0 – 127
To change the Tempo:
You can change the volume, tempo and pitch of the audio
file as the file is playing.
1
Use the TEMPO
buttons in the display or
the Data Control dial to change the tempo. The
value can be adjusted from 75% to 125% and the
default value is 100%. Higher values result in a faster
tempo. If you press the TEMPO [RESET] button in
the display or select another audio file, this setting is
restored to the default value.
Range: 75% – 125%
Connect the compatible USB flash drive
to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
Reference page
• Compatible USB flash drives (page 130)
2
3
Press the [AUDIO] button.
To change the Pitch:
Use the PITCH
buttons in the display or
the Data Control dial to change the tempo. This lets
you shift the pitch of an audio file in semitone steps
(from -12 to 12). If you press the PITCH [RESET]
button in the display or select another audio file, this
setting is restored to the default value (0).
Range: -12 – +12
Select the desired audio file for
playback.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the
same as that for Songs, refer to instruction steps 2
and 3 in “Selecting a Song” on page 110.
NOTE
• Changing the playback tempo or pitch of an audio file
may change its tonal characteristics.
• Volume, tempo and pitch changes are temporary; these
values revert to their defaults when the power is turned
off and then back on again.
5
4
Press the
(SETTING) button to
call up the Setting display.
Play back the audio file to hear and
check the changes you’ve made in the
Setting display.
Repeat playback
1
Press the REPEAT button as often as
necessary to select the desired repeat
mode.
Each press of the button switches among the modes.
(SINGLE)
Repeats the currently selected Song indefinitely.
(ALL)
Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder in
order.
(RANDOM)
Repeats all Songs in the currently selected folder
randomly.
2
3
134
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
(OFF)
Cancels repeat playback.
Exit from the Setting display by
pressing the
(FINISH) button at
the top right of the display.
Press the [R] (Play) button in the AUDIO
Page to begin repeat playback.
Other Functions (Tools)
To delete the file:
Other Functions (Tools)
Creating a New Folder/Deleting
the File/Changing the File Name
You can delete the file or change the file name.
1
Connect the compatible USB flash drive
containing the audio files to the [USB
TO DEVICE] terminal.
Reference page
• Compatible USB flash drives (page 130)
2
3
To rename the file:
Press the [RENAME] button to call up the
CHANGE NAME display. For details on how to
enter characters, refer to the “Changing the Song
Name” on page 114. You can cancel the operation at
this point by pressing the [CANCEL] button. To
finalize the name, press the [OK] button. The audio
file will be renamed and the display returns to the
AUDIO Page.
Press the [AUDIO] button.
Select the desired audio file.
Since the operation for selecting audio files is the
same as that for Songs, refer to instruction steps 2
and 3 in “Selecting a Song” on page 110.
4
Press the [DELETE] button in the display. A
message appears prompting confirmation of the
operation. You can cancel the operation at this point
by pressing the [CANCEL] button. If you want to
delete the file, press the [DELETE] button in the
display. The audio file will be deleted and the display
returns to the previous display.
In this page, you can delete or rename the audio file.
Audio file copy
To copy an audio file:
Perform the same operation as in steps 1 – 5 in “Song
copy” on page 124 in chapter 7.
8
Audio
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top
right of the display to call up the TOOLS
Page.
To return to the AUDIO Page from the TOOLS Page,
press the [AUDIO] button in the display.
NOTE
• An audio file cannot be copied to the same folder that includes
the source audio file.
• Since copying of an entire folder including audio files cannot be
performed, copy the desired audio files one by one.
• When only one [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is available, an audio
file cannot be copied between different USB flash drives.
To check the remaining memory:
When an Audio file is selected on the TOOLS Page,
pressing the [INFORMATION] button indicates the data
capacity and playback time. When a USB flash drive is
selected on the TOOLS Page, pressing the
[INFORMATION] button indicates the remaining
memory in the USB flash drive.
To initialize (format) a USB flash drive:
Perform the same operation as in steps 3 – 5 in
“Formatting a USB Flash Drive” on page 109 in chapter 7.
To create a new folder:
Press the [CREATE FOLDER] button in the display,
then perform the same operation as in the
explanation of “CREATE FOLDER” in “Using the
MDR Display” on page 104 in chapter 7.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
135
9 Voice Edit
This Electone has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own Voices. We suggest that you read
through the Voice Structure below at first to get a firm understanding of what comprises a Voice. Then go
through the editing steps, referring to page 137 for editing of an AWM Voice.
NOTE
Super Articulation Voices cannot be edited.
Voice Structure
Editing a Voice
The internal structure of the Voices of this Electone is
explained below. Refer also to “Tone Generator of this
Electone” (page 37).
Selecting a Voice for editing
1
AWM Voice structure
Select the Voice you want to edit from
the Voice Menu.
For example, if you want to edit Accordion 1, select
[Accordion 1] in the Voice Menu of the [ORGAN]
button in any Voice section.
AWM Voices consist of up to eight recorded samples of a
real instrument.
Each waveform, referred to as an “Element,” can be
edited, by changing the level (volume), filter settings, and
so on. A single Voice contains eight “boxes” (AWM1 –
AWM8) in which the Elements are put. If a Voice consists
of less than three Elements, some boxes are empty. For
example, Strings 1 consists of two Elements (as shown).
BRILLIANCE
VOLUME
Strings 1
Element1
Element2
AWM1
AWM2
AWM3
AWM4
AWM5
AWM6
AWM7
AWM8
You can add Elements from other Voices – Brass, for
example – if a box (AWM3 – AWM8) is empty. This
allows you to create your own original ensemble sounds.
In the Voice Edit function, you can edit not only each
Element, but also assemble some Elements from other
Voices.
Mute all other Voice sections except for the targeted
Voice section.
2
While holding down the [VOICE EDIT]
button, press the Voice button
corresponding to the Voice you wish to
edit.
If you press [VOICE EDIT] without selecting a
Voice, the following display will prompt you to
complete the step. While this display appears, press
the desired Voice button.
136
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Editing a Voice
Editing an AWM Voice
You can edit an AWM Voice on the AWM Page and
LAYER Page in the Voice Edit display. In the AWM Page,
the tonal balance of the entire Voice can be corrected by
some EQ parameters. In the LAYER Page, you can make
detailed edits to each Element.
AWM Page
While holding down…
1
1
2
3
4
1 Element On/Off switches
2 VOICE/ELEMENT
Press the Voice button.
After you have selected the Voice button, the AWM
Page (first page of the Voice Edit display) will
appear.
9
Voice Edit
The [AWM1-4] and [AWM5-8] buttons enable you to
alternate the pages between AWM 1 – 4 and AWM 5 – 8.
The [AWM1] – [AWM8] buttons indicate the Elements
which make up the selected Voice. You can mute any of
the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding
button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute.
Indicates the Voice/Element currently being edited. In the
example screen above, Element 1 of Accordion 1 is
assigned to AWM1, Element 2 of Accordion 1 is assigned
to AWM2, and no Voice is assigned to AWM3 and
AWM4.
You can also call up another Element from another Voice
and replace the currently selected Element with it.
Pressing the VOICE or ELEMENT button in the display
calls up the Voice or Element menu, from which you can
select the desired Voice/ Element (usually Element 1). If
you change the Voice, the Element will automatically
change to the first Element of the Voice (usually Element
1).
3 EQ LOW FREQ./EQ LOW GAIN
If you release the [VOICE EDIT] button before
pressing a Voice button, the Voice Edit function will
not be called up, and the normal Voice Display will
appear.
Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the low frequency
band. The EQ LOW FREQ. slider sets the desired
frequency band over a range of 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz. The EQ
LOW GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band
(specified by the EQ LOW FREQ. slider) over a range of
-12 dB – +12 dB.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
137
Editing a Voice
4 EQ HIGH FREQ./EQ HIGH GAIN
LAYER Page 1
These buttons switch the display.
Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the high frequency
band. The EQ HIGH FREQ. slider sets the desired
frequency band over a range of 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz. The
EQ HIGH GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency
band (specified by the EQ HIGH FREQ. slider) over a
range of -12 dB – +12 dB.
EQ (Equalizer)
An equalizer is usually used to correct the sound
output from amps or speakers to match the special
acoustic character of the room. The sound is divided
into several frequency bands, then by raising or
lowering the level for each band, the correction is
made. This Electone has a two-band (high and low)
digital equalizer that lets you adjust the overall sound
according to the type of music you play — classical
music being more refined and soft, pop music more
crisp, and rock music more dynamic.
LAYER Page
1
2
3
1 LEVEL
Determines the output level of the Element.
Range: 0 – 127
2 NOTE LIMIT
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the range for
which the Element sounds.
The setting of the HIGH slider cannot be set lower than
that of the LOW slider. Some Elements are not affected by
this parameter.
Range: C-2 – G8
3 PAN
1
3
2
Determines the position of the Element in the stereo
image.
Range: L64 – R63
LAYER Page 2
1 Element select buttons
Select the Element you wish to edit.
2 Element On/Off switches
The [AWM1] – [AWM8] buttons indicate the Elements
which make up the selected Voice. You can mute any of
the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding
button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute.
Muting all other Elements except for the one you are
editing lets you clearly hear that single Element for ease
in editing. Note that when some Elements are muted,
playing the keyboard in certain key areas or with certain
velocities may result in no sound.
1
2
The LAYER Page contains three pages. The
buttons are used to switch among them.
138
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
4
5
1 NOTE SHIFT
Determines the pitch settings in semitones.
Range: -64 – +63
2 TUNE FINE
3 Display switch buttons
3
Determines the fine tuning.
Range: -64 – +63
6
Editing a Voice
3 ATTACK RATE
LAYER Page 3
Determines how quickly the Element will reach its
maximum level after the key is played. Higher values
produce a faster attack.
Range: 0 – 127
4 RELEASE RATE
Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach
0 after the key is released.
Higher values make the time shorter.
Range: 1 – 127
1
2
3
4
5
5 CUTOFF FREQ.
1 LFO WAVE
Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter.
Range: 9600 – 24000 cent
Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound.
For details, see right column.
6 RESONANCE
Determines the amount of resonance (harmonic
emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency.
Some Elements are not affected by this parameter.
Range: 16 – 140
2 LFO SPEED
Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Higher
values make the speed faster.
Range: 2 – 93
3 LFO PMD (Pitch Modulation Depth)
Filter — Cutoff Frequency and Resonance
Level
These frequencies are passed by the filter.
4 LFO FMD (Frequency Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform
varies the filter cutoff frequency.
Higher values result in a greater amount of frequency
change. For the minimum setting, the frequency does not
change.
Range: 0 – 4800 cent
Cutoff Frequency
9
Voice Edit
Filter modifies the tone by cutting the output of a
specific frequency portion of the sound. This
Electone is equipped with a low pass filter, which
passes only those signals below the cutoff frequency
and cuts signals above the cutoff frequency.
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform
varies the pitch of the sound.
Higher values result in a greater amount of pitch change.
For the minimum setting, the pitch does not change.
Range: 0 – 400
Frequency
5 LFO AMD (Amplitude Modulation Depth)
Level
Resonance
Frequency
Cutoff Frequency
You can produce a relatively brighter or darker sound
by setting the cutoff frequency.
Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the
signal in the area of the cutoff frequency. By
emphasizing the overtones in this area, this can
produce a distinctive “peaky” electronic tone.
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform
varies the amplitude of the sound. Higher values result in
a greater amount of amplitude change. For the minimum
setting, the amplitude does not change.
Range: 0 – 128
When playing a User Voice you have created using the
LFO parameters (above), set the Vibrato setting in the
Voice Condition display to “Preset,” not “User.” If Vibrato
is set to “User” and the Vibrato parameters (depth and/or
speed) are set fairly high, you may not be able to hear the
effect of the LFO.
Reference page
• Vibrato (page 42)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
139
Saving the Edited Voice
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a
low frequency.
These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, filter
or amplitude to create effects such as vibrato, wah
and tremolo.
The following five waveforms are available.
saw (sawtooth)
tri (triangle)
squ (square)
rnd (random)
sine
Saving the Edited Voice
Edited AWM Voices can be saved as User Voices (up to
80).
1
2
Press the [SAVE] button at the top right
of the display to call up the SAVE Page.
Select the User Voice number you wish
to save to.
The message appears to prompt confirmation of the
operation. (Saving a new Voice automatically erases
the Voice previously stored to the selected User
number.)
3
(If necessary) Press the [RENAME]
button to give a name to your original
Voice.
The method for editing the name is the same as the
one for the Song name in the MDR section. (See
page 114 for more information.) Up to sixteen
characters can be entered.
4
Press the [SAVE] button to save the
Voice, or press [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
NOTICE
This operation automatically erases any Voice that had
been previously saved to the selected User Voice
number. Be careful not to erase any important data.
Always save your important data in advance to a USB
flash drive using the MDR function.
After saving the Voice, be sure to quit the Voice Edit
function (page 141) before turning the power off.
Turning off the Electone without quitting Voice Edit
erases the User Voice you have edited.
140
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Quitting Voice Edit
Quitting Voice Edit
Recalling an Edited Voice
You can quit the Voice Edit function from any of its
display pages.
Once your original AWM Voice has been saved, it can be
selected from the User button in each Voice section. Refer
to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices from the User buttons”
(page 28).
1
Press the [VOICE EDIT] button on the
panel.
If your original Voice has already been saved, the
Voice Edit function quits automatically. If the edited
Voice has not been saved, a message appears
prompting confirmation of the operation.
2
Select [EXIT] to quit the Voice Edit
function, or [CANCEL] to about the
operation and return to the previous
display.
NOTICE
When quitting Voice Edit, the square at the top left of the
display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating
that the Voice you have created is currently being saved.
Do not turn the power off while the Voice is being saved.
9
Voice Edit
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
141
10 Rhythm Program
The Electone includes powerful rhythm programming functions: Rhythm Pattern Program and Rhythm
Sequence Program. Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own original rhythms and save them
as user rhythms. Rhythm Sequence Program lets you connect the existing rhythms or your original rhythms to
create complete rhythm tracks, which you can automatically play back during your performance. Moreover,
Rhythm Sequence Program includes an automatic Registration Shift feature — called Registration Sequence.
Outline of the Rhythm
Programming Operation
Rhythm Pattern Program (pages 142 to
158)
You can create your original rhythm patterns by
entering percussion sounds or editing preset
rhythm patterns.
Rhythm Pattern Program
Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of the different
instrument sounds (drum and percussion) assigned to
each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards in creating
your own rhythms. Up to 48 of your original rhythms can
be saved as User Rhythms.
Entering the Rhythm Pattern
Program
Entering percussion sounds and/or editing them
Creating/editing the accompaniment backing patterns
played via the Lower Keyboard
Making effect settings and detailed settings for each
percussion Voice (Pan, Tune, and so on)
Saving your rhythm patterns as User rhythms
There are two ways to program a User pattern: copying a
preset rhythm that is similar to the rhythm you want to
create, or creating your own rhythm from scratch.
To copy a preset rhythm:
Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an
existing rhythm, saving you time if you want to program
a rhythm that is similar to an existing preset pattern.
1
Rhythm Sequence Program (pages 168
to 172)
You can connect any of the rhythms together to
make complete rhythm compositions. Moreover,
you can also program Registration Shift events at
any point in the composition so that the
Registration Memory settings automatically change
as the Rhythm Sequence plays back.
Selecting the destination of the sequence
2
Select the rhythm you want to copy
from the Rhythm Menu.
While holding down the [PATTERN]
button in the panel (the display prompts
you to select a rhythm), select the
Rhythm button that contains the preset
rhythm to be copied to the Rhythm
Pattern Program.
NOTE
• Pressing the [PATTERN] button while the rhythm is running
automatically stops the rhythm.
Entering a rhythm pattern one by one
Programming the Registration Sequence
142
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
• Rhythms with names ending with “+” cannot be edited
and used with the Assemble function (page 145).
Rhythm Pattern Program
To create your own rhythm from
scratch:
Press the [PATTERN] button and release it without
selecting a Rhythm button.
A blank pattern is loaded to the Rhythm Pattern
Program.
A Rhythm consists of 15 sections: Intro 1 – 3, Main A
– D, Fill In A – D, Ending 1 – 3, and Break.
In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can enter or edit
percussion notes one by one, or assemble each part
from other different rhythms to create your own new
User Rhythm.
Case 1: Creating your own rhythm by
changing a preset rhythm
Preset Rhythm
Fill In A
Intro 1
Main A
2
B
B
3
C
C
D
D
Ending 1
Break
2
3
Changing Intro 1
to Intro 1'
Save as
a User Rhythm
Main A
2
B
B
3
C
C
D
D
Deleting unnecessary Sections
When you create a Rhythm pattern based on Preset
Rhythm data or already created User Rhythm data,
created data will be stored together with the unedited
other Sections. Even if you edit only Main A and
Main B, all other Sections will also be stored as User
Rhythm data. Because of this, the remaining memory
capacity (page 158) may decrease faster than
expected. To save on memory capacity, you should
delete unnecessary Sections which may not be used
for your performance by pressing the [ALL] button
on the CLEAR PART window (page 146).
Fill In A
Intro 1'
Ending 1
2
Break
Rhythm Program
User Rhythm
10
3
All Rhythm sections, including any which have not
been edited, are saved as one User Rhythm.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
143
Rhythm Pattern Program
Case 2: Creating your own rhythm by
assembling parts from other different
rhythms
Preset Rhythm
Fill In A
Intro 1
Main A
2
B
B
3
C
C
D
D
Ending 1
2
Break
3
Basic settings for the rhythm
pattern
In the SETTING Page of the display, set the conditions of
the rhythm, such as time signature, measure length, and
so on. You can also customize the part settings in this
SETTING Page — deleting any part or copying a part
from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm.
1
Preset Rhythm
Fill In A'
Intro 1'
Main A'
2'
B'
B'
3'
C'
C'
D'
D'
Ending 1'
2'
Press the [SETTING] button in the
display to call up the SETTING Page.
Break'
3'
Save as
a User Rhythm
Assemble some
sections or parts
User Rhythm
Intro 1
Main A
Fill in A
2
B
B
3'
C'
C'
D'
D'
Ending 1
2
Break'
2
Determines the time signature used for
the rhythm.
You can select the time signature with the BEAT
buttons.
3
Case 3: Creating your own rhythm from
scratch
Blank Rhythm
Fill In A
Intro 1
Main A
2
B
B
3
C
C
D
D
Ending 1
Break
2
3
Save as
a User Rhythm
Entering percussion sounds
into each section
User Rhythm
Fill In A
Intro 1
Main A
2
B
B
3
C
C
D
D
Ending 1
2
Break
3
These are blank sections (no percussion sounds); if you
press the ENDING [2] or [3] button, no sound is played.
144
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
If you start the Rhythm Pattern Program from a
preset rhythm, pressing a BEAT button that is not
the same as the currently selected rhythm calls up
the following message.
Rhythm Pattern Program
Selecting [CLEAR] deletes all data in the rhythm
and changes the time signature.
Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
3
5
(If necessary) Set the Metronome, Part
Assemble, and Part Clear parameters.
Select a section to which you want to
enter or edit the rhythm pattern.
Pressing the SECTION button on the display calls
up the Section Select pop-up menu. After selecting
the desired section, the pop-up menu automatically
closes.
2
3
1
1 METRONOME
Turns the metronome click on or off. When set to ON,
the metronome sounds on each beat of the measure (for
example, three times per measure in 3/4 time) to serve as
a rhythmic guide when programming patterns. Set to On
here with Real Time Write.
Reference pages
• Step Write and Real Time Write (page 146)
• Entering percussion sounds to a rhythm pattern — Real Time
Write (page 147)
NOTE
Pressing the VOLUME buttons for Rhythm also changes the
volume of the metronome.
2 ASSEMBLE
4
Select copy source (Rhythm, Section, and Part)
10
Rhythm Program
You can play the selected section by pressing the
Rhythm [START] button on the panel. You can also
change the section while the rhythm is playing. For
details on muting the accompaniment part, refer to
page 154.
Copies parts from another rhythm to the currently
selected rhythm. You can assemble various sections from
multiple rhythms to create your original rhythm.
Pressing the [ASSEMBLE] button calls up the following
display.
Sets the measure length of the rhythm
pattern.
Pressing the MEASURE button on the display calls
up the Measure Select popup menu. Select the
desired number of measures in the pop-up menu. If
you select Break or Fill In as the section, the measure
value cannot be changed.
Select the part for the
copy destination
Press here to execute
the copy
Select the copy source: Rhythm, Section and Part. Then
select the destination. You can copy only one selected
part, or all parts of a rhythm.
After setting the source and destination, press
[EXECUTE]. Copy is executed and returning to the
previous display.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
145
Rhythm Pattern Program
You can also select a rhythm pattern currently being
created as the COPY FROM RHYTHM.
To create a MAIN B section based on MAIN A, create the
MAIN A rhythm in the INPUT page, copy it to MAIN B,
then edit the MAIN B rhythm as desired.
To select the rhythm currently being created, select
“Current Rhythm” on the 5th page of the “USER” category.
When selecting the desired part, a display prompting
confirmation of the operation appears. Select [CLEAR] to
execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
NOTE
If you select BASS here, the bass phrase in the A.B.C. will be
cleared.
Deleting the current Section
Pressing the [ALL] button on the CLEAR PART window
will delete all data of the current Section. To conserve
remaining memory capacity (page 158), delete unnecessary
Sections which may not be used for your performance.
Step Write and Real Time Write
There are two different methods you can use to program
rhythms: Step Write and Real Time Write.
Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as
individual note values. As a method, it is very similar to
writing down the notes on a sheet of music paper; each
note is entered one at a time, and though you can hear each
individual note entered, you cannot actually hear the
pattern playing as you create it. Step Write is good for
precision and for entering percussion sounds whose note
placement and rhythmic value has been determined, such
as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure.
3 CLEAR PART
Clears a specific part or parts from the currently selected
rhythm. Pressing this button calls up the following
display.
Select the part you want to delete from the displayed
parts. You cannot select a part that contains no data (the
button is grayed out). If you select [ALL] here, the
percussion and all accompaniment parts are cleared.
Reference page
• Accompaniment (page 63)
146
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Real Time Write on the other hand, is similar to using a
multi-track tape recorder; you can hear previously recorded
parts of the pattern as you record new parts on top. Real
Time Write is best for capturing the “feel” of a rhythm,
because it allows you to actually play the pattern as you are
creating it.
Each method has its own advantages and uses. Which
method you use depends partly on the type of rhythm you
intend to create and partly on your own personal
preference.
You can switch between the two methods in editing to
create a single rhythm by the use of both methods. This
would come handy, for example, in programming the basic
beats of a rhythm with Step Write, then using Real Time
Write to add percussion accents and embellishments.
Which mode of the operation is selected depends on the
play status of the rhythm. If the rhythm is stopped, Step
Write is automatically selected. If the rhythm is playing,
Real Time Write is selected. See the instructions page 147
for Step Write, and page 151 for Real Time Write.
Rhythm Pattern Program
Entering percussion sounds to a
rhythm pattern — Step Write
You can enter percussion sounds in the INPUT Page of
the display. Before entering percussion sounds, turn off
the Upper and Lower keyboard Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
NOTE
The volume of the percussion and accompaniment sound
during use of Rhythm Pattern Program can be controlled with
the VOLUME button of the RHYTHM section. When you quit
Rhythm Pattern Program, the VOLUME of the RHYTHM section
will return to the previous selected level.
1
2
Drum kit
Press the [INPUT] button at the top of
the display to call up the INPUT Page.
Select the part, MAIN DRUM or ADD
DRUM, to which you want to enter the
percussion.
In general, main (or basic) drum/percussion
instruments (such as Bass Drum, Snare Drum, and
so on) are entered in Main Drum part and others
(such as Tambourine, Triangle) are entered in Add
Drum part.
You can select only one kit for each part (Main
Drum or Add Drum). When you want to create a
rhythm pattern including two different drum kits,
select one kit for Main Drum and another for Add
Drum.
Select the desired Drum Kit.
You can select a kit from the two categories, Drum
Kit and SFX Kit. For details on each kit, see
page 160. Pressing the desired kit in the Kit list will
close the list, and then call up the selected kit to the
Upper and Lower keyboards.
Select the percussion sound you wish
to enter by pressing the key on the
Upper or Lower keyboard that
corresponds to the sound.
10
Rhythm Program
4
3
SFX kit
The selected instrument’s name appears on the
display.
Selected key
Instrument name
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
147
Rhythm Pattern Program
5
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
For details on Quantize, refer to page 151.
NOTE
The Quantize setting can be changed in the middle of
Step Write.
2 ACCENT buttons
Records the instrument and determines its volume or
Accent level. Press one of the ACCENT buttons you wish
to set (“
” is softer and “
” is louder; “REST” is no
sound). The instrument is automatically inserted at the
Accent level to the selected position in the pattern.
Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the
rhythm clock by one step, according to the current
Quantize resolution value.
3 QUANTIZE [L] [R] controls
Each press of the buttons advances or reverses the rhythm
clock by one step. The size of a single step is determined
by the Quantize value.
6
Set the Gate Time. (This is optional, and
only necessary when you want to enter
a sustaining sound, such as a whistle.)
For a list of instruments that require a Gate Time
setting, refer to the Percussion Kit List on page 160.
For details on Gate Time, refer to page 154.
7
Use the ACCENT buttons to enter the
sound to the selected point. Press each
ACCENT button to actually enter the
percussion sounds.
You can change the rhythm clock to which the
percussion sound is entered by pressing the
QUANTIZE [L] [R] buttons.
You can change the accent level, position, or gate time of
the entered sound, or delete the entered sound.
To change the accent level of an entered
note:
Select the desired note for changing the
accent level.
3
1 Rhythm Clock box
Displays the current position in the pattern according to
measure, beat, and number of clicks.
A click is the smallest division of a pattern, and one beat
is made up of 480 clicks.
The rhythm clock advances up to the measures set in the
SETTING Page and loops back to the beginning of the
rhythm (01:01:000).
Reference page
• Basic settings for the rhythm pattern (page 144)
148
Repeat steps 4 through 7 above to layer
each instrument and complete your own
rhythm.
Editing entered percussion notes
1
1
2
8
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
1
2
3
1 NEXT INSTRUMENT
Selects the entered instruments one by one, from left key
to right.
Rhythm Pattern Program
2 NOTE [L] [R] controls
To move an entered note:
Selects the previous/next position’s note of the currently
selected instrument. In the notes below for example, you
can select notes 1, 3 and 4 one by one. Rests (2 and
5) are ignored.
1
2
1
23
4
Select the note you want to move (as in
step 1 on page 148).
Press the Rhythm Clock box to enable
the box.
5
3 QUANTIZE [L] [R] controls
Advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The
size of a single step is determined by the Quantize value.
2
Change the accent level by using the
ACCENT buttons or Accent field.
The Accent field allows for finer changes.
1
3
Turn the Data Control dial to change the
position by one clock.
To change the length of an entered note:
The length of sustaining sounds such as Snare Roll and
Whistle can be changed by adjusting the Gate Time. See
page 154 for more information.
1 Accent field
Touch on the box to enable the Accent field.
Turning the Data Control dial changes the accent level
over a range of 0 – 127.
The minimum setting results in no sound.
2 ACCENT buttons
To erase an entered note:
1
2
Select the note you want to erase (as in
step 1 on page 148).
Rhythm Program
2
10
Press the [REST] button in the ACCENT
section of the display.
The selected note is deleted and replaced with a rest.
Determines the coarse accent level. Eight accent levels
(from “
” to “
”) are available.
Press the desired Accent button to change the currently
selected note to the selected level.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
149
Rhythm Pattern Program
You can also erase all notes of a single instrument, or all
notes entered.
To erase all instruments:
1
The following display appears, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
To erase one instrument:
1
Press [CLEAR] in the display.
Select the key to which the instrument
that you want to erase is assigned.
The key name you have selected and its instrument
name are displayed.
Selected key
2
Instrument name
Press [CLEAR] in the display.
The following display appears, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
2
Select [CLEAR ALL] to erase all
instruments.
All instruments are instantly erased.
When you want to replace the instrument you have
already entered with another instrument, it’s not
necessary to delete and re-enter. You can quickly replace
the sound with the following procedure.
To replace the instrument:
3
Before the operation, stop the rhythm.
Select [CLEAR] to erase the selected
instrument.
1
A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been
erased.
Select the key to which the instrument
you want to replace is assigned.
The key name you have selected and its instrument
name are displayed.
The following method can also be used to erase one
instrument.
Selected key
1
While holding down the [CLEAR]
button, press the key on the keyboard
corresponding to the instrument you
wish to erase.
A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been
erased.
150
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
2
Instrument name
Simultaneously hold down the
[CHANGE] button in the display and
press the key on the Upper or Lower
keyboard that corresponds to the
instrument you want to use.
The instrument is instantly erased and replaced with
the newly selected one.
Rhythm Pattern Program
About Quantize
The Quantize function is a process of rounding off timing
or duration values, so that each note plays with precise
timing. You can select nine types of Quantize value.
Entering percussion sounds to a
rhythm pattern — Real Time Write
While you listen to the entered rhythm or metronome
click, play the Upper/Lower keyboards to enter the
desired percussion sounds.
1
2
6
3
7
8
4
5
9
1
5
2
With this button, change the displayed Quantize buttons
Select the desired part to which the
percussion sounds are entered, and the
desired drum kit, by following steps 1 –
3 on page 147.
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
The positions at which the sounds are input will be
corrected according to the predetermined Quantize
value in the Real Time Write operation.
With Step Write
This allows you to automatically correct the length
(duration) and timing of each note you enter.
Steps Depending on the Quantize Values
1
2
240
3
120
4
60
320
6
160
7
8
40
9
Clock
0
120
240
360
Press the rhythm [START] button in the
panel.
The rhythm (or Metronome) starts playing, enabling
the Real Time Write operation.
480
(1 beat)
Setting Quantize to FREE (5) results in the finest, least
amount of quantization (1/480 beat).
10
Rhythm Program
3
80
With Real Time Write
This allows you to automatically correct the timing of the
notes you play, according to the specified Quantize
resolution. No correction occurs when you select FREE.
Generally, you should set Quantize to be the same as the
shortest note you intend to play.
Original data (you play)
Quarter note
length
4
After applying a “ ” quantize value to the original data
The rhythm (or Metronome) starts
playing, enabling the Real Time Write
operation.
If you have started the Rhythm Pattern Program by
copying a preset rhythm, you can listen to the
selected rhythm as you play the sound. If you have
started from scratch, set the Metronome to “on” in
the SETTING Page and listen to the metronome
click. The pattern will automatically repeat (or
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
151
Rhythm Pattern Program
“loop”) for a certain number of measures as set in
the SETTING Page.
3
Reference page
• Metronome (page 145)
5
Using the COPY FROM [RHYTHM] and
[SECTION] buttons, select the rhythm
and the section which has the
accompaniment you wish to use.
Reference page
Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to layer
each instrument and complete your own
rhythm.
• Basic settings for the rhythm pattern (page 144)
You can erase an instrument while the rhythm is playing
back.
To erase an instrument/key assignment:
While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key
on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you
wish to erase. All instances of the selected instrument will
be erased from the pattern.
When you want to erase all instruments, or edit entered
percussion notes, you need to stop the rhythm before
editing. See page 148, “Editing entered percussion notes.”
Creating backing patterns
(Rhythmic Chord function)
The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of
the Electone’s Accompaniment patterns with your
original rhythm. You can select and save the
Accompaniment pattern that best matches the rhythm
that you have created. Moreover, Rhythm Pattern
Program features a Rhythmic Chord function that lets
you add your own backing patterns to the rhythms you
create.
To select an appropriate
Accompaniment pattern for your newly
created rhythm:
1
2
Press the [SETTING] button at the top of
the display to call up the SETTING Page.
Press the [ASSEMBLE] button.
A pop-up menu appears, letting you select the copy
source and destination parts.
4
5
6
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Using the COPY TO [PART] button,
select the desired accompaniment part
(CHORD 1 or CHORD 2) to be used for
the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute
the copy.
The desired accompaniment part (Rhythmic Chord
pattern) has been copied.
To create your own backing patterns
with the Rhythmic Chord function:
The Rhythmic Chord pattern can be entered by the same
methods as the rhythm: Step Write and/or Real Time
Write.
1
152
Using the COPY FROM [PART] button,
select the accompaniment part you
want to copy.
Press the [INPUT] button at the top of
the display to call up the INPUT Page.
Rhythm Pattern Program
2
Voices can also be changed even after entering the
Rhythmic Chord pattern.
You can select only one Voice for one part (Chord 1
or Chord 2). When you want to create a Rhythmic
Chord pattern including two different Voices, select
one Voice for Chord 1 and another for Chord 2.
Select the part, CHORD 1 or CHORD 2,
which you want to create for the
Rhythmic Chord pattern.
4
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
For details on the Quantize function, refer to
page 151.
5
You can adjust the Gate Time setting by using the
GATE TIME
buttons in the display, or
the Data Control dial. Using the buttons in the
display makes coarse changes in the value. Using the
Data Control dial makes fine changes.
If the part you have selected contains a preset
accompaniment pattern, a message appears
prompting you to confirm whether you want to clear
the existing data or not. To create your own
Rhythmic Chord pattern, select [CLEAR].
3
Set the Gate Time.
Select the desired Voice.
Pressing the button showing the Voice name calls up
the relevant Voice Menu.
Select the desired Voice category with the
instrument icon buttons, then select the desired
Voice from the Voice Menu. The selected Voice is
called up for both the Upper and Lower keyboards.
NOTE
The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the
one for the Voice Sections.
6
10
Rhythm Program
Gate time determines the actual length of time a note
sounds. For example, a quarter note is sometimes played as
tenuto (long length) and sometimes played as staccato
(short length).
Since 1 beat is made up of 480 clocks, a quarter note played
tenuto may have a gate time between 450 – 470, and a
staccato quarter note may be about 240.
Enter the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
The methods for entering the Rhythmic Chord
pattern are the same as those for entering the
rhythm pattern. Any key you press sounds a C major
triad chord (C, E, and G). For information on Step
Write, see page 148; for information on Real Time
Write, see page 151.
You can also edit the entered Rhythmic Chord pattern
using the same method as in “Editing entered percussion
notes” (page 148). To change the gate time of the notes of
the Rhythmic Chord pattern, follow the instructions (see
page 154).
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
153
Rhythm Pattern Program
To change the Gate Time:
1
2
3
3
Select the desired part for which you
wish to change the Voice.
The Voice menu appears.
Select the note for which you want to
change the gate time (see step 1 on
page 148).
Press the Gate Time box to enable the
box.
Turn the Data Control dial to change the
Gate Time.
Changing the Voices for
Accompaniment parts
4
Select the desired Voice, and the Voice
menu automatically closes.
NOTE
In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can create your original
drum patterns using Main Drum and Add Drum, and
original backing patterns using Chord 1 and Chord 2.
Moreover, you can change the Voices for all
accompaniment parts, including Pad, Phrase 1 and
Phrase 2.
Voices can be changed in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
1
2
Press the [VOICE/EFFECT] button at the
top of the display to call up the VOICE/
EFFECT Page.
Press the [VOICE] button in the display.
The following display will appear.
154
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the
one for the Voice Sections.
After selecting the desired Voice, customize the
accompaniment to your personal preference by adjusting
the volume and pan, and setting the desired effects (see
page 155).
Rhythm Pattern Program
REVERB display
Adjusting volume and panning
Volume and Pan are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
VOLUME display
1
2
1 ON/OFF
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each
accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
CHORUS display
Determines the on/off status of each accompaniment
part. When this is set to OFF, the part is muted.
2 Volume sliders
1
Determines the volume of each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
2
PAN display
1 CHORUS TYPE
10
Rhythm Program
Determines the type of the chorus effect. Pressing the
CHORUS TYPE button calls up the chorus type list.
Determines the position of each accompaniment part in
the stereo image.
Range: L64 – R63
Effect settings
You can set Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effects as
desired for your original rhythm.
Reverb adds a warm ambience to the sound, simulating
the complex reflections of actual performance spaces,
such as a concert hall or a small club. Chorus provides a
wide variety of sound transformations and
enhancements. Variation includes many kinds of special
effects for changing the sound, both subtly and radically.
These effects are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
Select the desired chorus type, and the list automatically
closes.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
155
Rhythm Pattern Program
2 Chorus sliders
Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to each
accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
VARIATION display
1
2
3
1 VARIATION (Variation Effect Category)
Selects the effect category of the variation effect. Pressing
the VARIATION button calls up the effect category list.
Reference page
• Effect List (page 52)
Select the desired type, and the list automatically closes.
3 Variation sliders
Determines the amount of Variation effect applied to
each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
Detailed settings for each
percussion instrument
You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch,
reverb and volume for each instrument.
1
2
Select the desired effect category, and the list
automatically closes.
After changing the category, the variation type below
automatically changes corresponding to the selected
category.
2 TYPE (Variation Type)
Determines the type of the variation effect. Pressing the
TYPE button calls up the effect type list.
156
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Press the [DRUM SETUP] button at the
top of the display to call up the DRUM
SETUP Page.
Select the desired part, Main Drum or
Add Drum.
Rhythm Pattern Program
3
5 PITCH COARSE
Press the appropriate key (the key to
which the instrument to be changed is
assigned).
Determines the pitch of the currently selected
instrument, adjustable in semitone (100-cent) steps.
Range: -64 – +63
The selected instrument’s name is shown on the
display and you can change its settings.
6 PITCH FINE
Determines the pitch of the currently selected
instrument, adjustable in 1-cent steps, allowing more
detailed tuning of the instrument than in PITCH
COARSE (5) above.
Range: -64 – +63
Saving rhythm patterns
4
You can save your newly created rhythm pattern as a User
Rhythm, up to a maximum of 48 patterns.
Adjust the parameters: Pan, Volume,
Reverb and Pitch.
1
If necessary, confirm the contents of the
rhythm you want to save.
1
2
Confirming rhythm patterns before saving
The rhythm pattern you have created will be saved with 15
sections collectively into one rhythm. Before saving, we
recommend that you confirm the contents of each section.
Example: When saving the Main A and Main B sections
you have created into one user rhythm
3
4
5
6
Indicates the currently selected kit. Pressing this button
calls up the Percussion Kit list, letting you select the
desired kit. When you change the kit, the instruments
you have already entered are replaced with the
instruments of the newly selected kit.
Reference page
• Percussion Kit List (page 160)
2 PAN
Determines the position of the currently selected
instrument in the stereo image.
Range: L63 – R63
10
Rhythm Program
1 Percussion Kit Name
First select “Main A” by using the [SECTION] button on
the SETTING Page, then press the [START] button on the
panel. This lets you hear the Main A pattern you have
created.
Confirm that the rhythm pattern is what you want to save
as Main A. Next, select “Main B” by using the [SECTION]
button, then play it back and confirm that this is what you
want to save as Main B.
If the Main A and/or Main B patterns contain undesired
data or no data, create the desired data by using the
Assemble function (page 145).
After confirming the desired section (Main A and Main B
here), we recommend that you confirm that all other
sections contain no data. If unnecessary data is contained
in some sections which you don’t want to save, delete that
unnecessary data. This can reduce the data size of the user
rhythm.
3 VOLUME
Determines the volume of the currently selected
instrument.
Range: 0 – 127
4 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently
selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 127
2
Press the [SAVE] button at the top right
of the display to call up the SAVE Page.
If the rhythm is playing, it will automatically be
stopped.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
157
Rhythm Pattern Program
3
Select the User Rhythm number to
which you wish to save.
The following display appears, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
After saving the Rhythm, be sure to quit Rhythm Pattern
Program before turning the power off. Turning off the
Electone without quitting Rhythm Pattern Program
erases the User Rhythm you have created.
Quitting the Rhythm Pattern
Program
You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its
display pages.
1
Press the [PATTERN] button.
If a rhythm is playing, it will automatically be
stopped.
If you leave Rhythm Pattern Program without
having edited any patterns, this simply quits the
Rhythm Pattern Program.
If you have not saved the edited pattern, a message
appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
2
4
Press the [SAVE] button to save the
pattern, or press [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
Checking the Remaining Memory
Capacity
Remaining Memory (amount of memory available for
storing rhythms) is shown on the display as a percentage.
Remaining Memory
If a “Data full” message appears when you press the [SAVE]
button, the pattern cannot be saved because of lack of
available memory space. If this occurs, check through all
fifteen sections for any unnecessary data. After erasing
some of the less necessary data, try to save the pattern
again.
To avoid this, you should periodically check the amount of
remaining memory while you are creating your rhythm.
Reference pages
• Confirming rhythm patterns before saving (page 157)
• CLEAR PART (page 146)
158
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Select [EXIT] to leave Rhythm Pattern
Program, or [CANCEL] to abort the
operation and return to the previous
display.
NOTICE
When you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program, the
square at the top left in the display turns light blue for a
few seconds, indicating that data is currently being
saved. Do not turn the power off while the data is being
saved.
Rhythm Pattern Program
Recalling User rhythm patterns
4
Press the [SELECT] button to select the
desired pattern file.
The method for selecting a file is the same as that in
the MDR section. See page 106 for more
information.
The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm
Pattern Program can be selected and played from the
User buttons in the panel Rhythm section. Refer to
Chapter 5, “Selecting Rhythms from the User buttons”
(page 58).
User buttons
Select “USER” category here.
You can load rhythms from a USB flash drive and edit
and save them as User Rhythms. Data that can be loaded
includes not only that of the Electone, but also all Style
File Format files.
1
2
3
Insert the USB flash drive which
contains the desired pattern into the
[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
Press the [PATTERN] button on the
panel.
Press [FILE] at the top right in the
display.
If you open the FILE Page while the rhythm is
playing, the rhythm will automatically be stopped.
Press the [LOAD] button to load the
pattern.
To edit the loaded pattern, go to the INPUT Page
(page 148), then save your created pattern(s) as a User
Rhythm (page 157).
10
Rhythm Program
Selecting rhythms from a USB
flash drive
5
About file types that can be loaded to the
Electone
This Electone is compatible with Style File
Format data.
The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s
original Style data format, which uses a
unique conversion system to provide high-quality
automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord
types. In this format, each rhythm pattern (called a “Style”)
is made up of fifteen sections (Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill
In A – D, Break, Ending 1 – 3) as rhythm pattern variations.
Each of these fifteen sections in turn has eight different
parts, made up of MIDI sequence data.
You can load any patterns (Styles) which have been created
by an SFF-compatible instrument.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
159
Rhythm Pattern Program
Percussion Kit list
Drum
ELKit 1
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
Lower Keyboard
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
Upper Keyboard
&
'
'ᅊ
(
)
*ᅊ
%
&
$ᅊ
Room Kit
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Noise Percussion
Maracas Low
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Bass Drum March
Surdo Muff
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Analog BD Short
Surdo Rim
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Synth Tom 3
Cuica High
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Analog BD Long
Surdo Open
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Synth Tom 2
Cuica Middle
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Synth Bass Drum
Tamborim Mute
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Synth Tom 1
Cuica Low
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Bass Drum Attack
Tamborim Open
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Bass Drum Heavy
Pandeiro
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Tom 4
Bongo High
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Bass Drum Light
Conga Slide
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Tom 3
Bongo Low
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Orch Snare Drum
Conga Slap
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Snare Drum Roll *
Conga Muff
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Tom 2
Bongo Mute
Castanet
Castanet
Castanet
Castanet
SD Brush Roll
Conga High
Snare Soft
Snare Soft 2
Snare Electro
Snare Soft
Tom 1
Bongo Slap
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
SD Brush Shot 2
Conga Low
Kick Soft
Kick Soft
Kick Tight L
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot H
Snare Pitched
Open Rim Shot
Tom Brush Shot 4
SD Brush Shot 1
Timbale 1 High
Kick Tight
Kick Tight
Kick Wet
Kick Tight
SD Heavy
Timbale 1 Low
Kick
Kick Short
Kick Tight H
Kick
Side Stick
Side Stick Light
Stick Ambient
Side Stick
Snare
Snare Short
Snare Ambient
Snare Snappy
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Tom Brush Shot 3
Timbale 2 High
Tom Brush Shot 2
SD Accent 2
Timbale 2 Low
Snare Tight
Snare Tight H
Snare Tight 2
Snare Tight Snap
SD Accent 1
Timbale 3 High
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom L
Hybrid Tom 1
Tom Room 1
Tom Brush Shot 1
Wood Block High
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hi-Hat Closed
SD Reverb 2
Timbale 3 Low
Floor Tom H
Floor Tom H
Hybrid Tom 2
Tom Room 2
Snare Drum Rim 2
Wood Block Mid
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
SD Reverb 1
Timbale 4 High
Low Tom
Low Tom
Hybrid Tom 3
Tom Room 3
Snare Drum Rim 1
Wood Block Low
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hi-Hat Open
Synth Snare Drum
Timbale 4 Low
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom L
Hybrid Tom 4
Tom Room 4
Analog SD
Vibraslap
Mid Tom H
Mid Tom H
Hybrid Tom 5
Tom Room 5
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Tambourine
Tambourine
High Tom
High Tom
Hybrid Tom 6
Tom Room 6
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Castanet
Castanet
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Claves
Claves
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine Light
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Cabasa
Finger Snap
Cabasa
Finger Snap
Hand Claps
Hand Claps
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Wind Chime Down
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Hi-Hat Closed
Agogo High
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Crash Cymbal 1
Wind Chime Up
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Hi-Hat Open
Agogo Low
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Crash Cym Mute
Bells
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
Ride Cymbal 2
Cowbell 4
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Shaker
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Ride Cymbal 1
Cowbell 3
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Guiro Short
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Ride Cymbal Cup
Cowbell 2
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Guiro Long
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas
Cym Brush Shot
Cowbell 1
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Cymbal March
Taiko 2
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Analog HH Closed
Ohdaiko 2
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Orch Cymbal Roll
Taiko 1
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Analog HH Open
Ohdaiko 1
Claves
Claves
Claves
Claves
Orch Cymbal
Ohtsuzumi 2
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Orch Cymbal Mute
Ohtsuzumi 1
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Kakegoe 3
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Kotsuzumi 4
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Kakegoe 2
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Kotsuzumi 3
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Kakegoe 1
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Kotsuzumi 2
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Kotsuzumi 1
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Tam-Tam
$
Hit Kit
Maracas High
)ᅊ
*
Standard Kit 2
Concert BD
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
Standard Kit 1
Scratch
Snare Drum Light
(
ELKit 2
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
160
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm Pattern Program
Drum
Rock Kit
&
&ᅊ
Electro Kit
Analog Kit
Dance Kit
Jazz Kit
Brush Kit
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Kick Dance 1
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Kick Dance 2
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
(
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
)
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch Dance 1 *
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch Dance 2 *
Scratch L
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Dance Perc 1
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Reverse Dance 1
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Dance Perc 2
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Hi Q Dance 1
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Snare Analog 3
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Vinyl Noise *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Snare Analog 4
Brush Slap
Brush Slap *
(
Brush Tap Swirl *
Reverse Cymbal *
Reverse Cymbal *
Reverse Cymbal *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl
)
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Reverse Dance 2 *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Castanet
Hi Q 2
Hi Q 2
Hi Q 2
Castanet
Castanet
Snare Noisy
Snare Snap Elec
Snare Noisy 4
Snare Techno
Snare Jazz H
Brush Slap 2
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Snare Dance 1
Sticks
Sticks
Kick Soft
Kick 3
Kick 3
Kick Techno Q
Kick Soft
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot
Rim Gate
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot
Kick 2
Kick Gate
Kick Anlg Short
Kick Techno L
Kick Tight
Kick Tight
Kick Gate
Kick Gate Heavy
Kick Analog
Kick Techno
Kick Jazz
Kick Jazz
Side Stick
Side Stick
Side Stick Anlg
Side Stick Anlg
Side Stick Light
Side Stick Light
Snare Rock
Snare Noisy 2
Snare Analog
Snare Clap
Snare Jazz L
Brush Slap 3
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Dance Clap
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
(
Snare Rock Tight
Snare Noisy 3
Snare Analog 2
Snare Dry
Snare Jazz M
Brush Tap 2
)
Tom Rock 1
Tom Electro 1
Tom Analog 1
Tom Dance 1
Floor Tom L
Tom Brush 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Hat Close Analog
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Tom Rock 2
Tom Electro 2
Tom Analog 2
Tom Dance 2
Floor Tom H
Tom Brush 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hat Close Anlg 2
Hat Close Anlg 3
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tom Rock 3
Tom Electro 3
Tom Analog 3
Tom Dance 3
Low Tom
Tom Brush 3
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
Hat Open Analog
Hi-Hat Open 3
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
Tom Rock 4
Tom Electro 4
Tom Analog 4
Tom Dance 4
Mid Tom L
Tom Brush 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Electro 5
Tom Analog 5
Tom Dance 5
Mid Tom H
Tom Brush 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Analog
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom Rock 6
Tom Electro 6
Tom Analog 6
Tom Dance 6
High Tom
Tom Brush 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
(
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
)
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine Anlg
Tambourine
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell Analog
Cowbell Dance
Cowbell
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap Analog
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Analog
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo Analog H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo Analog L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog H
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog M
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
(
Conga L
Conga L
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog L
Conga L
Conga L
)
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas 2
Maracas 2
Maracas
Maracas
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Claves
Claves
Claves 2
Claves 2
Claves
Claves
(
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Dance Perc 3
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
)
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Dance Perc 4 *
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Scratch H 2
Scratch H 2
Dance Breath 1
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Scratch L 2
Scratch L 2
Dance Breath 2 *
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
Lower Keyboard
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
Upper Keyboard
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
10
Rhythm Program
Surdo Mute
'
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
161
Rhythm Pattern Program
Drum
Symphony Kit
&
&ᅊ
China Mix Kit
Live!Std Kit
Live!Std+P Kit
Live!Funk Kit
Live!Funk+P Kit
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
(
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
)
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl*
Brush Swirl *
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
(
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
)
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Castanet
Castanet
Castanet
Castanet
Castanet
Castanet
Snare Soft
Snare Soft
Snare Soft
Snare Soft
Snare Soft 2
Snare Soft 2
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Kick Soft 2
Kick Soft
Kick Soft
Kick Soft
Kick Soft
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot H
Open Rim Shot H
Gran Cassa
Kick Tight
Kick Tight
Kick Tight
Kick Tight
Kick Tight
Gran Cassa Mute
Kick
Kick
Kick
Kick Short
Kick Short
Side Stick
Side Stick
Side Stick
Side Stick
Side Stick Light
Side Stick Light
Band Snare
Snare
Snare
Snare
Snare Short
Snare Short
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
(
Band Snare 2
Snare Tight
Snare Tight
Snare Tight
Snare Tight H
Snare Tight H
)
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Floor Tom H
Floor Tom H
Floor Tom H
Floor Tom H
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Low Tom
Low Tom
Low Tom
Low Tom
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Mid Tom H
Mid Tom H
Mid Tom H
Mid Tom H
Mid Tom H
Hand Cymbal
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
High Tom
High Tom
High Tom
High Tom
High Tom
Hand Cymbal S
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
(
Chinese Cymbal
China Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
)
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Hand Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Hand Cymbal 2 S
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
(
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
)
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Agogo H
Dagu Mute
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo L
Zhongcha Mute
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Cabasa
Dagu Heavy
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Maracas
Zhongcha Open
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas
Samba Whistle H *
Paigu Middle
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle L *
Paigu Low
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Guiro Short
Xiaocha Mute
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Long *
Bangu
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Claves
Xiaocha Open
Claves
Claves
Claves
Claves
(
Wood Block H
Bangzi
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
)
Wood Block L
Muyu Low
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Zhongluo Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Muyu Mid-Low
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Zhongluo Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Muyu Middle
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Shaker
Xiaoluo Open
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Muyu Mid-High
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Muyu High
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
Lower Keyboard
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
Upper Keyboard
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
162
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm Pattern Program
Drum
Live!Brush Kit
&
&ᅊ
Live!Brush+P Kit
Live!Studio Kit
Live!AcousticKit
Live!Power Kit 1
Live!Power Kit 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
(
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
)
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Swirl *
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
(
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
)
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll Aco *
Snare Roll *
Snare Roll *
Castanet
Castanet
Castanet
Castanet
Castanet
Castanet
Brush Slap 2
Brush Slap 2
Snare Studio 2
Snare Soft Aco
SnareSoftPower 1
SnareSoftPower 2
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Kick Soft
Kick Soft
Kick Ambience H
Kick Soft Aco
Kick Ambient+
Kick Ambient+
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot
Rim Acoustic
Open Rim Power 1
Open Rim Power 2
Kick Tight
Kick Tight
Kick Ambience L
Kick Mute Aco
Kick Power Open
Kick Power Open
Kick Jazz
Kick Jazz
Kick Studio
Kick Open Aco
Kick Power Mute
Kick Power Mute
Side Stick Light
Side Stick Light
Side Stick
Stick Acoustic
Side Stick Power
Side Stick Power
Brush Slap 3
Brush Slap 3
Snare Studio M
Snare Acoustic
Snare Power 1
Snare Power 2
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Hand Clap
Hand Clap Power
Hand Clap Power
Hand Clap Power
(
Brush Tap 2
Brush Tap 2
Snare Studio L
Snare Rough Aco
Snare Rough 1
Snare Rough 2
)
Tom Brush 1
Tom Brush 1
Floor Tom L
Tom Acoustic 1
Tom Power 1
Tom Power 1
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-HatClosedAco
Hi-HatClosePower
HH Closed PW Eg
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 2
Floor Tom H
Tom Acoustic 2
Tom Power 2
Tom Power 2
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-Hat Pedal
Hi-HatPedal Aco
Hi-HatPedalPower
Hi-HatPedalPower
Tom Brush 3
Tom Brush 3
Low Tom
Tom Acoustic 3
Tom Power 3
Tom Power 3
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Open Aco
Hi-HatOpen Power
Hi-HatOpen Power
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 4
Mid Tom L
Tom Acoustic 4
Tom Power 4
Tom Power 4
Tom Brush 5
Tom Brush 5
Mid Tom H
Tom Acoustic 5
Tom Power 5
Tom Power 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 1
CrashCymbalAco 1
CrashCymbalAco 1
CrashCymbalAco 1
Tom Brush 6
Tom Brush 6
High Tom
Tom Acoustic 6
Tom Power 6
Tom Power 6
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 1
RideCymbal Aco 1
RideCymbal Aco 1
RideCymbal Aco 1
(
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
China Cymbal Aco
China Cymbal Aco
China Cymbal Aco
)
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
Ride Cymbal Cup
RideCymbalCupAco
RideCymbalCupAco
RideCymbalCupAco
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
SplashCymbal Aco
SplashCymbal Aco
SplashCymbal Aco
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 2
CrashCymbalAco 2
CrashCymbalAco 2
CrashCymbalAco 2
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 2
RideCymbal Aco 2
RideCymbal Aco 2
RideCymbal Aco 2
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
(
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
)
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Claves
Claves
Claves
Claves
Claves
Claves
(
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
)
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Wind Chime
Wind Chime
Wind Chime
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
Lower Keyboard
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
Upper Keyboard
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
10
Rhythm Program
Surdo Mute
'
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
163
Rhythm Pattern Program
Drum
Live!Rock Kit
&
&ᅊ
Live!Real Drums
Live!RealBrushes
Analog T8 Kit
Analog T9 Kit
House Kit
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
W Kick *
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Disco Fx *
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
WhiteNoiseDown 1 *
(
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
PinkNoise Down 1 *
)
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
WhiteNoiseDown 2 *
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
PinkNoise Down 2 *
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Finger Snap
Snare Hammer
Snare Drum&Bass1
White Noise Up 2 *
Click Noise
Click Noise
Click Noise
Kick Zap Hard
Kick Break 2
White Noise Up 1 *
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Click
Snare Garg L
Snare Distortion
Pink Noise Up *
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Metronome Bell
Kick Tek Power
Kick Tek Power
WhiteNoiseUp Rel *
Seq Click L
Seq Click L
Vintage Tip
Kick Slimy
KickDistortionRM
PinkNoise Up Rel *
Seq Click H
Seq Click H
Vintage Swirl 1 *
Kick T8 4
Kick T9 2
Kick T9 4
Brush Tap
Brush Tap
Vintage Slap 1
Snare Analog CR
Snare Analog CR
Snare T8 Rim
Brush Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Vintage Swirl 2 *
Snare T8 7
Snare T9 5
Snare T8 5
Brush Slap
Brush Slap
Vintage Slap 2
SnareClap Analog
Clap Analog Sm
Hand Clap
(
Brush Tap Swirl *
Brush Tap Swirl *
Vintage TapSwirl *
Snare T8 6
Snare T9 Gate 1
Snare Garg L
)
Snare Roll Rock *
Snare Roll Rock *
VintageSlapSwirl *
Tom T8 5
Snare Rock Roll *
Snare Roll *
Castanet
Castanet
Vintage Swirl 3 *
Snare T8 5
Snare T9 3
Snare T9 3
Snare Soft Rock
Snare Tight
Vintage Slap 3
Kick T8 3
Snare T9 4
Snare T8 1
Sticks
Sticks
Sticks
Snare T8 4
Snare T9 Gate 2
Snare T9 5
Kick Soft Rock
Kick Genuine
Kick Soft L
Kick T8 2
Kick T9 4
Kick T9 1
Rim Rock
Rim Real
Open Rim Shot RB
Snare T8 3
Snare T9 6
Snare T9 Gate
Kick Rock Heavy
Kick Real 1
Kick Soft H
T8 Kick Bass
Kick T9 1
Kick T9 2
Kick Rock
Kick Real 2
KickJazzAmbience
Kick T8 1
Kick T9 3
Kick T9 5
Stick Rock
Stick Real
Stick Brush
Snare T8 Rim
Snare T9 Rim
Snare T9 Rim
Snare Rock
Snare Real 1
Vintage Slap 4
Snare T8 2
Snare T9 1
Snare T9 1
Hand Clap Power
Clap Power
Clap Power
Clap T9
Clap T9
Clap T9
(
Snare Dry Rock
Snare Real 2
Vintage Slap 5
Snare T8 1
Snare T9 2
Snare T9 2
)
Tom Rock 1
Tom Real 1
TomRealBrushes 1
Tom T8 1
Tom T9 1
Tom T9 1
Hi-HatClosedRock
Hi-HatClosedReal
Hi-Hat Closed RB
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Hi-Hat Closed T9
Hi-Hat Closed T8
Tom Rock 2
Tom Real 2
TomRealBrushes 2
Tom T8 2
Tom T9 2
Tom T9 2
Hi-HatPedal Rock
Hi-Hat PedalReal
Hi-Hat Pedal RB
Hi-Hat Pedal T8
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Tom Rock 3
Tom Real 3
TomRealBrushes 3
Tom T8 3
Tom T9 3
Tom T9 3
Hi-Hat Open Rock
Hi-Hat Open Real
Hi-Hat Open RB
Hi-Hat Open T8
Hi-Hat Open T9
Hi-Hat Open T9
Tom Rock 4
Tom Real 4
TomRealBrushes 4
Tom T8 4
Tom T9 4
Tom T9 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Real 5
TomRealBrushes 5
Tom T8 6
Tom T9 5
Tom T9 5
CrashCymbalAco 1
CrashCymbalReal1
CrashCymbal RB 1
Crash Cymbal T8
Crash Cymbal T9
Crash Cymbal T9
Tom Rock 6
Tom Real 6
TomRealBrushes 6
Tom T8 7
Tom T9 6
Tom T9 6
RideCymbal Aco 1
RideCymbalReal 1
Ride Cymbal RB
Ride Cymbal T9
Ride Cymbal T9
Ride Cymbal T9
(
China Cymbal Aco
ChinaCymbal Real
ChinaCymbal RB
China Cymbal 2
China Cymbal 2
Crash Cymbal 4
)
RideCymbalCupAco
RideCym Cup Real
Ride Cup RB 1
RideCymbal Cup 2
RideCymbal Cup 2
RideCymbal Cup 2
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine
Tambourine RX5
Tambourine RX5
Tambourine Hit
SplashCymbal Aco
SplashCymbalReal
Splash Cymbal RB
Splash Cymbal
Splash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal 2
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell
Cowbell T8
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 1
CrashCymbalAco 2
CrashCymbalReal2
CrashCymbal RB 2
Crash Cymbal 4
Crash Cymbal 4
Crash Cymbal 1
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Cowbell T8
Cowbell T8
RideCymbal Aco 2
RideCymbalReal 2
Ride Cup RB 2
Ride Cymbal 3
Ride Cymbal 3
Ride Cymbal 3
Bongo H
Bongo H
Bongo H
Conga T8 5
Conga T8 5
Bongo H Open 1 F
Bongo L
Bongo L
Bongo L
Conga T8 4
Conga T8 4
Bongo L Open 3 F
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga H Mute
Conga T8 3
Conga Tip
Conga H Tip
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga H Open
Conga T8 2
Conga Open Slap
Conga H SlapOpen
(
Conga L
Conga L
Conga L
Conga T8 1
Conga Open
Conga H Open 2
)
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale H
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo H
Agogo H
Glass H
Analog Click
Agogo H
Agogo L
Agogo L
Agogo L
Glass L
Conga T8 1
Agogo L
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas T8
Maracas Slur 2
Maracas Slur 2
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Samba Whistle H *
Fx Gun 2 *
Fx Gun 2 *
Vox Drum L
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Samba Whistle L *
Fx Gun 1 *
Fx Gun 1 *
Vox Drum H
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Guiro Short
Analog Shaker H *
Scratch H 3 *
Guiro Short
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Guiro Long *
Analog Shaker L *
Scratch Down *
Guiro Long *
Claves
Claves
Claves
Claves T8
Hi Q 3
Claves
(
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Wood Block H
Hi Q 1
Hi Q 1
Wood Block H
)
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Wood Block L
Hi Q 2
Hi Q 2
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Cuica Mute
Scratch H 2
Scratch H 2
Cuica H
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Cuica Open
Scratch L 2
Scratch L 2
Cuica L
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Triangle Open
Shaker
Shaker
Shaker
Analog Shaker
Analog Shaker
Analog Shaker
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Jingle Bells
Sleigh Bells
Sleigh Bells
Sleigh Bells
Wind Chime
Wind Chime
Wind Chime
Wind Chime
Wind Chime
Wind Chime
Snare Hip 1
Snare Piccolo
Snare Break Roll
Snare Hip 2
Snare T8 7
Noise Burst
Snare Hip Gate
SnareRckRollDist
Vox Bell
(
Snare Break 1
Snare Brush Mute
Snare R&B 1
)
Kick Blip
Kick Blip Hard
Vox Alk
Snare Fx 1
Snare Jungle 1
Udu High
Kick Fx Hammer
Kick Sustain
Filter Kick
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
Lower Keyboard
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
Upper Keyboard
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
164
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm Pattern Program
Drum
HipHop Kit
&
&ᅊ
SFX
Drum Machine
Break Kit
SFX Kit 1
SFX Kit 2
Live! SFX Kit 1
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Hi Q
Hi Q
(
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
Whip Slap
)
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch H
Scratch L
Scratch L
Scratch L
Hi-HatClosedT8 2
Snare Drum&Bass1
Finger Snap
Tom T8 3
Kick Break 2
Snare Break 8
Hi-Hat Open T8 2
Snare Distortion
Snare Break 9
Tom T8 6
Kick Tek Power
Hi-HatClosedBrk1 *
Crash T8
KickDistortionRM
Hi-HatClosedBrk2 *
Triangle Mute
BassDrumHardLong
Kick Break Deep
Triangle Open
BassDrumTekPower
Snare Hip
Wind Chime
Bass Drum Dist 5
Snare Lo-Fi
TambourineLight2
Bass Drum Dist 3
Snare Clappy
(
TambourineLight1
Bass Drum Dist 1 *
Snare LdwH Mono
)
Kick HipHop 9
BD Drum & Bass 1
Snare Rock Roll *
Hi-HatClosed Tek
Bass Drum Blip
Snare Gate 1
Kick Gate
BassDrumAnalogSm
Snare Mid
Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi
Kick T8 2
Snare Break Rim
KickGranCasaOpen
Kick T8 3
Kick Break Heavy
Hi-HatReverseD&B
Kick T9 HD 3
Snare Hip Rim 4
Kick HipHop 1
Kick T9 2
Kick Break 2
Kick Analog CR
Kick T9 4
Kick Break 1
Cutting Noise 1 *
Phone Call *
Cutting Noise 1 *
SnareAnalogSmRim
Snare T9 Rim
Snare Hip Rim 1
Cutting Noise 2 *
Door Squeak *
Cutting Noise 2 *
Snare HipHop 1
Snare T9 1
Snare Break 3
Snare Clappy
Clap T9
Snare Break 1
Snare HipHop 2
Snare T9 4
Snare Break 2
Scratch Split *
Floor Tom L
Tom T9 1
Tom Break 1
Wind Chime *
Hi-HatClosed Hip
Hi-Hat Closed T9
HHClosedRockSoft
Telephone Ring *
Low Tom
Tom T9 2
Tom Break 2
Hi-Hat Pedal Hip
Hi-Hat Pedal T9
Hi-Hat PedalRock
Mid Tom L
Tom T9 3
Tom Break 3
Hi-Hat Open Hip
Hi-Hat Open T9
HH HalfOpen Rock
High Tom
Tom T9 4
Tom Break 4
Ride Cymbal 3
Tom T9 5
Tom Break 5
Crash Cymbal 3
Crash Cymbal T9
Crash Cymbal 1
Shaker 2
Conga T8 1
Tom Break 6
ScratchBDForward
Ride Cymbal T9
Ride Cymbal 3
(
ScratchBDReverse
Conga T8 2
China Cymbal 2
)
Kick HipHop 2
Analog Click
RideCymbal Cup 2
Car Tires Squeal *
SnareHipHopRim 2
Claves T8 1
Tambourine 1 Hit
Car Passing *
HipHop Clap 2
Maracas T8
Splash Cymbal 2
Car Crash *
HipHop Snap 1
TambourineAna CR
Cowbell 1
Siren *
Snare HipHop 3
Analog Shaker
Crash Cymbal 2
Train *
Electric Clap 2
Cowbell T8
Cowbell RX11
Jet Plane *
Kick Hip Deep
CowbellAnalog CR
Ride Cymbal 2
Starship *
Kick HipHop 3
Snare T8 1
Bongo H
Burst *
SnareHipHopRim 3
Snare T8 2
Bongo L
Roller Coaster *
Snare HipHop 5
Snare T8 3
Conga H Tip
Submarine *
Electric Clap 1
Snare Analog CR
Conga H OpenSlap
(
Handbell H
Snare Jungle 1
Conga H Open
)
Kick HipHop 4
Snare Drum&Bass2
Bongo 2 H
HipHop Clap 3
Snare Hip 1
Bongo 2 L
HipHop Snap 2
Snare R&B 1
Conga Open
SnareHipHopRim 5
Snare R&B 2
Agogo L
Shower *
Laugh *
Shower 2 *
HipHop flex 1
Snare Hip 1
Cabasa
Thunder *
Scream *
Thunder 2 *
HipHop flex 2
Snare Wood
Maracas Slur
Wind *
Punch *
Wind 2 *
Shaker 2
Snare Timbre
Timbale H
Stream *
Heart Beat *
Stream 2 *
Kick HipHop 5
Hi-HatClosedT8 1
Timbale L
Bubble *
Foot Steps *
Bubble 2 *
SnareHipHopRim 4
Hi-Hat Open T8 1
Scratch H 3 *
Feed *
Snare HipHop 6
Hi-HatClosedT8 2
Scratch Down *
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
Lower Keyboard
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
Upper Keyboard
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
String Slap *
Flute Key Click *
Scratch Cut *
CarEngn Ignition *
String Slap *
Flute Key Click *
Feed *
Snare HipHop 11
Hi-Hat Open T8 2
Claves
(
Kick HipHop 10
Hi-Hat Pedal Aco
Wood Block H
)
Snare HipHop 7
Hi-HatClosed Aco
Wood Block L
HipHop Clap 5
Hi-Hat Open Aco
Scratch H 2
Conga H Tip
Hi-HatClosedLoFi
Scratch L 2
Conga H Heel
Hi-HatOpen Lo-Fi
Triangle Mute
Conga H Open
Hi-HatClosed Syn
Triangle Open
Conga L Open 1
Hi-Hat Open Syn
Kick Break 3
Conga L Open 2
Analog Shaker 1
Kick Break 4
Kick HipHop 8
Tambourine RX5 2
Kick Break 5 *
Dog *
Machine Gun *
Dog *
HipHop Clap 6
Tambourine 1 Hit
Kick Break 6
Horse *
Laser Gun *
Horse *
Snare T8 1
Electric Cowbell
Kick Break 7
Bird Tweet *
Explosion *
Bird Tweet *
Snare T8 1 H
Conga T8 3
Hi-HatClosedBrk3
(
HipHop Clap 7
ElectricTriangle
Snare Break 4
)
Tom T8 1
Claves T8 2
Snare Break 5
Hi-HatClosedT8 2
Analog Shaker 2
Snare Break 6
Ghost *
Tom T8 2
Electric Clap 1
Snare Break 7
Maou *
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
*
)ᅊ
10
Rhythm Program
$
Door Slam *
Firework *
Ghost *
Maou *
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
165
Rhythm Pattern Program
SFX
Live! SFX Kit 2
&
Noise Kit
VocalEffectsKit
GospelAdLibs
Wonderland Kit
&ᅊ
Cajon Low
'
Cajon Slap
'ᅊ
Cajon Tip
(
)
PopLatin Kit
Claves High
Claves Low
)ᅊ
Hand Clap
*ᅊ
Finger Snap
*
$
%
Castanet
$ᅊ
Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Laser Beam
Conga H Open
Laser Shot *
Conga H Mute
Water Phone *
Conga H SlapOpen
Bubble
Conga H Slap
(
Puddle
Conga H SlapMute
)
Thunder *
Conga L Tip
Shower *
Conga L Heel
Beach *
Conga L Open
Stream *
Conga L Mute
Footstep
Conga L SlapOpen
Door Squeak
Conga L Slap
Door Slam
Conga L Slide *
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
Lower Keyboard
*ᅊ
$
%
$ᅊ
Phone Call *
White Noise *
Male Ha 1 *
Bass Drum
Bongo H Open 1 f
Door Squeak 2 *
Pink Noise *
Female Ha 1 *
Gran Cassa
Bongo H Open 3 f
Door Slam 2 *
WhiteNoiseDown 1 *
Male Ha 2 *
Tom 2
Bongo H Rim
Scratch Cut *
PinkNoise Down 1 *
Male Ha 3 *
Tom 1
Bongo H Tip
(
Scratch Split *
WhiteNoiseDown 2 *
Male Bh 1 *
Snare
Bongo H Heel
)
Wind Chime *
PinkNoise Down 2 *
Female Bh 1 *
Snare Roll *
Bongo H Slap
Telephone Ring 2 *
White Noise Up 2 *
Male Kh 1 *
Hi-Hat Closed
Bongo L Open 1 f
White Noise Up 1 *
Female Kh 1 *
Cymbal
Bongo L Open 3 f
Pink Noise Up *
Male Ph 1 *
Hi-Hat Open
Bongo L Rim
WhiteNoiseUp Rel *
Female Ph 1 *
Tambourine
Bongo L Tip
PinkNoise Up Rel *
Male Th 1 *
Finger Snap
Bongo L Heel
WhiteNoiseUp LFO *
Female Th 1 *
Castanet
Bongo L Slap
PinkNoise Up LFO *
Male Bh 2 *
C'mon *
Triangle Mute
Timbale L
Female Bh 2 *
Hoo! *
Wood Block L
Male Kh 2 *
Aha! *
Triangle Open
Female Kh 2 *
Oh Yeah *
Wood Block H
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
CarEngn Ignition *
Male Ph 2 *
Yayayayayah *
Hand Clap
)
Car Tires Squeal *
Female Ph 2 *
Put Your Hands…*
Jingle Bells
Paila L
Car Passing *
Male Th 2 *
C'mon Now *
Bell Tree
Timbale H
Car Crash *
Female Th 2 *
Heeey *
Alarm Bell *
Siren 2 *
Male Ha 4 *
Everybody Now *
Train *
Train 2 *
Female Ha 2 *
ClapYourHands…*
Horn 1 *
Jet Plane 2 *
Male Ha 5 *
WithAllYourSoul *
Horn 2
Starship *
Male Ha 6 *
Stand Up On…*
Siren *
Paila H
Burst *
Male Bh 3 *
Uhh Yeah *
CarEngn Ignition *
Cowbell Top
Roller Coaster *
Female Bh 3 *
Aaoh *
Car Crash *
Cowbell 1
Submarine *
Male Kh 3 *
Come On! *
Helicopter *
Cowbell 2
Female Kh 3 *
Yeah! *
Starship *
Cowbell 3
(
Male Ph 3 *
Alright Now! *
Sheep *
Guiro Short
)
Female Ph 3 *
One *
Goat *
Guiro Long *
Male Th 3 *
Two *
Oxen *
Metal Guiro Short
Female Th 3 *
Three *
Whinny *
Metal Guiro Long *
Laugh *
Male Bh 4 *
Four *
Horse *
Tambourine
Scream 2 *
Female Bh 4 *
One! *
Lion *
Tambourim Open
Punch 2 *
Male Kh 4 *
Two! *
Dog
Tambourim Mute
Heart Beat *
Female Kh 4 *
Three! *
Cat *
Tambourim Tip
Foot Steps 2 *
Male Ph 4 *
Four! *
Hen *
Maracas
Female Ph 4 *
Five! *
Owl *
Shaker
Male Th 4 *
Six! *
Insects
Cabasa
Female Th 4 *
Seven! *
Frog
Cuica Mute
(
Eight! *
Tweet 1
Cuica Open
)
Clap! *
Tweet 2 *
Cowbell High 1
Gospel Clap 1 *
Cuckoo Clock *
Cowbell High 2
Gospel Clap 2 *
Big Clock
Shekere
Bell *
Shekere Tone
Telephone *
Triangle Mute
Camera
Triangle Open
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
Upper Keyboard
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
Gnaw
Machine Gun 2 *
&ᅊ
'
Applause *
Wind Chime
Laser Gun *
Explosion 2 *
'ᅊ
Firework *
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
166
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Rhythm Pattern Program
SFX
Cuban Kit
&
Arabic Kit
&ᅊ
Turkish Kit
China Kit
OrchestraPerc
Asma Davul L
Symphonic Gong 1
Asma Davul R
Symphonic Gong L *
Asma Davul Side
Symphonic Gong 2
(
Asma Davul Both
Timpani E
)
KoltukDavul Flam
Timpani F
KoltukDavul Teke
Timpani F#
Koltuk Davul Tek
Timpani G
Koltuk Davul Dum
Timpani G#
Bendir Teke Flam
Timpani A
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
$ᅊ
Conga H Tip
Bendir Teke Dead
Conga H Heel
Bendir Tek Dead
Da Cha 2
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Nakarazan Dom
Bendir Teke
Da Gu mp
Timpani C
Conga H Mute
Cabasa
Bendir Tek
Da Gu Rim
Timpani C#
Conga H SlapOpen
Nakarazan Edge
Bendir Slap
Da Gu f
Timpani D
Conga H Slap
Hager Dom
Bendir Dum
Da Gu Hand
Timpani D#
(
Conga H SlapMute
Hager Edge
Zil Right Close
Da Gu Roll *
Timpani High E
)
Conga L Tip
Bongo H
Zil Right Open
Pai Gu 4
Gran Cassa Hard
Conga L Heel
Bongo L
Zil Left Close
Pai Gu 4 High
Gran Cassa Soft
Conga L Open
Conga H Mute
Zil Left Open
Pai Gu 3
Gran Cassa Hit
Conga L Mute
Conga H Open
Tef Teke Flam
Pai Gu 3 High
Gran Cassa Cresc
Conga L SlapOpen
Conga L
Tef Tek Mute
Pai Gu 2
ConcertSnareDrum
Conga L Slap
Zagrouda H
Tef Teke Damped
Pai Gu 2 High
Snare Roll *
Conga L Slide *
Zagrouda L *
TefTekMuteMedium
Pai Gu 1
Snare Drum Light
Bongo H Open 1 f
Kick Soft
Tef Dum Mute
Luo High 1
Snare Ensemble
Bongo H Open 3 f
Side Stick
Tef Cymbal
Gong Batter
Sus Cym 1 Roll S *
Bongo H Rim
Snare Soft
Tef Cymbal Mute
Jin Luo
Sus Cymbal 1
Bongo H Tip
Arabic Hand Clap
Tef Tremolo *
Luo High 2
Sus Cym 2 Roll L *
(
Bongo H Heel
Snare Drum
Tef Shake 1
Luo Mid-Low
Sus Cymbal 2
)
Bongo H Slap
Floor Tom L
Tef Shake 2
Luo
Concert Tom 1
Bongo L Open 1 f
Hi-Hat Closed
Tef Tek Flam
Jin Luo Low
OrchCymbal 1 ckd
Bongo L Open 3 f
Floor Tom H
Tef Full Open
Da Cha 1
Concert Tom 2
Bongo L Rim
Hi-Hat Pedal
Tef Teke OpShort
Da Cha Effect
Orch Cymbal 1
Bongo L Tip
Low Tom
Tef Tek Op Short
Zhongcha
Concert Tom 3
Bongo L Heel
Hi-Hat Open
Tef Tek Open
Xiaocha Effect
Orch Cymbal 2
Bongo L Slap
Mid Tom L
Tef Dum Open
Xiaocha
Concert Tom 4
Timbale L
Mid Tom H
Hollo FingerDead
Mang Luo Low
Concert Tom 5
Crash Cymbal 1
Hollo Slap
Mang Luo Mid
Finger Cymbal
High Tom
Hollo Dum
Qing
Gong
Ride Cymbal 1
Kasik
Finger Bell
Ride Cymbal Tip
Crash Cymbal 2
Kasik Flam
Luo Big
China Cymbal
Paila L
Duhulla Dom
BDarbuka TekDead
Muyu Low
Ride Cymbal Cup
Timbale H
Tambourine
BDarbuka TekFlam
Muyu Mid-Low
Tambourine
Duhulla Tak
BassDarbuka Teke
Muyu Mid
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
BDarbukaTekeFin1
Muyu High
Cowbell
Duhulla Sak
BDarbukaTekeFin2
Nanbangzi Roll *
Jingle Ring
Claves
Bass Darbuka Tek
Nanbangzi
Castanet Roll *
Paila H
Doff Dom
BassDarbukaSlap1
Bangu
Table Castanet
Cowbell Top
Katem Dom
BassDarbukaSlap2
Ban
Bongo H Stick
Katem Tak
Bass Darbuka Dum
Bangu Roll *
Bongo L Stick
Katem Sak
DarbukaRollClose *
ChineseOperaVo 1 *
Conga H Stick
Katem Tak
Darbuka RollOpen *
ChineseOperaVo 2 *
Conga L Stick
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
Lower Keyboard
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
Guiro Short
Doff Tak
DarbukaTekeFlamD
ChineseOperaVo 3 *
Whip
)
Guiro Long *
Tabla Dom
Darbuka Tek Dead
Yunluo F
Rotating Tom 1
Tabla Tak 1
DarbukaTekDamped
Yunluo F#
Tubular Bell L
Tabla Tik
Darbuka TekeFlam
Yunluo G
Rotating Tom 2
Tabla Tak 2
Darbuka Teke
Yunluo G#
Tubular Bell M
Tabla Sak
DarbukaTekeFin 1
Yunluo A
Rotating Tom 3
Tabla Roll Edge *
DarbukaTekeFin 2
Yunluo A#
Tubular Bell H
Tabla Flam
Darbuka Tek 1
Yunluo B
Rotating Tom 4
Maracas
Sagat 1
DarbukaTekeFin 3
Yunluo C
Rotating Tom 5
Shaker
Tabel Dom
DarbukaTekeFin 4
Yunluo C#
Temple Block H
Cabasa
Sagat 3
Darbuka Tek 2
Yunluo D
Temple Block L
Tabel Tak
Darbuka Slap Med
Yunluo D#
Claves
(
Sagat 2
Darbuka Slap
Yunluo E
Wood Block H
)
Rik Dom
Darbuka Dum
Yunluo High F
Wood Block L
Rik Tak 2
Bongo Tek Roll *
Yunluo High F#
Anveil
Rik Finger 1
Bongo Flam
Yunluo High G
Triangle Roll *
Rik Tak 1
Bongo Tek Flam
Yunluo High G#
Triangle Mute
Rik Finger 2
Bongo Tek
Yunluo High A
Triangle Open
Rik BrassTremolo *
Bongo Slap
Yunluo High A#
Bell Tree
Rik Sak
Bongo Flam Hi
Yunluo High B
Sleigh Bells
Rik Tik
Bongo Dum
Yunluo High C
Wind Chime
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
Tambourine
$
%
Upper Keyboard
&
$ᅊ
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
)ᅊ
*
*ᅊ
$
%
&
$ᅊ
10
Rhythm Program
Conga H Open
&
&ᅊ
'
'ᅊ
(
)
)ᅊ
*
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
167
Rhythm Sequence Program
Rhythm Sequence Program
With the Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can
string together any of the Electone’s existing rhythms and
the rhythms of your own creation together to make
complete rhythm compositions.
You can save four rhythm compositions (each containing
up to 140 bars) to the Sequence buttons on the panel for
future recall. Two or more rhythm compositions can be
played back in succession, letting you divide a Song into
parts and play back the rhythm data as desired. Here are a
couple of example applications:
• When you want to play more than two Songs in a
medley, save the rhythm composition for each Song to
a separate sequence button. You can then recall each
desired Song by simply pressing the corresponding
sequence button to which the Song is saved.
• When you want to practice a Song in separate sections
(for example, separately practicing the verse, chorus
and bridge), divide the Song into the relevant parts. For
example, save the intro part to the [SEQ. 1] button, the
main chorus part to the [SEQ. 2] button, the ending to
the [SEQ. 3] button, and so on. Then, recall the desired
part simply by pressing the appropriate sequence
button. You can also play through a Song by recalling
all the parts in sequence.
Selecting a sequence
There are two ways to program a Rhythm Sequence:
creating your own sequence from scratch, or copying and
editing an existing sequence that is similar to the
sequence you want to create.
Reference pages
• Programming a Sequence (page 169)
• Copying a Rhythm Sequence (page 173)
1
Press the [SEQUENCE] button in the
DISPLAY SELECT section.
The MENU Page of the Sequence display appears.
168
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Any rhythm currently playing will automatically be
stopped when you call up the Rhythm Sequence
Program function.
2
Press one of the Sequence buttons
([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on the left half in
the display to select the Rhythm
Sequence number you want to edit.
The lamp of the selected numbered sequence button
in the Rhythm section lights.
Rhythm Sequence Program
NOTE
Instead of pressing the Sequence button on the
display, you can press one of the sequence buttons in
the Rhythm section on the panel to select the
sequence number.
This selects the Sequence number, to which a
rhythm composition can be saved.
If you want to edit an existing rhythm composition,
refer to “Copying a Rhythm Sequence” on page 173.
If you want to program a Rhythm Sequence from
scratch, refer to “Programming a Sequence” below.
• When entering an Intro section, you can confirm the
number of measures at the top of the display.
• When you press the ENDING [1] button while the Main
section is playing back, a fill in pattern will be called up
before the Ending 1 pattern. In the Rhythm Sequence
program, however, a fill in pattern is not called up when
Ending 1 is entered to the Sequence.
5
One measure of the selected rhythm is entered and
its name is displayed as a box in the rhythm row on
the display. When the rhythm is entered, the cursor
(colored orange) will automatically move one step to
the right. A maximum of 140 measures can be
entered to a single sequence. When you select an
ending pattern and press the [SET] button, an entire
ending pattern (more than one measure) is entered.
You cannot enter a rhythm after an ending pattern.
Programming a sequence
1
2
Press the [RHYTHM] button at the top
right of the display to call up the
RHYTHM Page.
Press the rhythm button corresponding
to the rhythm you want to enter to the
sequence. If you press User button [1]
or [2], you can select a rhythm of your
own creation (User rhythm).
The rhythm menu of the selected rhythm button is
displayed.
Press the [SET] button in the display.
6
Repeat steps 2 through 5 above to enter
the rhythm and create your own rhythm
composition.
Turning the power off before quitting or closing the
Rhythm Sequence Program erases any sequences you
have made. Before turning the power off, quit the
Rhythm Sequence Program (page 172).
10
3
You can play a sequence you are editing at any time to
audition the changes.
Select the desired rhythm from the
displayed rhythm menu.
1
Rhythm Program
Auditioning a sequence
Move the cursor to the desired position
for playback.
Move the cursor by using the Data Control dial, or
the POSITION buttons on the display.
4
Select a rhythm section (Main A – D, Fill
in A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, or
Break) by pressing one of the rhythm
control buttons on the panel.
The selected rhythm and section appears at the top
of the display.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
169
Rhythm Sequence Program
2
INSERT
Press the rhythm [START] button on the
panel.
For inserting a rhythm before the current cursor
position. The new rhythm is entered just before the
cursor position and all other rhythms to the right of
the cursor are moved to accommodate the new
number. This operation is not available between
measures of an ending pattern.
Additional rhythms cannot be entered beyond the
Rhythm sequence function’s capacity of 140. If the
Insert operation results in the rhythm number going
over the capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and
the operation cannot be executed.
The Sequence plays back. Pressing the [START]
button again stops playback.
DELETE
Editing an existing Rhythm
Sequence
For deleting a rhythm at the current cursor position.
When the ending pattern is selected, pressing the
[DELETE] button deletes the entire ending pattern
(more than one measure).
You can insert a new rhythm between the rhythms you
have already entered, or delete the entered rhythm from
the sequence.
CLEAR
For erasing all patterns entered to the selected
sequence.
After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears
prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [CLEAR] to clear the currently selected
Rhythm Sequence, or select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation and return to the previous display.
1
2
1 POSITION
These are cursor controls for moving the cursor (colored
orange) along the rhythm row in the display.
NOTE
The Registration Sequence feature allows you to have
desired Registrations automatically called up in sequence,
when playing a Rhythm Sequence. It lets you program the
timing (measure/beat/clock) at which the Registration is
changed. You can also program the Next Unit function in
Registration Sequence.
A Registration Sequence is saved as a part of the
corresponding Rhythm Sequence.
With this feature, you can have the sounds of the
instrument change as desired automatically to match the
Rhythm Sequence playback.
When you insert an ending pattern into the editing sequence,
any existing rhythm data that follows an Ending pattern is
automatically deleted.
1
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left.
Moves the cursor one step to the right.
Moves the cursor five steps to the right.
2 DATA
These are data controls for entering rhythms and deleting
existing rhythms in the rhythm row.
SET
For initially entering a rhythm to an empty position
in the rhythm row, or for replacing a pattern at the
cursor position. Pressing the [SET] button enters the
rhythm selected from the rhythm menu to the
cursor position.
This operation is not available between measures of
an ending pattern.
170
Programming a Registration
Sequence
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Press the [REGIST] button at the top
right in the display to call up the
Registration Sequence display.
NOTE
If you are loading a Registration while a rhythm is playing,
the sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration
data cannot be loaded.
Rhythm Sequence Program
Entering Next Unit:
When you program the Next Unit function in
Registration Sequence, the next registration data in
current Song can be loaded automatically just by playing
the Rhythm Sequence.
1
The Registration Sequence is programmed from this
display. The entered Registration number is shown
along the Registration row in the middle of the
display.
2
3
2
Using the
buttons in the
display or the Data Control dial, set the
Measure/Beat/Clock position at which
you want to enter the Next Unit (1 beat =
96 clocks).
Press the NEXT UNIT [INSERT] button in
the display.
The Next Unit mark
appears at the timing point
you set in step 1, indicating that the Next Unit is
entered.
Select a Bank, then press the desired
numbered button in the Registration
Memory section.
Next Unit Loading Time
Using the
buttons in the
display or the Data Control dial, set the
Measure/Beat/Clock position at which
you want to change the Registration (1
beat = 96 clocks).
• Loading a Next Unit may take a few seconds (the time
may differ depending on the size of the data to be
loaded).
• Next Unit data can be loaded by two ways: using the right
footswitch and programming Next Unit in the
Registration Sequence. Loading time is the same
regardless of which way you load the Next Unit data.
10
When using the Data Control dial, first press the
number you wish to change in the display, then turn
the dial.
4
Press the DATA [SET] button in the
display.
The Registration number appears in the display (in
the timing order), indicating that the Registration is
entered. Up to 140 Registrations can be entered.
If some Registration numbers are entered to the
same Measure/Beat/Clock, the last entered one takes
priority.
5
Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to set
the Registration Sequence.
You can move or delete the entered Registration
Sequence (Registration number or Next Unit data) from
the sequence.
Rhythm Program
Editing an existing Registration
Sequence
To move an entry:
1
2
3
Using the POSITION buttons, move the
cursor and select the data (Registration
number or Next Unit) you want to move.
Change the position by pressing the
Bar/Beat/Clock buttons in the display.
To move the Registration number
timing, press the DATA [SET] button. To
move the Next Unit timing, press the
NEXT UNIT [SET] button.
The position of the Registration number or Next
Unit is changed and displayed in the proper order.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
171
Rhythm Sequence Program
To erase an entry:
1
2
The Registration Memory also changes with
Rhythm Sequence playback, if the sequence includes
a Registration Sequence.
Using the POSITION buttons, move the
cursor and select the data (Registration
number or Next Unit) you want to delete.
Rhythm playback automatically stops when the
sequence reaches its end.
If you’ve stopped rhythm playback in the middle of
the sequence, press the [START] button again to
resume playback.
Press the [DELETE] button to delete the
data.
Quitting the Rhythm Sequence
Program
You can quit the Rhythm Sequence Program from any of
its display pages. When you quit, the sequence you have
made will be automatically saved.
To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program:
Press the [SEQUENCE] button on the panel.
The Voice Display appears, indicating that the Rhythm
Sequence Program is closed.
Playing all sequences in order
You can also have up to all four Rhythm Sequences
automatically play in order, one after another.
1
2
When quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program, the
square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a
few seconds, indicating that the sequence is currently
being saved. Do not turn the power off while the
sequence is being saved.
Pressing one of the SEQ. buttons while a Rhythm
Sequence is playing back automatically cancels the
pressed sequence, and its LED turns off. You cannot
cancel a sequence that is currently playing. The SEQ.
lamp goes out when the sequence assigned to it is
finished playing.
Playing Rhythm Sequences
To play any of the Rhythm Sequences
you have created:
Press the appropriate Sequence button
([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on the panel.
The SEQ button’s lamp lights.
Press the rhythm [START] button.
The Rhythm Sequences start from the lowest
number and play in order automatically to the
highest number. (For example, if you press Sequence
buttons 4, 2 and 1 in that order, the sequences will be
played back not in the order you pressed them, but
in their numeric order: 1, 2, then 4.) This function
effectively allows you to make a long Rhythm
Sequence that exceeds the 140-pattern memory limit
of a single sequence.
NOTICE
1
Press the desired Sequence buttons,
making sure that all their LEDs are lit.
To start a sequence using the Left
Footswitch:
You can start or stop the Rhythm Sequence playback
using the left footswitch.
1
2
Press the rhythm [START] button.
The rhythm in the selected sequence starts playback.
When one of the four Rhythm Sequences is playing,
each programmed rhythm that plays is indicated by
the lit LED of the Rhythm buttons.
172
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
2
Press the desired Sequence buttons,
making sure that all their LEDs are lit.
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the
panel to call up the Footswitch display,
LEFT Page.
Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to a USB
3
Set the control mode of the Footswitch
to RHYTHM STOP.
(See page 174 for information about the Footswitch
settings.)
4
Press the Left Footswitch with your
right foot to turn the sequence on.
Pressing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of
the sequence playback cancels the Rhythm
Sequence.
When you are playing a Rhythm Sequence that is
made up of several sequences (SEQ. buttons),
pressing the Left footswitch turns off the currently
playing Rhythm Sequence, and pressing it again
starts the next sequence.
Saving Rhythm Pattern and
Rhythm Sequence Data to a
USB Flash Drive
You can save your own rhythm patterns (created in the
Rhythm Pattern Program) and Rhythm Sequences
(created in the Rhythm Sequence Program) to a USB
flash drive. Refer to the section “Saving Registrations and
Other Data to a Unit” on page 116 for instructions.
When loading your original Rhythm data from a USB
flash drive back to the Electone, be sure to stop the
rhythm if it is playing. Loading cannot be executed when
a rhythm is running.
Copying a Rhythm Sequence
You can copy a Rhythm Sequence stored on a sequence
button to another button. You can also add a Rhythm
Sequence to the end of another Rhythm Sequence.
1
10
Press the EDIT [COPY] or [ADD] button
in the Sequence Menu page.
Rhythm Program
2
Select the destination sequence for the
copy operation in the Sequence Menu
page.
The Copy From or Add From display appears.
NOTE
If you add a Rhythm Sequence to another Rhythm
Sequence that has an ending at the end, the section will
automatically change to MAIN A and the new sequence
will be added after the MAIN A part.
3
Select the number of the desired
Rhythm Sequence program to which
you want to copy or to which you want
to add.
A message appears prompting confirmation of
operation.
4
Press the [COPY] or [ADD] button to
copy or add the Rhythm Sequence.
Press [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
5
If necessary, edit the sequence.
Refer to the section “Editing an existing Rhythm
Sequence” on page 170 and/or “Editing an existing
Registration Sequence” on page 171.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
173
11 Foot Controllers
The Electone features a variety of convenient foot-operated controllers that allow you to execute various
performance functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard.
1
Footswitches
The Electone has two Footswitches on the main
expression pedal. The Right Footswitch is used for the
Registration Shift function. The Left Footswitch can be
set to control one of the following functions: Rhythm,
Glide, and Rotary speaker.
See page 97 for the details of the Registration Shift
function or Right Footswitch.
The explanation of the Left Footswitch is given here.
Left Footswitch
2
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.
Press the [LEFT] button at the top right
of the display to call up the LEFT Page.
Right Footswitch
Expression
Pedal
In this display, you can assign the control function to
the Left Footswitch: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary
Speaker.
If you choose OFF here, the Left Footswitch will not
control any function.
NOTE
When the Next Page function of the score display is
assigned to the left foot switch, and if rhythm, glide and/or
rotary speaker are assigned to the left foot switch as well,
pressing the foot switch performs both the assigned
function and the Next Page function.
For details on the Next Page function, refer to page 123.
174
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Footswitches
Controlling the Rhythm
Controlling Glide
You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the
rhythm sections by using the Left Footswitch.
1
2
4
You can control the Glide effect by using the Left
Footswitch.
3
5
1 STOP
Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the
Footswitch.
2 BREAK
When you press the Footswitch, the Break section turns
on. This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on
the panel.
1
2
Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of
the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it
slowly returns the pitch to the original.
1 Voice Selections (UPPER1/UPPER2/
LEAD1/LEAD2/LOWER1/LOWER2)
Select the desired Voice section(s) to which the Glide
function is to be applied.
3 MAIN A – MAIN D
2 TIME
These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] –
[D] buttons on the panel.
For example, when the [MAIN A] button is selected in
this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm
section switches to Main A or Fill In A.
Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other
words, how gradually the pitch returns when the
Footswitch is released. Higher values make the speed
slower.
Range: 1 – 5
Foot Controllers
4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3
11
These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3]
buttons on the panel. For example, when the INTRO [1]
button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section switches to Intro 1.
5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3
These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3]
buttons on the panel. For example, when the ENDING
[1] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section switches to Ending 1.
After the ending pattern is played, the rhythm stops.
Reference page
• Rhythm Structure (page 55)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
175
Foot Pedal (sold separately)
Controlling Rotary Speaker
You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) by
using the Left Footswitch.
Reference page
• Rotary Speaker (page 47)
Foot Pedal (sold separately)
The Foot Pedal can be used to turn one of the following
on and off: Sustain effect, Melody On Chord function,
Lead Slide effect, or Solo function.
NOTE
• One or more functions can be assigned to the Foot Pedal
simultaneously. This enables you to use the Foot Pedal to instantly
turn on/off all assigned functions.
• The foot pedal which can be used is FC4A/FC5.
• Other than the above-mentioned functions, the foot pedal cannot
be assigned the functions.
Controlling Sustain
When the [Rotary Speaker] button is selected in this
display and you press the Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker
effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds to
the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use
this function, you’ll need to make the appropriate Rotary
Speaker settings for each Voice section or Organ Flute
Voice. For details, see page 47.
You can control the on/off status of sustain for the Upper
and Lower keyboards by using the Foot Pedal. Sustain for
the Pedalboard cannot be controlled.
1
Make sure that the Upper and/or Lower
Sustain buttons have been turned on.
Calling up another page of the
music score
Reference page
From the MDR display, you can call up another page of
the music score by using the Left Footswitch. For details,
see page 123.
• Sustain (page 46)
2
Controlling the Super
Articulation Voices
Connect a Foot Pedal to the [FOOT
PEDAL] jack located on the rear of the
Electone.
Sustain is off in this status.
Reference page
• Connecting a Foot Pedal (page 186)
By following the settings on page 43, you can control the
Super Articulation Voice (of which the name starts with
“S-”) by using the Left Footswitch.
3
To apply sustain, press the Foot Pedal.
Sustain is constantly applied as long as the Foot
Pedal is pressed. Releasing the Foot Pedal turns
sustain off.
1 When the Foot Pedal is not
connected:
Sustain is applied constantly, as long as the front
panel Sustain buttons are on.
2 When the Foot Pedal is connected:
Sustain is canceled even if the front panel Sustain
buttons are on.
176
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Foot Pedal (sold separately)
3 When the Foot Pedal is continuously
pressed:
Sustain is applied constantly, as long as the front
panel Sustain buttons are on.
Controlling Lead Slide with Foot
Pedal (sold separately)
1
Controlling Melody On Chord
1
2
Reference page
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button on the
front panel.
The Melody On Chord section appears in the right
half of the display.
Call up the Voice Condition display
Page 2 of the Lead Voice section to
which you want to apply the Lead Slide
effect.
• Voice Condition display (page 42)
2
Press the [FOOT PEDAL] button of the
Slide section on the display.
Set the Foot Pedal control to “ON,” and
select one of the modes (1 to 3).
Reference page
• Melody On Chord (page 65)
3
Press the Foot Pedal when you want to
apply the Slide effect.
The Slide effect is applied as long as the Foot Pedal is
pressed. Releasing the Foot Pedal, cancels the Lead
Slide effect.
You can turn the Solo function on/off by using the Foot
Pedal. See page 27 for more information.
3
Foot Controllers
Controlling the Solo function
11
Press the Foot Pedal when you want to
apply the M.O.C. effect.
The M.O.C. effect is applied constantly, as long as
the Foot Pedal is pressed.
When you release the Foot Pedal, the M.O.C. effect
is cancelled.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
177
Expression Pedals
Expression Pedals
The Expression pedal can be used to control the volume
with your foot as you play.
The 2nd Expression Pedal can be used to control the
Pitch Bend and the Tempo of the Rhythm. It also features
a center detent for easily returning to the middle (zero)
position. The explanation of the 2nd Expression Pedal is
given here.
In this display, you can assign the Pitch Bend control
or Tempo control to the 2nd Expression Pedal. If
both Pitch Bend and Rhythm Tempo controls are set
to ON, both functions are applied when you press
the 2nd Expression Pedal.
Generally one of them is assigned to the 2nd
Expression Pedal.
Controlling Pitch Bend
Reference page
• Getting Started (page 13)
2nd Expression Pedal
1
Expression Pedal
1
Press the [UTILITY] button on the front
panel.
The Utility display appears.
2
Press the [EXP.] button in the upper
right of the display to call up the EXP.
(Expression) Page.
2
1 MODE
Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control. Each
step changes the pitch range by a semitone.
Range: 1 – 12
The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of
pitch variation (over +/- two semitones); the setting 12
(WIDE) results in a large amount of pitch variation (over
+/- one octave).
2 Voice Sections (PITCH BEND)
Selects the Voice sections to which the Pitch Bend
function will be applied, and turns the function ON.
Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for
Upper Voices 1 and 2, Lead Voice 1 and 2, Pedal Voices 1
and 2.
178
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Expression Pedals
Controlling the Rhythm Tempo
1
2
1 MODE
Determines the range of tempo change.
Range: 1 – 12
The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of
tempo change (70% – 140%); the setting 12 (WIDE)
results in a large amount of tempo change (50% – 200%).
2 TEMPO
When you want to control the tempo with the 2nd
Expression Pedal, set this to “ON.”
When set to on, pressing the pedal down with your toe
speeds up the tempo and pressing it back with your heel
slows it down. Because of the spring-loaded center
detent, you can instantly return to the normal tempo by
releasing your foot from the pedal.
11
Foot Controllers
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
179
12 Transpose and Pitch Controls
There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows you to change the
key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning.
Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display. (The settings here cannot be recorded to the Music
Data Recorder.)
1
2
Press the [UTILITY] button.
2 PITCH
The Utility display appears.
Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each
step changes the pitch by 0.2 Hz. The default Pitch is
440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).
Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz
Press the [PITCH] button at the top right
of the display to call up the PITCH Page.
You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each
Voice section, in the Voice Condition display. For more
information, see page 44.
NOTE
The Transpose/Pitch setting here is not applied to an XG Song.
1
2
In this display, you can change the Transpose and
Pitch settings by using the
buttons on the
display or the Data Control dial.
1 TRANSPOSE
Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and
is adjustable in half-steps (semitones).
Range: -6 – +6
180
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
13 Connections
On the backside and front left side of this Electone is a separate panel equipped with various input/output
terminals and miscellaneous controls, including a terminal for connecting a Foot Pedal (sold separately).
3 MIC jack
Accessory Jacks and
Controls
This section provides brief explanations for each jack/
control on the Electone. For details on connecting to
external devices, see page 183.
For connecting a mono input, such as a microphone. This
Electone outputs the microphone signal, with reverb
processing, through the OUTPUT jacks or AUX OUT
jacks.
Reference page
• Connecting a microphone (page 185)
4 MIC VOLUME knob
1
For adjusting the level of input signal from the MIC jack.
5
2
3
4
5 USB TO DEVICE terminal
1 DC IN jack
For connecting USB storage devices such as USB flash
drive.
For connecting the AC adaptor.
13
Connections
2 PHONES jack
For connection of a stereo headphone set. When
headphones are connected to this jack, sound to the
Electone’s speaker system is automatically cut off,
allowing you to play without disturbing others.
Reference page
• Using headphones (page 183)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
181
Accessory Jacks and Controls
6
7
8
8-1
9
)
!
!-1
8-2
@
!-2
6 FOOT PEDAL jack
) AUX IN (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks
For connecting to a Foot Pedal (sold separately).
This pair of stereo phone jacks is for connection to an
external device. The signal from the connected external
device sounds from external speakers connected to the
Electone.
Reference page
• Foot Pedal (Sold Separately) (page 176)
7 MIDI IN/OUT terminals
For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer
or sequencer. You can also use these to connect with a
computer that has a MIDI Interface.
Reference pages
• Controlling external MIDI devices from the Electone
(page 185)
• Controlling the Electone from an external device (page 186)
• Connection with Computer (page 187)
8 USB terminals
Reference page
• Outputting the Sound of an external device through the
external speakers of the Electone (page 185)
! AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) jacks
!-1 SUB (1, 2) jacks
For connection to an external amplifier/speaker
system. These outputs can be selected for each part.
The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled
with the MASTER VOLUME dial.
8-1 [USB TO HOST] terminal
!-2 MAIN (L/L+R, R) jacks
For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To
connect to a computer, make sure that an
appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the
computer.
This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an
external amplifier/speaker. The output level is fixed
and cannot be controlled.
Reference page
• Connection with Computer (page 187)
8-2 [USB TO DEVICE] terminal
For connecting USB storage devices (such as USB
flash drive).
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial
interface for connecting a computer with peripheral
devices.
Reference pages
• Playing the sounds of the Electone through an external audio
system (page 183)
• Recording the sounds of the Electone to an external recorder
(page 184)
@ OUTPUT (L/L+R, R) jacks
This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external
amplifier/speaker. Connect the included speakers.
The output level can be controlled.
NOTE
• While using the headphone jack, the sound is not outputted from
the OUTPUT jacks.
• Speakers are not included with the ELCU-M02. Use commercially
available powered speakers.
9 TO PEDAL terminal
For connecting to the Pedal Unit.
Reference page
• Connecting a Pedal Unit (page 186)
182
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Reference page
Recording the sounds of the Electone to an external recorder
(page 184)
Connection Examples – External Devices
Connection Examples –
External Devices
CAUTION
Before connecting the Electone to other electronic
components, turn off the power to all the components.
Before turning the power of the components on or off, set all
volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or
damage to the components may occur.
Using headphones
To use headphones, connect them to one of the PHONES
jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks).
Using a mixer for live performance
Generally, when you use this Electone on stage (in
concert, etc.), you should connect it to a mixer. By using a
mixer, you can easily adjust the volume and tone quality
of each component.
To connect to a mixer, use the AUX OUT jacks of the
Electone. The Electone features two types of AUX OUT
jacks: MAIN and SUB, allowing you to assign some parts
of the Electone's output to the SUB jacks and the other
parts to the MAIN jacks. In this way, you can apply
effects to the specific parts or adjust the volume balance
among the parts with an external mixer. For details, see
“Selecting Outputs for Each Part” on page 184.
AUX OUT of this Electone is a a terminal of LEVEL
FIXED terminal which outputs on a fixed level.
Main Speakers
(ex. Powered-amp Speakers)
Monitor
Speakers
Sound
PHONES
Sound
Sound
Sound
Other keyboard
External
effect
device
Playing the sounds of the Electone
through an external audio system
MIC.
Mixer
Sound
By using the OUTPUT jacks, you can connect your
Electone to external powered speakers. If you’re
connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the
OUTPUT L/L+R jack.
AUX OUT L/L+R
R
AUX OUT
(SUB)
1
Some
Parts
2
Speaker (Right)
R
The OUTPUT terminal can be used for connection the
Electone with a mixer.
The OUTPUT terminal can be adjusted the output level
by using the MASTER VOLUME dial.
Jacks
NOTE
• When sounding the Electone from the speakers using the
OUTPUT jacks, connecting a set of headphones automatically
disables the sound from the speakers.
• Speakers are not included with the ELCU-M02. Please use
commercially available powered speakers.
13
Connections
Speaker (Left)
AUX OUT
(MAIN)
L/L+R
Other
Parts
Output Type
AUX OUT MAIN jacks
L/L+R, R
Unbalanced*
LEVEL FIXED
AUX OUT SUB jacks
1, 2
Unbalanced
LEVEL FIXED
OUTPUT jacks
L/L+R, R
Unbalanced
LEVEL FIXED
*The Unbalanced line is intended for line-level signals.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
183
Connection Examples – External Devices
Power-on procedure
Before turning the power on to all components, set all
volume levels to minimum (0) then turn on the power in
the following order:
(1) Electone and external keyboard(s)
(2) Mixer
(3) Powered Speaker
To turn the power off, first turn down the volume for
each device, then turn off the power in the reverse order
(3 → 2 → 1).
Selecting Outputs for Each Part
You can assign each individual part of the Electone’s
sounds such as Voice, Percussion, to be output from
specific AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and/or SUB.
1
2
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the
GLOBAL Page of the Utility display.
Press the [AUX OUT] button in the upper
right of the display to call up the AUX
OUT Page.
If you select a setting other than MAIN, no sound
will be heard from the headphones and monitor
speakers because the parts assigned to SUB1, SUB2
and SUB1&2 will not be output through PHONES
and OUTPUT jacks.
Any parts assigned to the AUX OUT MAIN or
SUB1&2 will be output in stereo (1: left, 2: right).
Any parts assigned to AUX OUT SUB1 or SUB2 will
be output in mono.
NOTE
• Chorus and variation effects of the Rhythm, and Reverb
are not applied to the sound output through SUB1, SUB2
and SUB1&2.
• The settings in the Utility display are automatically saved
when another display is called up.
Recording the sounds of the
Electone to an external recorder
By using the AUX OUT jacks, you can record your
performance sound to an external audio recorder.
Audio cable
Recording
LINE IN R
You can assign individual parts to the AUX OUT
MAIN and/or SUB jacks: each Voice section, Organ
Flute Voice, Main drum, Add drum,
Accompaniment, Keyboard Percussion, XG and
microphone to the AUX OUT MAIN and/or SUB
jacks.
3
Turn the desired output on for each
part.
You can select these from MAIN, SUB1, SUB2 and
SUB1&2.
184
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
AUX OUT
(MAIN) L/L+R
L
External recorder
R
NOTE
If you want to record the sound input from the AUX IN jack
together with the Electone sound, use the AUX OUT standard
phone jack on the rear side of the keyboard.
Connection Examples – External Devices
Outputting the sound of an
external device through the
speakers of this Electone
You can connect the AUX IN jacks of the Electone with
the LINE OUT of an external device, such as a CD player.
The sound from the CD player is output from an external
audio system via the Electone.
First turn on the power of the external device(s), then
that of the Electone. Reverse this order when you turn the
power off.
Playing
Speaker (Left)
2
To adjust the volume/reverb:
1
2
Playing
Speaker (Right)
Playing
Use the INPUT VOLUME knob to set the
microphone volume.
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel
to call up the Utility display.
Using the MIC. REVERB and VOLUME
sliders in the GLOBAL Page, adjust the
amount of the reverb applied to the
microphone, and the volume.
Reference page
• Reverb (page 44)
External
audio device
If you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use
only the AUX IN L/L+R jack.
Connecting a microphone
1
Connect your microphone to the MIC
jack.
A dynamic microphone is recommended.
MIC
Controlling external MIDI devices
from the Electone
You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a
MIDI keyboard (or tone generator), combining them
with the Electone and letting you create even richer, more
multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive
channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit
channels on your Electone.)
The Electone transmits as digital data a variety of
performance messages along with note information,
including values that indicate how far the expression
pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the
keyboard. How the connected external device responds
to these messages depends on the particular device.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
13
Connections
By connecting a microphone to the Electone, you can
enjoy singing along with your own performance. The
Electone outputs your vocals through the external audio
system connected to the AUX OUT or OUTPUT jacks of
the Electone.
No sound from the microphone can be heard even
though you raise the volume here, unless you turn
the INPUT VOLUME knob to the right. Similarly,
no reverb can be heard even though you raise the
reverb level here, unless you raise the total reverb
level with the panel REVERB control.
185
Connection Examples – External Devices
MIDI messages
Connecting a Pedal Unit
MIDI cable
MIDI IN
External MIDI device
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
If you use a USB wireless LAN adaptor, MIDI
communication is not available via neither the [USB TO
HOST] terminal nor the MIDI terminal.
Use this Electone attaching the pedal unit by necessity.
Connecting a Pedal Unit to the Electone allows you to use
the Pedalboard, right and left Footswitches, Expression
Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal. These foot operated
controls allow you to execute various performance
functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your
hands from the keyboard. If you connect and disconnect
the Pedal Unit, you must be sure to first turn off the
power of the Electone, then use the cable to make the
connection. If you connect and disconnect the cable
while the power to the Electone is on, Electone and the
Pedal Unit can be damaged.
Messages
NOTE
Dedicated cable
When you are using the MDR, MIDI data cannot be transmitted.
TO MAIN
Controlling the Electone from an
external device
You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to
remotely play the sounds of your Electone and change its
Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit
channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive
channels on your Electone.)
TO PEDAL
Reference pages
• Voices for Each Keyboard (page 24)
• Footswitches (page 174)
• Expression Pedals (page 178)
MIDI messages
MIDI cable
MIDI OUT
Connecting a Foot Pedal
MIDI keyboard or synthesizer
MIDI IN
Connecting an optional Foot Pedal (sold separately) to
the Electone allows you to execute various performance
functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your
hands from the keyboard. To do this, you must assign a
desired function to the Foot Pedal.
Foot Pedal
If you use the [USB TO HOST] terminal, MIDI
communication is not available via the both of the [USB
TO HOST] terminal and the MIDI terminal.
FOOT PEDAL
NOTE
When you are using the MDR, MIDI data cannot be received.
Reference pages
• Foot Pedal (Sold Separately) (page 176)
• Controlling Sustain (page 176)
• Controlling Melody On Chord (page 177)
• Controlling Lead Slide (page 177)
• Controlling the Solo Function (page 177)
186
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Connection with Computer
Connection with Computer
By using the [USB TO HOST] terminal, you can connect
the Electone and computer enabling the MIDI
communication between both. Install the USB-MIDI
driver to your computer, then make the MIDI connection
between the Electone and computer. Regarding the USBMIDI driver, you can download the latest version from
the Yamaha website:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a
whole new world of musical possibilities. You can save
your original Songs to computer and create notation
(score writing application or sequencing software is
needed), and even upload your original Electone Song
data to your own website, to promote your talents or
share Songs with your friends. You can also control the
Electone from the computer, for example, by playing a
MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of
your Electone.
NOTE
When you are using the MDR, MIDI data cannot be transferred
from the computer.
Precautions when using the [USB TO
HOST] terminal
When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST]
terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing
to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or
losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes,
restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn
the power to the instrument off then on again.
NOTICE
• Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB
3.0 cables cannot be used.
• Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO
HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of
the computer (such as suspend, sleep, standby).
• Before turning on the power to the instrument,
connect the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
• Execute the following before turning the power to the
instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB
cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
- Quit any open application software on the computer.
- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from
the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing
notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.)
• While the computer is connected to the instrument,
you should wait for six seconds or more between
these operations: (1) when turning the power of the
instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately
connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.
The [USB TO HOST] terminal of the Electone can be
connected to the USB terminal of the computer using a
USB cable.
Computer
USB cable
13
USB TO HOST
Connections
If you use the [USB TO HOST] terminal, MIDI
communication is not available via the both of the [USB
TO HOST] terminal and the MIDI terminal.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
187
MIDI Control
3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
MIDI Control
When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI
device (such as a synthesizer or computer), you can
determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device,
or how the Electone is controlled.
1
2
Press the [UTILITY] button in the panel
to call up the Utility display.
Press the [MIDI] button at the top right
of the display to call up the MIDI Page.
Switches control over the displayed items between the
Electone (INTERNAL) or the connected device
(EXTERNAL).
3 -1 LEAD 1
Determines Internal or External control of the Lead
Voices.
INT. (Internal): Lead Voice 1 is played from the
Upper keyboard of the Electone. (If the To Lower
function is on, it is played from the Lower
keyboard.)
EXT. (External): Lead Voice 1 is played from the
connected instrument via MIDI channel 4.
3 -2 SYNC.
1
2
3
To synchronize playback with an external MIDI
device, you can use either the instrument's internal
clock (INT.) or MIDI clock signals from the external
device (EXT.).
INT. (Internal): The instrument uses its own
internal clock.
3-1 3-2 3-3
1 OUTPUT
3 -3 EXPRESSION
For setting the channels over which MIDI information
will be transmitted. Any channel from 1 through 16 can
be assigned to each keyboard (the Upper keyboard, the
Lower keyboard and the Pedalboard) as well as the
Expression pedal and 2nd Expression pedal. The MIDI
messages for each keyboard and Expression pedal will be
sent on the channels set here. You must set the transmit
channel here to match the receive channel of the
connected device.
Pressing each OUTPUT button calls up the channel
selection pop-up menu. After you select the desired
channel, the pop-up menu automatically closes.
The Expression pedal and 2nd Expression pedal can be
set to “OFF” (MIDI information will not be transmitted).
On the 2nd Expression pedal, CC#4 by which MIDI
information is output as Second Expression can be also
set.
Determines the control of the expression pedal
functions. Ordinarily, this control is set to AUTO.
2 MIDI OUT FILTER
Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being
transmitted from the Electone. After Touch, second
Expression and Rhythm start/stop are automatically
filtered.Set the parameter for which you wish to disable
transmission to ON. Set the parameter for which you
wish to disable transmission to ON.
NOTE
If you set Second Expression to on in the MIDI OUT FILTER
parameters, the setting in the OUTPUT (1) parameters will be
disabled.
188
EXT. (External): The instrument uses MIDI clock
signals from the external device (MIDI).
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
AUTO: Internal and External is automatically
switched.
INT. (Internal): You can manually control the
expression pedal even during MDR playback.
EXT. (External): While playing the MDR or
receiving MIDI messages, the expression pedal is
invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded
data in a USB flash drive or received MIDI data.)
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
Connecting to an iPhone/
iPad
You can connect a smart device such as an iPhone or iPad
to the instrument. By using an application tool on your
smart device, you can take advantage of convenient
functions and get more enjoyment out of this instrument.
For details on connections, refer to the “For Electone
users iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website.
http://download.yamaha.com/
For information about compatible smart devices and
application tools, access the following page:
http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/
Connection with a USB wireless LAN
adaptor (sold separately)
The USB wireless LAN adaptor lets you connect the
Electone to an iPhone/iPad wirelessly. Please make sure
to use the compatible USB wireless LAN adaptor listed in
the Compatible USB Device List downloadable from the
Yamaha website:
Wireless LAN settings
Start wireless connection according to the instructions in
the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website,
then make sure to make appropriate setups from the
following instructions: “Automatic Setup by WPS,”
“Displaying available networks in the wireless LAN and
connecting to a network,” “Manual Setup” or
“Connecting by the Ad Hoc Mode.” Refer to pages 190 –
193 in this Manual, then set up as required.
If there is no access point, follow the instructions in
“Connecting by the Ad Hoc Mode” (page 193).
Reference pages
• Wireless LAN Detailed Settings (page 194)
• Initialize the wireless LAN settings (page 196)
NOTICE
• When you use the instrument along with an application on
your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you first set
“Airplane Mode” to “ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to “ON” on your
iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by
communication.
• Do not place your iPhone/ iPad in an unstable position.
Doing so may cause the device to fall and result in
damage.
NOTE
Before using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, be sure to read
“Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” on
page 108 in chapter 7.
http://download.yamaha.com/
To enable a wireless connection between the Electone and
an iPhone/iPad, follow the instructions in the “For
Electone users iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the
website, and also refer back to “Wireless LAN settings” in
this manual for the specific Wireless LAN settings you’ll
need to make for wireless connection.
NOTE
MIDI and [USB TO HOST] terminals are automatically disabled
when the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected.
13
Connections
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
189
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
Automatic Setup by WPS
If your access point supports WPS, you can easily connect
the instrument to access point by WPS, without making
settings, such as key input, etc.
5
The “Connected” indication appears when
connection between the instrument and the access
point is successful.
NOTE
Check whether your access point supports WPS by referring to
the owner’s manual for the access point you are using.
1
2
“Connected” indication appears.
Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then press
the [WIRELESS LAN] button on the
display to call up the WIRELESS LAN
Page.
6
Wireless LAN mode
3
Make sure that the wireless LAN mode
is set to Infrastructure Mode.
If the wireless LAN mode is set to Ad Hoc Mode,
press the [MODE CHANGE] button in the display
to switch to the Infrastructure Mode (page 193).
4
Press the [WPS] button in the
WIRELESS LAN Page.
A message appears prompting confirmation of
operation. You can cancel the operation at this point
by pressing the [CANCEL] button.
190
Press the [OK] button to start WPS
setup, then press the WPS button on
your access point within two minutes.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
After successfully enabling connection
between the instrument and the access
point, connect the iPhone/iPad to the
access point by referring to the “For
Electone users iPhone/iPad Connection
Manual.”
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
Displaying available networks in the
wireless LAN and connecting to a
network
5
Select the desired network by pressing
the button shown the name of the
network in the display.
Select the desired Network for connection from the
Network list in the display by following the steps below.
For a network without a lock icon:
1
For a network with a lock icon:
2
Connecting starts.
Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor.
You need to enter the proper password, which is
identical to that in the settings on the Access Point.
For details on how to enter characters, refer to the
“Changing the Song Name” on page 114. After
entering the password, press the [OK] button in the
display to finalize the setting. This operation starts
connecting automatically.
Press the [UTILITY] button, then press
the [WIRELESS LAN] button on the
display to call up the WIRELESS LAN
Page.
The “Connected” indication appears when the instrument
and the access point have been successfully connected.
Wireless LAN mode
6
3
After successfully enabling connection
between the instrument and the access
point, connect the iPhone/iPad to the
access point by referring to the “For
Electone users iPhone/iPad Connection
Manual.”
13
Make sure that the wireless LAN mode
setting is Infrastructure Mode.
4
Connections
When the wireless LAN mode is Ad Hoc mode,
press the [MODE CHANGE] button in the display
to switch to the Infrastructure Mode (page 193).
Press the [UPDATE] button in the
display to call up the network list.
For a network with a lock icon (
enter the proper password.
), you need to
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
191
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
Manual Setup
SECURITY
If you cannot find the desired network on the display, it
may be a network that is closed or hidden. In this case,
you will need to manually input SSID, Security and
Password settings for connection.
Press the [SECURITY] button in the display to call
up the display for security select, then press either
the [NONE], [WPA2-PSK (AES)] or [WEP] button.
NOTE
Press the [PASSWORD] button to call up the display
for Password input, then set the password in the
same way as SSID. Press the [OK] button to finalize
the setting.
PASSWORD
About the confirmation and changes in the access point
settings, refer to the manual of the access point.
1
2
Perform the same operation as in steps
1 – 3 in the “Displaying available
networks in the wireless LAN and
connecting to a network” instructions
on page 191.
NOTE
The password cannot be set when you select [NONE] for
the security setting.
4
Press to select [OTHER] at the bottom of
the network list.
Press the [CONNECT] button to start
connection.
The “Connected” indication appears when the instrument
and the access point have been successfully connected.
The OTHER NETWORK display will be shown.
5
3
Set the SSID, Security and Password to
the same as the settings on the access
point.
Set the same contents with the setting contents by
the access point side.
SSID
Press the [SSID] button in the display to call up the
display for SSID input, then enter the SSID. For
details on how to enter the characters, refer to the
“Changing the Song Name” on page 114. Up to 32
characters (half size), alphanumeric characters,
marks can be entered. After entering the SSID, press
the [OK] button to finalize the setting.
192
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
After successfully enabling connection
between the instrument and the access
point, connect the iPhone/iPad to the
access point by referring to the “For
Electone users iPhone/iPad Connection
Manual.”
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
Connecting by the Ad Hoc Mode
1
Set the Wireless LAN mode to “Ad Hoc
Mode.”
Refer to “Wireless LAN Mode.”
2
The settings for the instrument are
complete if you do not need to change
the SSID and so on. Connect the
iPhone/iPad to the instrument by
referring to the “For Electone users
iPhone/iPad Connection Manual.”
You can change the SSID, Security, etc. from the
DETAIL display.
Reference page
• Wireless LAN Detailed Settings (page 194)
Wireless LAN Mode
1
2
Perform the same operation as in steps
1 – 3 in the “Displaying available
networks in the wireless LAN and
connecting to a network” instructions
on page 191.
Set the Wireless LAN mode.
You can set between two modes:
INFRASTRUCTURE and AD HOC. Press the
[MODE CHANGE] button on the display to call up
a message prompting confirmation of the operation,
then press the [OK] button to execute the operation.
13
Connections
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
193
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
Wireless LAN Detailed Settings
You can set the detailed settings for each mode: INFRASTRUCTURE and AD HOC. There is no need to change or make
any settings if you’ve enabled connection between the iPhone/iPad and instrument.
Reference page
• Wireless LAN Mode (page 193)
1
Set the Wireless LAN mode, then call up the display for detailed settings by pressing the
[DETAIL] button in the WIRELESS LAN display.
INFRASTRUCTURE mode
AD HOC mode
DETAIL (IP ADDRESS)
DETAIL (WIRELESS)
DETAIL (OTHER)
DETAIL (IP ADDRESS)
DETAIL (OTHER)
194
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
2
As necessary, set the detailed settings.
Wireless LAN mode
INFRASTRUCTURE
mode
AD HOC mode
Display
DETAIL
(IP ADDRESS)
display
DETAIL
(WIRELESS)
display
DETAIL
(IP ADDRESS)
display
Item
DHCP
DETAIL (OTHER)
display
0.0.0.0
SUBNET MASK
0.0.0.0
GATEWAY
0.0.0.0
DNS SERVER 1
0.0.0.0
DNS SERVER 2
0.0.0.0
SSID
ap-(model name
such as “ELC-02”)(last 6 characters of
MAC address in
lowercase); or simply
“ap-(model name),” if
MAC address cannot
be used.
CHANNEL
11
SECURITY
–
PASSWORD
–
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
HOST NAME
ON
192.168.0.1
Setting/Input
Determines whether or not DHCP is
used. If your router is compatible with
DHCP, select [ON] (set DNS
automatically) here.
Select on or off by pressing [ON] or
[OFF] button on the display.
Set the wireless LAN detailed settings.
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,
DNS Server1, DNS Server2 can be set
when DHCP is set to Off but cannot be
set when DHCP set to On. For details on
confirmation and changes in the setting
of the access point on the router side,
refer to the owner’s manual for the
product you are using.
For details on how to enter characters,
refer to the instructions “Changing the
Song Name” on page 114. The setting
range is 0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255.
To find the specific MAC address, see
“MAC address” below.
• SSID, Security and Password can be set
in the same way as those described in
the section “Manual Setup” on
page 192. The last 6 characters of the
MAC address must be entered in
lowercase.
• Press the number button which appears
by pressing the [CHANNEL] button on
the display then, select the channel.
• DHCP and IP Address can be set in the
same way as those of
INFRASTRUCTURE mode in this table.
• The Subnet Mask value can be input in
the numerical input display, which is
called up by pressing the [SUBNET
MASK] button in the display.
255.255.255.0
Set the Host name. Up to 57 characters
(half size) including alphanumeric
characters, the “_” (underscore) and “-”
(hyphen) character. For details on how
to enter characters, refer to the
instructions “Changing the Song Name”
on page 114. After entering the
characters, press the [OK] button on the
display to finalize the setting.
The last 6 characters of the MAC
address must be entered in lowercase.
–
Shows the MAC address of the USB
wireless LAN adaptor. You cannot
change the MAC address here.
LAN DRIVER
VERSION
–
This only displays the version of the LAN
driver; the setting cannot be made.
00000000
13
Connections
(Model name such as
“ELC-02”)-(last 6
characters of MAC
address in
lowercase); or simply
“(model name),” if
MAC address cannot
be used.
MAC ADDRESS
STATUS
3
ON
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
INFRASTRUCTURE
mode / AD HOC mode
Default setting
Shows the error code of network
function. “00000000” means no error.
Save the settings.
Set the detailed settings, then press the [SAVE] button on the display. When the saving operation is completed, the
detailed settings display returns to the previous display.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
195
Connecting to an iPhone/iPad
Initialize the wireless LAN settings
“Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)” on page 23 in chapter 1 does not affect the wireless LAN settings, which can be
initialized by the following procedure. Be careful when executing initialize, since it erases all the wireless LAN settings
and replaces them with the factory defaults.
1
2
Press the [UTILITY] button, then press the [WIRELESS LAN] button on the display to call
up the WIRELESS LAN Page.
Initialize the wireless LAN settings.
Press the [INITIALIZE] button on the display. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation.
Press the [OK] button to execute the operation, or the [CANCEL] button to cancel.
Glossary of Terms
196
Access point
A device which acts as a base station when transmitting data by wireless LAN.
Some access points are combined with modem functions.
Ad Hoc mode
Communication method for performing data communication with the terminal and other devices directly
without using a relay device, such as an access point of a wireless LAN.
DHCP
A standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can
be dynamically and automatically assigned each time the computer and the instrument connect to the
Internet.
DNS server
A server that maps names to actual IP addresses of devices connected to a network.
Gateway
A Gateway is a link between two computer programs or systems.
Infrastructure mode
Communication method for performing data communication with each terminal via a relay device, such
as an access point of the wireless LAN.
IP address
A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network that indicate the device’s
location on the network.
LAN
Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a
single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable.
Router
A device that allows multiple devices (e.g., computers, your Yamaha instrument) to share the same
Internet connection.
Site
Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the
collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “https://www.yamaha.com/en/” is referred to as the
Yamaha site.
SSID
A name used to identify a particular access point, or the wireless networks set as the access point.
Subnet mask
The structure for dividing a large-scale network.
Wireless LAN
A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection.
WPS
A structure to easily make a setting of wireless LAN by pushing only the WPS buttons of an access point
and the wireless LAN device.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
14 Appendix
3
Stand Assembly
CAUTION
• Be sure to install the stand with two or more people.
• Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your
finger(s).
• Always place the stand on a flat, stable surface. Placing
the stand on uneven surfaces may result in it becoming
unstable or overturn, causing the Main unit to drop and
possibly resulting in injury.
• Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed
purpose. The stand is not designed to hold anything other
than the specified keyboard. Placing any object other than
the specified keyboard on the stand may result in the
object dropping or the stand overturning.
2
Fix the joints.
2-1 Extend the frame so that the joints are
straight.
• Do not apply excessive force to the Main unit as it may
cause the stand to overturn or the Main unit to drop.
• Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws are
tight and firm before use. If not, the stand may overturn,
the keyboard may drop, or may result in injury to the user.
Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are
provided.
Stand
Braces
NOTE
Once the joints reach the stoppers, the frame is at the
maximum length. Do not try to force them beyond this.
2-2 Loosen the fixation bolts and slide them
1
into position, then tighten the screws with
your hand.
Unfold the folded stand.
Unfold the stand as shown.
1
2
14
2
1
NOTE
Appendix
3
If the fixation bolts cannot be slid into position, make sure
that the joints are straight, as shown in the illustration of
step 2-1.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
197
Installing the Speaker
3
Install the braces while pressing to
extend the frames by hand.
Installing the Speaker
Since the screws are attached to both below and
above the frame beforehand, align them to the
positions of the frame and brace, then tighten them
from the upper side first, by hand.
Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are
provided.
Speaker audio
cables x 2
Speakers x 2
Positioning hole
Speaker power
cords x 2
Fixing brackets x 2
The positioning screws are attached on the lower
side of the frame, and the positioning holes are at the
end of the braces.
1
Screws x 4
Install the fixing brackets to the
corresponding indentions on the frame.
NOTE
When removing the braces at disassembly, the screws of
the braces may hard to loosen. In this case, loosen the
screws while moving the braces lightly to the front, back,
left and right.
4
Raise the assembled stand as shown,
then confirm that all screws shown in
the illustration are tight and firm.
Insert the corresponding indentions to the notches
of the fixing brackets.
Assembly is completed.
198
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Installing the Pedal unit
2
Place the speaker onto the fixing
bracket, and secure it by fingertightening the two screws from the
bottom surface.
Installing the Pedal unit
CAUTION
• Before installing/uninstalling, turn the power of the Main
unit off.
• Take care not to drop the Pedal unit or to pinch your
finger(s).
• Do not remove the expression pedal and the 2nd
Expression Pedal once they have been installed, since
this may cause a faulty contact and result in a
malfunction.
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size
ready.
As shown in the illustration below, since the speaker
fixing bracket faces upward when seen from the
front, the position of the screw hole can easily be
checked.
Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are
provided.
Install the 2nd Expression Pedal
Install the Expression Pedal
Pedal unit
3
Install the other speaker in the same
way.
Expression Pedal
1
Cord
2nd Expression Pedal
Install the Expression Pedal.
1-1 Remove the tape from the connector in the
hole of the Pedal unit.
1-2 Remove the screw.
14
Appendix
Be careful not to drop any screws inside the Pedal
unit during installation. Do not discard the screw;
you will need it later in step 2.
Installation is completed.
For instructions on connecting the speaker power
cords and the speaker audio cables, refer to
“Installing and Connecting the Main Unit” on
page 201.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
199
Installing the Pedal unit
1-3 Hold the cable connector so that the two
lines on the connector are facing upward,
then carefully plug it into the inside
connector on the bottom of the Expression
Pedal.
4
Attach the hollow parts on the rear of
the Pedal unit to the corresponding
indentions on the frame of the stand, as
shown below.
1-4 Install the Expression Pedal to the
corresponding indentation on the Pedal unit
by first fitting the protrusion on the back
side and then fitting the front side as
shown.
As you fit it in position, the front side of the
Expression Pedal is slightly lifted. When installing
the Expression Pedal, be careful to avoid catching
the connector.
Installation is completed.
To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly
sequence.
NOTE
For information on installing the connecting cord, refer to
page 201.
Convenient carrying handle
You can transport the Pedal unit by holding the carrying
handle on the rear.
2
Tighten the screw.
Fix the Expression Pedal to the Pedal unit while
holding the Expression Pedal, using the screw you
removed in step 1-2.
CAUTION
Do not hold the keys, since this may damage or result in
a malfunction.
3
200
As with the Expression Pedal, install the
2nd Expression Pedal, then fix it with
the screw.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Installing and Connecting the Main Unit
Installing and Connecting
the Main Unit
1
3
Connect one end of the included
speaker audio cable to the INPUT2 jack
on the rear of speakers and the other to
the OUTPUT jack on the rear of Main
unit.
Mount the Main unit.
Hold the Main unit horizontally (with two people),
and place it on the stand, aligning the rear panel
with the stoppers on the stand. Make sure that the
protrusion on the bottom of the Main unit fits inside
of the stand frames.
4
CAUTION
• Be careful not to drop the Main unit or to get your fingers
caught between the main unit and the stand parts.
• Do not hold the keys. Since this may damage or result in a
malfunction.
2
Rear of the speaker
Post-assembly checklist
Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the following
points:
• Are there any parts left over?
If so, read the assembly instructions again and correct
any mistakes you might have made.
• Is the Electone clear of doors and other movable
fixtures?
14
Appendix
Connect one end of the included cord to
the [TO MAIN] jack on the rear of Pedal
unit and the other to the [TO PEDAL]
jack on the rear of Main unit.
Connect the included speaker power
cord to the AC IN jack on the rear of the
speaker.
If not, move the Electone to an appropriate location.
• Does the Electone make a rattling noise when
you play it or move it?
If so, take the Main unit off of the stand and properly
tighten all screws.
Also, if the Main unit makes a creaking noise or seems
unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to the assembly
instructions and diagrams and retighten all screws.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
201
Installing the Music Rest
Installing the Music Rest
Using the Bench (if included)
Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are
provided.
CAUTION
• Be careful not to get your finger(s) caught while
assembling.
• Always place the chair on a flat, stable surface. Placing
the chair on uneven surfaces may result in it becoming
unstable or overturn, and possibly resulting in injury.
Music rest brackets x 2
1
Music rest
• Keep special watch over any small children, since the
bench is not stable compared to benches of four legs.
1
Attach the two music rest brackets to
the rear panel of the Main unit.
Place the bench on the floor with the
seating surface face down.
Untie the securing band on the legs, and put the
ends into the pockets on both sides.
Use the inside slots (as shown).
Securing
band
2
202
Attach the Music rest to the brackets.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
2
Pull up the leg slowly.
Using the Bench (if included)
3
Open the legs, then secure one side to
the hooks (as shown), making sure they
are locked in.
5
To fold back, put the bench on the floor
with the seating surface face down.
Hooks
Lock lever
4
Turn over the bench as shown in the
illustration.
6
The lock is at the rear side of the bench.
Press the lock lever downward, then
press the leg not having the lock, then
release the hooks while closing the
legs.
Lock
lever
Caps
To keep the stand from teetering, adjust the two
oblong shaped caps (on the side of the lock lever),
rotating them as necessary.
7
Reverse the sequence of steps 1 – 2 to
fold back the bench.
NOTE
14
When rotating the caps, pull them outward slightly (about
10 mm) for ease in rotating. After making adjustments,
push them back inside.
Appendix
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
203
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause and Solution
GENERAL OPERATION
A click or pop is heard when the power is
turned on or off.
Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal.
The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds
after turning the power on.
This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up.
A cracking noise is sometimes heard.
Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an
electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this
occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from the
device that seems to be the source of the problem.
Interference from radio, TV, or other sources
occurs.
This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an amateur
ham radio setup or a mobile phone.
The sound of the Electone causes
surrounding objects to resonate.
Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance
may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows. To avoid
this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume.
In the LCD display, there are some black
points (unlit) or white points (always lit).
Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs.
Some buttons on the panel do not respond.
The UPPER/LOWER ORGAN FLUTES and LEAD VOICE 2 buttons are invalid on the
Electone.
Some of the LEDs in the DISPLAY SELECT
section do not light.
The LEDs of on/off buttons (UPPER/LOWER ORGAN FLUTES, VOICE EDIT, RHYTHM
PROGRAM, and ROTARY SP SPEED) are lit when those functions are turned on. The
LEDs of other function’s buttons momentarily light when the functions are selected.
The sound is too small even when the
volume is set to its maximum.
• The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it clockwise.
• The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe.
• The POWER switch of the speaker may have been turned off. Turn it on.
• The POWER switch of the speaker may have been set to OFF. Switch it to ON.
The Electone panel does not function
normally or the content of the memorized
data has changed.
This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to electrical
storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/or alter the
contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory Set operation to
reset the Electone (page 23).
VOICES/RHYTHMS
204
The pitch may sound excessively high on
the Pedalboard and low in the higher
registers of the Lower and Upper keyboards.
This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano.
Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the
Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.
Some of the Voices may contain cracking
and/or noisy sounds.
You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely added
effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind instruments such as
the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.
When too many keys are pressed, not all of
the notes sound.
Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower Keyboards) is
14 notes. When you turn the Pedal Polyphonic mode to on, the total is 14 for all
keyboards, Upper, Lower and Pedalboard.
When sustain length is set to HOLD,
previously played notes are cut off.
Since the HOLD setting causes notes to keep sounding, the cumulative notes
(elements) may go over the maximum elements that the Electone can sound.
When this occurs, previously played notes are cut off.
Only one sound is heard when two notes of
the Lead or Pedal Voices are simultaneously
played.
For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that only one
note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. If you want, the Pedal
Voice can be set to polyphonic mode (page 42).
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause and Solution
The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though
the volume is properly set.
• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn off the
mode in the display (page 64).
• [TO LOWER ] button in the Pedal Voice section is turned on. Turn the function off
(page 27).
When selecting a User button Voice or
rhythm, the Voice or rhythm title at the top of
the LCD does not match the selected Voice
or rhythm.
The currently assigned Voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD, and
remains until another Voice or rhythm has been selected.
When keys are pressed, the sounds of
percussion instruments are also heard.
The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the function,
be sure to turn it off (page 66).
Even though a User button’s rhythm has
been selected and started, the pattern does
not sound.
Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern has
not been saved to the selected User button.
EFFECTS
The Touch Tone function does not operate.
Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display (page 41).
The Reverb effect is not applied to the
desired Voice sections, even when the
REVERB button setting on the panel is
increased.
Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb display Pages 2
– 4.
The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard,
even when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button
in the DISPLAY SELECT section is on.
Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display Pages 3 and/or 4
(for panel Voices), or in the Organ Flute Voices ATTACK/VOLUME Page (for Organ
Flute Voices).
ACCOMPANIMENT
The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not
change, even when pressing different keys
of the keyboard.
Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave
interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed
outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.
While an Intro/Ending pattern is
automatically playing, the Lower keyboard
does not produce any sound, even when the
keys are played.
Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the Lower
keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of an Intro/
Ending pattern.
The Accompaniment cannot be heard even
when an appropriate Accompaniment type is
selected and the rhythm has been started.
• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the
Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 63).
The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord
function cannot be heard.
The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the volume
of the Upper Keyboard Voices.
The bass phrase of the Auto Bass Chord
cannot be heard.
The pedal polyphonic mode may be set to on. Turn it off in the Voice Condition
display (page 42).
• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on
(page 63).
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 93.
VOICE EDITING
The Voice Edit display cannot be called up
even when the [VOICE EDIT] button is
pressed.
The Voice Edit display cannot called up by pressing only the [VOICE EDIT] button.
While holding down the [VOICE EDIT] button, press the desired Voice button.
During Voice editing, the specified Voice
isn’t heard, even when the keyboard is
played.
• The Element is turned to mute or its level is set to minimum. Turn it to on or
increase the volume.
An error message appears while the Voice
name is entered.
Voice name capacity is 16 characters. Delete the unnecessary letters or spaces.
14
Appendix
Certain functions have not been memorized
to Registration Memory.
• You may have played keys outside the range of Note Limit. Play only keys within
the Note Limit range.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
205
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause and Solution
RHYTHM PROGRAM
During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program,
no sound is produced even when you play a
certain percussion sound.
If percussion sounds have been recorded while memory is full, no subsequently
selected instruments can be heard or recorded. If necessary, erase some of the less
necessary percussion sounds and play again.
MUSIC DATA RECORDER
The USB flash drive is not recognized.
Check whether the connected USB flash drive is supported or not from the website
below:
http://download.yamaha.com/
Recording or playback cannot be
performed.
• The part buttons in the Rec Standby display or Playing display may have been
turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY.
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance
data is 1 MB.
Recording is stopped before the
performance is finished.
• The amount of recorded data on the USB flash drive is close to the maximum limit.
Either use another USB flash drive or delete the data of unnecessary Songs.
• When you overwrite the Song, the length of a subsequently recorded part cannot
exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the previously recorded
Song, then record again (page 126)
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance
data is 1 MB.
An error message appears while entering a
folder name or Song name.
• The folder/Song name is too long. The capacity is 50 letters.
• The folder/Song name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 115.
• The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234 letters. Reduce
the layer or shorten the folder/Song name to shorten the path.
206
The rhythm does not start at the beginning of
a recording, or stops in the middle of the
performance.
The MDR is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very beginning of a
recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time indicator appears in the
display.
The notes of the recording are “stuck” and
sound continuously.
During playback, you may have removed the USB flash drive. Whenever you wish to
stop playback, always press the [J] (Stop) button before removing the USB flash
drive.
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Specifications
Specifications
PRODUCT NAME
DIGITAL ORGAN
TONE GENERATION
AWM
KEYBOARD
Upper: 49 keys (C – C), Lower: 49 keys (C – C), Pedal: 20 keys (C – G)
Keyboard Type
Standard (FS)
Initial Touch
Upper, Lower, Pedal
After Touch
Upper, Lower
REGISTRATIONS Registration Menu
506
Registration Memory
1 Unit 16 x 5
M. (Memory), 1 – 16, D. (Disable)
Registration Shift
VOICE
Shift, Jump, User (1 Unit: 400 steps), Next Unit
Voice Sections
Voice Buttons
Upper 1, Upper 2, Lead 1, Lead 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1, Pedal 2
Upper/
Lower
Lead
VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET, USER 1, TO LOWER (Lead 1), SOLO (Lead 2)
Pedal
CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1, TO LOWER
Preset Voices
AWM: 986
User Voices
AWM: 80 (each Unit)
Voice Link
Yes
Organ Flute Voices
Types: Sine, Vintage, Euro
Footage: 16', 5 1/3', 8', 4', 2 2/3', 2', 1 3/5', 1 1/3', 1'
Attack: 4', 2 2/3', 2', Length, Response
Mode: First, Each
Vibrato: Depth, Speed
Effects: XG Rotary Sp, Rotary Sp 1 – 5, 2Way Rot Sp, Dual Rotsp 1 – 2, Dual Rot Brt,
Dual Rot Wrm, Dist+Rot Sp, Odrv+Rot Sp, Amp+Rot Sp, Dist+2Rot Sp,
Odrv+2Rop Sp, Amp+2Rot Sp, OFF
Rotary Speaker Control
EFFECT/
CONDITION
2.69 – 39.7 Hz, Slow, Stop
Sustain
Reverb
(Voice Sections/
Rhythm)
Upper1, 2 (Foot pedal), Lower1, 2 (Foot pedal), Pedal1, 2
Types
Hall 1 – 3, M, L, XG Hall 1 – 2, Room 1 – 4 , S, M, L, XG Room 1 – 3, Stage 1 – 2,
XG Stage 1 – 2, Plate 1 – 2, XG Plate, GM Plate, White Room, Atmo Hall,
Acostic Room, Drums Room, Perc Room, Tunnel, Canyon, Basement
Depth
Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2, Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion, Accompaniment,
Keyboard Percussion, Upper Organ Flutes, Lower Organ Flutes
Voice Section Effects
RHYTHMS
Reverb, Delay, ER/Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Tremolo/Auto Pan,
Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Distortion+, Amp Simulator, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer,
Pitch Change, Miscellaneous, Thru
Rhythm Buttons
MARCH, WALTZ, SWING&JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN, WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD,
ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2
Preset Rhythm Patterns
634 (including the metronome)
Parts
Main Drum, Add Drum
Sections
ACCOMPANIMENT
Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, Main/Fill In A – D, Break, Auto Fill
Accompaniment Parts
Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2
Auto Bass Chord
OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.
Memory: Lower, Pedal
Melody On Chord
OFF, 1, 2, 3, Foot pedal
Voice Edit
Yes
Rhythm Pattern Program
Yes
Rhythm Sequence Program
Keyboard Percussion
CONTROLS
Footswitch
1 Unit
Preset 1 – 2, User 1 – 40
(Pan, Pitch coarse, Pitch fine, Reverb, Volume)
Left
Right
Expression Pedal
2nd Expression Pedal
Foot Pedal
1 Unit SEQ. 1 – 4 (Rhythm and Registration program)
14
Appendix
PROGRAMS
STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO, ORGAN,
PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1, USER 2
Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3
Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Glide Time
Rotary Speaker
Registration Shift
Yes
Pitch Bend, Tempo
Sustain (Upper/Lower), M.O.C., Lead Slide, Solo (Lead 2)
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
207
Specifications
CONTROLS
Transpose
-6 – +6
Pitch
A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz, Default value: A = 440.0 Hz
MIDI Control
Main Controls
Yes
Main unit
POWER on/off, MASTER VOLUME
Speaker
POWER on/off, VOLUME, SOUND TYPE1/2
MDR
Search,
Song Select: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Record, Custom Play, Score,
Setting (Tempo/Part), Unit Edit
Tools: Create Folder, Change Song Name, Copy, Delete,
Conversion (XG/TO EL/FROM EL), Format, Information
Audio Recording/Playback
Play: Stop, Play, Pause, Rewind, Fast Forward, Volume, Tempo, Pitch
Record: Stop, Record
Tools: Create Folder, Change Name, Copy, Delete, Format, Information
File Format: .wav (44.1kHz,16bit, stereo)
Utility
Language (English/Japanese), Touch Panel Sound, LCD Brightness,
Mic. (Reverb/Volume), Disable Mode (Normal/Tempo), Initialize
Display Select
OTHERS
Display
Sound System
VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR, FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY, AUDIO, VOICE EDIT,
RHYTHM PATTERN PROGRAM, RHYTHM SEQUENCE PROGRAM,
U. ORGAN FLUTES, L. ORGAN FLUTES, ROTARY SP SPEED
Type
TFT Color Wide VGA LCD
Size
800 × 480 dots
7 inch
Power
Amplifiers
(20W + 15W) × 2
Speakers
(Cone: 96 mm, Dome: 19 mm) × 2
Storage
USB flash drive
Connectors
Power
Supply
Main unit
PHONES (PHONE), MIC (PHONE), MIC VOLUME, OUTPUT L/L+R, R (PHONE),
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) MAIN L/L+R, R, SUB 1, 2 (PHONE),
AUX IN L/L+R, R (PHONE), TO PEDAL, USB TO DEVICE×3, USB TO HOST,
MIDI IN/OUT, FOOT PEDAL (SUSTAIN)
Speaker
INPUT1 (RCA), INPUT2 (PHONE)
Adaptor
Main unit
PA-300C
Power
Consumption
Main unit
28W (When using PA-300C AC adaptor)
Dimensions (W x D x H) ELC-02
1185 mm × 652 mm × 938 mm
1185 mm × 652 mm × 1091 mm (with Music rest)
45.8 kg
46.8 kg (with Music rest)
Weight
Dimensions (W x D x H) ELCU-M02
(Main unit)
1149 mm × 425 mm × 209 mm
1149 mm × 519 mm × 362 mm (with Music rest)
Weight
17.0 kg
18.0 kg (with Music rest)
Dimensions (W x D x H) Pedal unit
873 mm × 539 mm × 310 mm
Weight
13.0 kg
Dimensions (W x D x H) Speaker
144 mm × 191 mm × 242 mm
167 mm × 243 mm × 390 mm (with the fixing bracket for the speaker installed)
Weight
3.3 kg × 2
4.9 kg × 2 (with the fixing bracket for the speaker installed)
Dimensions (W x D x H) Stand
1185 mm × 652 mm × 750 mm
Weight
6.0 kg
Dimensions (W x D x H) Bench
637 mm × 324 mm × 580 mm
Weight
5.4 kg
Supplied Accessories
• Owner’s Manual (this book)
• Owner’s Manual (for the Speaker)
•
•
•
•
•
Music rest
Music rest brackets (× 2)
AC adaptor: PA-300C
Power cord (for the Electone)
Bench
*The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then
download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your
Yamaha dealer.
208
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
Index
Index
Numerics
E
L
2nd Expression Pedal .........................178
EACH (Organ Flutes) ............................ 38
L. ORGAN FLUTE ................................ 38
EFFECT ................................................. 43
LANGUAGE ......................................... 16
A
Effect category (Voice) ......................... 43
LAST (Lead Voice) ............................... 42
A.B.C./M.O.C. .................................64, 65
Effect Parameters ................................. 43
LAYER (Voice Edit) ............................ 138
ACCENT ..............................................148
EFFECT TYPE (Organ Flutes) ............... 39
LCD BRIGHTNESS ............................... 16
Accompaniment ....................................63
Effect type (Voice) ................................ 43
LCD Display ......................................... 12
Ad Hoc Mode ......................................193
Element ............................................... 136
Lead Slide ............................................ 43
Add Drum .............................................63
ENDING .......................................... 55, 56
Lead Voice ........................................... 24
AEM ........................................................7
EQ (Equalizer) .................................... 138
LEAD VOICE (Panel) ............................ 10
AFTER touch (Pitch) ..............................41
EQ/ENHANCER (Effect) ....................... 53
LEVEL (Voice Edit) ............................. 138
AFTER touch (Touch Tone) ...................41
ER/KARAOKE ....................................... 52
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) ........ 140
AMP SIMULATOR .................................53
Expression pedal .................................. 13
Lower Keyboard Voice ......................... 25
ARTICULATION ....................................43
EXTERNAL .......................................... 188
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE (Panel) .... 10
ATTACK (Organ Flutes) ........................38
F
M
ATTACK RATE (Voice Edit) .................139
Factory Set ........................................... 23
[M.] (Memory) ...................................... 93
Audio ...................................................130
Fast forward ........................................ 120
M.O.C. .................................................. 65
Audio Recording .................................130
FEET ..................................................... 42
MAIN .................................................... 55
Auto Bass Chord ...................................64
File ...................................................... 107
Main Drum ............................................ 63
Auto Fill .................................................56
FILL IN .................................................. 55
MASTER VOLUME ............................... 13
AUX IN ................................................182
Filter .................................................... 139
MDR ................................................... 104
AWM (Voice Edit) ................................137
FINGERED CHORD .............................. 64
Melody On Chord ................................. 65
AWM Voice ...........................................37
FIRST (Organ Flutes) ............................ 38
MEMORY (A.B.C.) ................................ 65
FLANGER ............................................. 52
METRONOME .................................... 145
B
Folder ................................................. 107
MIDI Control ....................................... 188
Bank ......................................................96
Foot Pedal .......................................... 176
MIDI IN/OUT ....................................... 182
BAR/BEAT .............................................57
FOOT SWITCH ............................. 97, 174
MIDI OUT FILTER ............................... 188
BREAK ..................................................55
FOOTAGE ............................................. 38
MISCELLANEOUS ............................... 53
BRILLIANCE .........................................42
Footswitch .......................................... 174
MODE (Organ Flutes) .......................... 38
FORMAT (MDR) .................................. 109
MODE (Rotary Speaker) ...................... 47
ASSEMBLE .........................................145
C
Music Data Recorder ......................... 104
CHANGE NAME (Song) ......................114
G
CHORD 1 ..............................................63
Gate Time ........................................... 153
N
CHORD 2 ..............................................63
Glide ................................................... 175
Next Page .......................................... 123
Next Unit ............................................ 117
CHORUS (Effect) ..................................52
CHORUS (Rhythm Pattern Program) ..155
H
NEXT UNIT (Shift End) ......................... 98
Computer ............................................187
Headphones ....................................... 183
NOTE LIMIT ........................................ 138
NOTE SHIFT ....................................... 138
CONVERT FROM EL ...........................129
I
CONVERT TO XG ...............................127
Infrastructure Mode ............................ 190
O
CUSTOM A.B.C. ...................................65
INITIAL touch ........................................ 41
Organ Flutes ........................................ 38
CUTOFF FREQ. ...................................139
Initialize (Factory Set) ........................... 23
OUTPUT (MIDI) .................................. 188
Initialize (Registration Memory) ............ 96
D
Initialize (Wireless LAN settings) ........ 196
P
[D.] (Disable) ........................................94
INTERNAL .......................................... 188
PAD ...................................................... 63
DATA CONTROL dial ............................12
INTRO ................................................... 55
PAN (Voice Edit) ................................ 138
DELAY (Effect) ......................................52
14
Appendix
CONVERT TO EL ................................128
PAN (Voice) .......................................... 41
DELAY (Vibrato) ....................................42
J
Part (Rhythm) ....................................... 63
DEPTH (Reverb) ...................................44
Jacks and Controls ............................. 181
PATTERN ........................................... 142
DEPTH (Vibrato) ....................................42
JUMP .................................................... 97
Pause ................................................. 120
Display Select .......................................12
Pedal polyphonic mode ....................... 42
DISTORTION .........................................52
K
Pedal unit ........................................... 199
DYNAMIC ..............................................53
Keyboard Percussion ........................... 66
Pedal Voice .......................................... 25
PEDAL VOICE (Panel) .......................... 10
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
209
Index
PHASER ................................................52
SINGLE FINGER ................................... 64
Version ................................................. 23
PHONES .............................................181
SLIDE .................................................... 43
VIBRATO .............................................. 42
PHRASE 1 .............................................63
SLOW (Rotary Speaker) ....................... 47
VIBRATO (Organ Flutes) ...................... 39
PHRASE 2 .............................................63
SOLO .................................................... 27
Voice .................................................... 24
Pitch ....................................................180
Song ........................................... 107, 110
Voice button ......................................... 25
PITCH (Voice section) ...........................41
Song Copy .......................................... 124
Voice Condition .............................. 26, 41
Pitch Bend ..........................................178
Song Delete ........................................ 126
VOICE DISPLAY ................................... 17
PITCH CHANGE ...................................53
Speaker ........................................ 13, 198
Voice Edit ........................................... 136
Playback .............................................119
Specifications ..................................... 207
VOICE EDIT (Panel) ........................... 136
POLY .....................................................42
SPEED (Rotary Speaker) ...................... 47
Voice Guide ......................................... 17
Power switch .........................................13
SPEED (Vibrato) ................................... 43
Voice Link ....................................... 41, 48
PRESET (Vibrato) ..................................42
Stand .................................................. 197
Voice Menu .......................................... 25
Preset Keyboard Percussion ................66
START ................................................... 55
Voice section ........................................ 24
PRESET TEMPO ....................................58
Step Write ........................................... 146
Volume (Accompaniment) ................... 63
PRIORITY ..............................................42
STOP (Rotary Speaker) ........................ 47
Volume (Keyboard Percussion) ........... 67
Protected Song ...................................119
STOP (Shift End) ................................... 98
VOLUME (MIC.) ................................. 185
Punch-in Recording ............................114
Style File Format ................................. 159
VOLUME (Organ Flutes) ...................... 39
Super Articulation Voice ....................... 37
VOLUME (Rhythm Pattern Program) .. 155
Q
Sustain .................................................. 46
VOLUME (Rhythm) ............................... 57
Quantize ..............................................151
SUSTAIN (Panel) .................................. 46
VOLUME (Voice) .................................. 26
SYNCHRO START ................................ 55
R
W
Real Time Write ...........................146, 151
T
WAH ..................................................... 53
Recording (Audio) ..............................130
Tempo (MDR) ..................................... 121
Wireless LAN settings ........................ 189
Recording (Lead Voice 1 Voice only) .113
TEMPO (Rhythm) .................................. 57
WPS .................................................... 190
Recording (MDR) ................................112
THRU (Effect) ....................................... 53
Recording (Part) .................................113
TIME (Slide) .......................................... 43
X
Registration Memory .............................93
TO LOWER ........................................... 27
XG .......................................................... 7
REGISTRATION MENU .........................19
TOP ....................................................... 42
Registration Sequence .......................170
TOP (Lead Voice) ................................. 42
Registration Shift ...................................97
TOP (Shift End) ..................................... 98
RELEASE RATE (Voice Edit) ...............139
TOUCH PANEL SOUND ....................... 16
Remaining Memory Capacity .............158
TOUCH TONE ...................................... 41
Repeat ................................................121
TOUCH VIBRATO ................................. 43
Re-recording (Retry) ...........................112
Transpose ........................................... 180
RESONANCE ......................................139
TRANSPOSE (Voice section) ................ 44
RESP. (Response) ................................38
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN ......................... 52
Reverb ..................................................44
TUNE (Voice section) ........................... 44
REVERB (MIC.) ...................................185
TUNE FINE (Voice Edit) ...................... 138
REVERB (Panel) ....................................44
REVERB (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...155
U
Rewind ................................................120
U. ORGAN FLUTES .............................. 38
Rhythm ..................................................54
Unit ....................................................... 96
Rhythm button .......................................54
UNIT EDIT (MDR) ............................... 116
Rhythm Clock ......................................148
Upper Keyboard Voice ......................... 24
Rhythm Condition .................................56
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE (Panel) ..... 10
Rhythm Menu ........................................54
USB flash drive ................................... 108
Rhythm Pattern Program .....................142
USB TO DEVICE ......................... 108, 182
Rhythm Program .................................142
USB TO HOST .................................... 182
Rhythm Sequence Program ................168
USER (Registration Shift) ...................... 97
Rhythmic Chord ..................................152
USER (Vibrato) ..................................... 42
ROTARY SP SPEED ..............................47
User button (Rhythm) ........................... 58
Rotary Speaker .....................................47
User button (Voice) .............................. 28
User Keyboard Percussion .................. 79
S
User Rhythm ....................................... 157
SCORE ................................................122
User Voice .......................................... 140
Section ..................................................55
UTILITY ................................................. 16
SEQUENCE .........................................168
SETTINGS (MDR) ................................110
V
SHIFT (Registration Shift) ......................97
VARIATION (Rhythm Pattern Program)
............................................................. 156
SHIFT END ............................................98
210
ELC-02/ELCU-M02 Owner’s Manual
About Using BSD-Licensed Software
The software used by this product includes components
that comply with the BSD license.
The restrictions placed on users of software released
under a typical BSD license are that if they redistribute
such software in any form, with or without modification,
they must include in the redistribution (1) a disclaimer of
liability, (2) the original copyright notice and (3) a list of
licensing provisions.
The following contents are displayed based on the
licensing conditions described above, and do not govern
your use of the product.
WPA Supplicant
Copyright © 2003-2009, Jouni Malinen <[email protected]> and
contributors
All Rights Reserved.
This program is dual-licensed under both the GPL version
2 and BSD license. Either license may be used at your
option.
License
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright
holder(s) nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
XySSL
Copyright © 2006-2008, Christophe Devine.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of XySSL nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Manual Development Group
© 2016 Yamaha Corporation
Published 05/2017 MWTO-C0
Printed in Japan
ZY80650
ZY80650
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement